SlideShare a Scribd company logo
COURSE GUIDE W ix 
COURSE GUIDE DESCRIPTION 
You must read this Course Guide carefully from the beginning to the end. It tells 
you briefly what the course is about and how you can work your way through 
the course material. It also suggests the amount of time you are likely to spend in 
order to complete the course successfully. Please keep on referring to Course 
Guide as you go through the course material as it will help you to clarify 
important study components or points that you might miss or overlook. 
INTRODUCTION 
HBSC1103 Teaching and Learning of Science is one of the courses offered by the 
Faculty of Education and Languages at Open University Malaysia (OUM). This 
course is worth 3 credit hours and should be covered over 8 to 15 weeks. 
COURSE AUDIENCE 
This course is offered to all students taking the Bachelor of Teaching majoring in 
Science (with Honours) programme. This module aims to impart the 
fundamentals of the teaching and learning of science. This module should be able 
to form a strong foundation for teachers to plan effective science lessons. 
As an open and distance learner, you should be acquainted with learning 
independently and being able to optimise the learning modes and environment 
available to you. Before you begin this course, please ensure you have the right 
course materials and understand the course requirements as well as how the 
course is conducted. 
STUDY SCHEDULE 
It is a standard OUM practice that learners accumulate 40 study hours for every 
credit hour. As such, for a three-credit hour course, you are expected to spend 
120 study hours. Table 1 gives an estimation of how the 120 study hours could be 
accumulated.
x X COURSE GUIDE 
Table 1: Estimation of Time Accumulation of Study Hours 
Study Activities Study Hours 
Briefly go through the course content and participate in initial 
discussions 3 
Study the module 60 
Attend 3 to 5 tutorial sessions 10 
Online Participation 12 
Revision 15 
Assignment(s), Test(s) and Examination(s) 20 
TOTAL STUDY HOURS 120 
COURSE OBJECTIVES 
By the end of this course, you should be able to: 
1. Explain how children view science and what the nature of science is; 
2. Demonstrate knowledge of basic concepts of childrenÊs ideas in science, 
where do they come from and how they influence learning in science; 
3. Describe how developmental and learning theories have contributed to 
childrenÊs learning in science; 
4. Demonstrate a knowledge of the constructivist approach to learning; and 
5. Describe the inquiry approach in teaching science in primary school.
COURSE GUIDE W xi 
COURSE SYNOPSIS 
This course is divided into 8 topics. The synopsis for each topic can be listed as 
follows: 
Topic 1 begins with a discussion on the concept of what science is, the nature of 
science, the scientific method and scientific literacy. Lastly the discussion is about 
the relationship between science and technology. 
Topic 2 introduces the behavioural views of learning. The theories of Pavlov, 
Thorndike and Skinner and their contributions to teaching and learning will be 
discussed. 
Topic 3 introduces the cognitive learning theories. Later the Piaget and Bruner 
learning theories are discussed in detail. Then the application of these theories 
will be discussed. 
Topic 4 also discusses cognitive learning theories. AusubelÊs Deductive Learning 
Theory, GagneÊs Theory of Mastery Learning and the Multiple Intelligences 
Theory will be discussed. 
Topic 5 examines the inquiry approach in the teaching of science. The 
advantages, the types of inquiry and the conditions necessary for the successful 
implementation of inquiry learning will be discussed. Questioning skills for 
inquiry learning will be discussed at the end of the topic. 
Topic 6 describes constructivism. Alternative conceptions and implications to 
science learning are also explained. Constructivist learning approaches such as 
the Learning Cycles Model, Predict-ObserveăExplain (POE) Model and 
NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model in the teaching of science are discussed. 
Topic 7 describes three approaches in teaching science ă science, technology and 
society, contextual, and problem-based learning. For each approach, the concept, 
its characteristics and how to teach using the approach will be discussed. 
Topic 8 discusses teaching and learning methods such as experiments, 
discussions, simulations, projects and visits; and how they are used to enhance 
science learning.
x ii X COURSE GUIDE 
TEXT ARRANGEMENT GUIDE 
Before you go through this module, it is important that you note the text 
arrangement. Understanding the text arrangement will help you to organise your 
study of this course in a more objective and effective way. Generally, the text 
arrangement for each topic is as follows: 
Learning Outcomes: This section refers to what you should achieve after you 
have completely covered a topic. As you go through each topic, you should 
frequently refer to these learning outcomes. By doing this, you can continuously 
gauge your understanding of the topic. 
Self-Check: This component of the module is inserted at strategic locations 
throughout the module. It may be inserted after one sub-section or a few sub-sections. 
It usually comes in the form of a question. When you come across this 
component, try to reflect on what you have already learnt thus far. By attempting 
to answer the question, you should be able to gauge how well you have 
understood the sub-section(s). Most of the time, the answers to the questions can 
be found directly from the module itself. 
Activity: Like Self-Check, the Activity component is also placed at various 
locations or junctures throughout the module. This component may require you 
to solve questions, explore short case studies, or conduct an observation or 
research. It may even require you to evaluate a given scenario. When you come 
across an Activity, you should try to reflect on what you have gathered from the 
module and apply it to real situations. You should, at the same time, engage 
yourself in higher order thinking where you might be required to analyse, 
synthesise and evaluate instead of only having to recall and define. 
Summary: You will find this component at the end of each topic. This component 
helps you to recap the whole topic. By going through the summary, you should 
be able to gauge your knowledge retention level. Should you find points in the 
summary that you do not fully understand, it would be a good idea for you to 
revisit the details in the module. 
Key Terms: This component can be found at the end of each topic. You should go 
through this component to remind yourself of important terms or jargon used 
throughout the module. Should you find terms here that you are not able to 
explain, you should look for the terms in the module. 
References: The References section is where a list of relevant and useful 
textbooks, journals, articles, electronic contents or sources can be found. The list 
can appear in a few locations such as in the Course Guide (at the References
COURSE GUIDE W xiii 
section), at the end of every topic or at the back of the module. You are 
encouraged to read or refer to the suggested sources to obtain the additional 
information needed and to enhance your overall understanding of the course. 
PRIOR KNOWLEDGE 
No prior knowledge is required. 
ASSESSMENT METHOD 
Please refer to myVLE. 
REFERENCES 
Abruscato, J. (2004). Teaching children science: A discovery approach (5th ed.). 
Boston: Allyn & Bacon. 
Driver, R. (1983). The pupil as scientist. Buckingham: Open University Press. 
Driver, R., Guesne, E., & Tiberghien, A. (1985). ChildrenÊs ideas in science. 
Buckingham: Open University Press. 
Driver, R., Leach, J., Miller, R., & Scott, P. (1996). Young peopleÊs images of 
science. Buckingham: Open University Press. 
Esler, W. K., & Esler, M. K. (2001). Teaching elementary science (8th 
ed.).Washington: Wadsworth Publishing Company. 
Fleer, M., & Hardy. T. (2001). Science for children: Developing a personal 
approach to teaching (2nd ed.). Sydney: Prentice Hall. 
Martin, D. J. (2006). Elementary science methods: A constructivist approach. 
Belmont: Thomson Wadsworth. 
Martin, R., Sexton, C., & Gerlovich, J. (2002). Teaching science for all children- 
Methods for constructing understanding. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. 
Skamp, K. (2004). Teaching primary science constructively. Southbank, Victoria: 
Harcourt Brace.
x iv X COURSE GUIDE
Table of Contents 
Course Guide ix-xiii 
Topic 1 Teaching and Learning Science 1 
1.1 What is Science? 3 
1.1.1 Science as a Process 5 
1.1.2 Science as a Product 6 
1.1.3 Science as Attitudes 7 
1.2 The Nature of Science 8 
1.3 The Scientific Method 10 
1.4 Science and Technology 16 
1.4.1 What is Technology? 16 
1.4.2 Relationship between Science and Technology 17 
Summary 18 
Key Terms 19 
References 19 
Topic 2 Behaviourist Developmental Theories 21 
2.1 Behavioural Views of Learning 22 
2.2 PavlovÊs Theory 24 
2.2.1 Pavlov and Classical Conditioning 25 
2.2.2 Common Processes in Classical Conditioning 27 
2.2.3 Applications of PavlovÊs Theory in the 
Teaching of Science 28 
2.3 ThorndikeÊs Theory 30 
2.3.1 ThorndikeÊs Laws 31 
2.3.2 Applications of ThorndikeÊs Theory in the 
Teaching of Science 32 
2.4 SkinnerÊs Theory 33 
2.4.1 Skinner and Operant Conditioning 34 
2.4.2 Reinforcement 35 
2.4.3 Punishment 37 
2.4.4 Reinforcement Schedules 37 
2.4.5 Applications of SkinnerÊs Theory in the 
Teaching of Science 39 
Summary 41 
Key Terms 43 
References 43
i v X TABLE OF CONTENTS 
Topic 3 Cognitive Developmental Theories 1 45 
3.1 Cognitive Learning Theory 46 
3.2 Cognitive Learning Theory Exponents 47 
3.2.1 PiagetÊs Learning Theory 47 
3.2.2 Identifying the Stages of Development 49 
3.2.3 Applications of PiagetÊs Theory in Teaching Various 
Children at Stages of Development 51 
3.3 BrunerÊs Theories 56 
3.3.1 Discovery Learning 57 
3.3.2 Inductive Thinking 59 
3.3.3 Stages of Cognitive Growth 61 
3.3.4 Application of BrunerÊs Theories in the 
Teaching of Science 63 
Summary 66 
Key Terms 66 
References 67 
Topic 4 Cognitive Learning Theories 2 69 
4.1 AusubelÊs Deductive Learning 70 
4.1.1 Meaningful Learning 71 
4.1.2 Advance Organiser 72 
4.2 Application of AusubelÊs Deductive Thinking 
in Science Teaching 74 
4.3 GagneÊs Mastery Learning 78 
4.3.1 GagneÊs Categories of Learning 79 
4.3.2 GagneÊs Hierarchy of Intellectual Skills 81 
4.3.3 GagneÊs Nine Instructional Events 83 
4.4 Application of GagneÊs Mastery Learning 
in Science Teaching 85 
4.5 Multiple Intelligences Theory 86 
4.6 Application of Multiple Intelligences Theory 
in Science Teaching 89 
Summary 91 
Key Terms 92 
References 93 
Appendix 1 94 
Topic 5 Inquiry Learning 96 
5.1 Inquiry and Discovery 98 
5.1.1 Inquiry Cycle 99 
5.1.2 Advantages of Inquiry Learning 102 
5.2 Types of Inquiry Learning 104 
5.3 Conditions for Inquiry Learning 108
TABLE OF CONTENTS W v 
5.4 Questioning Skills for Inquiry Teaching 110 
5.4.1 Types of Questions 110 
5.4.2 Ways to Facilitate Questioning from Students 115 
Summary 117 
Key Terms 118 
References 118 
Topic 6 Constructivism 120 
6.1 What is Constructivism? 121 
6.1.1 Characteristics of a Constructivist Classroom 123 
6.2 Alternative Conceptions: Science Learning Implications 124 
6.3 Constructivist Teaching Approaches 128 
6.3.1 5-E Learning Cycle Model 128 
6.3.2 Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model 129 
6.3.3 Needham's Five Phase Model 131 
Summary 133 
Key Terms 134 
References 134 
Topic 7 Teaching Approaches in Science 136 
7.1 Science, Technology and Society Approach 137 
7.1.1 Concept of STS 138 
7.1.2 Background of STS Approach 139 
7.1.3 Characteristics of STS Approach 140 
7.2 Contextual Approach in Teaching and Learning of Science 142 
7.2.1 Definitions and Concepts of CTL Approach 143 
7.2.2 CTL Forms of Learning 146 
7.3 Problem-Based Learning (PBL) 152 
7.3.1 What is PBL? 152 
7.3.2 PBL characteristics 153 
7.3.3 PBL and Inquiry 155 
Summary 160 
Key Terms 161 
References 162 
Topic 8 Teaching and Learning Methods 164 
8.1 Experiments 166 
8.1.1 Discussion of Experimental Results 168 
8.2 Discussion 170 
8.2.1 Whole Class Discussions and Small 
Group Discussions 170 
8.3 Simulation 172 
8.3.1 Types of Simulation Methods 172
v i X TABLE OF CONTENTS 
8.4 Projects 175 
8.4.1 Factors to Consider while Carrying Out Projects 
in the Science Classroom 175 
8.4.2 The Process of Doing a Project 176 
8.5 Visits and use of External Resources 178 
8.5.1 Planning a Visit or Field Trip 178 
8.5.2 Virtual Field Trips 180 
Summary 181 
Key Terms 183 
References 184 
Answers 185
Topic 
1 
 Teaching and 
Learning 
Science 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain the three major components of science; 
2. Describe the nature of science; 
3. List the steps in a scientific method; 
4. Explain the meaning of scientific literacy; and 
5. Differentiate between science and technology. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Why is it important for us to learn and understand what science is? Look at the 
advertisement in Figure 1.1. What does scientifically tested mean?
2  TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 
Figure 1.1: An example of a bread advertisement 
If we know science, we would not be fooled by this advertisement. We would 
know how to evaluate information and make wise decision when it comes to our 
health. 
Before we go any further, do you think knowing science and knowing about 
science are the same? They are different. Knowing science deals with the 
theories, laws, generalisations, experiments and facts in science (Lee, Y. J. et al., 
2004). In the meantime, knowing about science or scientific literacy can be 
described as thinking critically and reflectively about the cultural practices of 
science, the philosophy, the motivations, influences and frameworks behind the 
sciences. 
As a science teacher, you certainly need to master both components in order to 
facilitate effective teaching of this subject. Apart from that, you need to know 
about the nature of science, so that, you can prepare relevant science-related 
experiences for the development of science concepts and understanding. 
ACTIVITY 1.1 
Recall how science was taught when you were in primary school. Take 
time to list down the characteristics of the science lesson. Share it with 
your classmates.
TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE  3 
WHAT IS SCIENCE? 
What comes to your mind when someone mentions the word 'science'? Do you 
picture someone in a white lab coat? Someone watching stars using a telescope? 
A gardener tending to flowering bushes? Someone baking a cake? In spite of 
these differences, all of them are related to science (Figure 1.2). 
Figure 1.2: Images of science 
Sources: http://www.majalahsains.com/ 
http://suddenvalley.com 
http://www.astronomy2009.org 
http://foodthought.org 
1.1
4  TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 
Many people would associate science with a person in a white lab coat doing an 
experiment but what about the person looking at the stars by using the telescope? 
The gardener and the baker? The person looking at the stars by using the 
telescope is studying what makes up the star, while, the gardener is monitoring 
the growth of the plants. Meanwhile, the baker is trying to control the situation 
so that the cake will rise beautifully. They are all doing science. 
Science has many facets. Different individual would define science differently. 
The layperson might define science as a body of scientific information, the 
scientist might view it as procedures by which hypotheses are tested and a 
philosopher might regard science as a way of questioning the truthfulness of 
what we know. All of these views are valid, but each of them represents only a 
partial definition of science. 
If you explore the meaning of science, you may find the following definitions: 
 Science is everywhere, using it all the time, scary, can be lethal, discovery, 
exploration, learning more, theories, hypothesis, interesting, exciting, 
expensive, profitable, intelligent, status (Fleer  Hardy, 1996) 
 Knowledge about the structure and behaviour of the natural and physical 
world, based on facts you can prove (Oxford Dictionary) 
 Systematic knowledge which can be tested and proven for its truth (Kamus 
Dewan) 
 Science is a set of attitudes and a way of thinking on facts (B. F. Skinner, 2005) 
 Science is the system of knowing about the universe through data collected 
by observation and controlled experimentation. As data are collected, 
theories are advanced to explain and account for what has been observed 
(Carin  Sund, 1989) 
From the various definitions given above, you can conclude that science consists 
of three major elements: 
 Processes (or methods) 
 Products 
 Human attitudes 
Figure 1.3 shows the relationship among the three elements.
TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE  5 
Figure 1.3: The relationship among the major elements of science 
Now, let us read about each element in detail. 
1.1.1 Science as a Process 
Scientific knowledge does not come out from thin air. The body of knowledge is 
produced through the observations and experimentation being done by the 
scientist. This process has many different aspects and stages. For example, the 
astronomer will first observe carefully and maybe take measurements while 
gazing at the stars. Then, with the knowledge of the laws of physics, he or she 
will provide the basis of our understanding of our universe. 
Scientific skills are the tools used in doing the processes of science. Students will 
conduct the processes just like the scientist. Students observe objects and 
phenomena around them to understand the natural world. They will use 
empirical procedures and analyse the data to describe the science concepts. The 
science processes could also involve the formation of hypothesis, planning, 
collecting data and data interpretation before making a conclusion.
6  TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 
1.1.2 Science as a Product 
The product of science is the body of knowledge of science facts, concepts, laws 
and theories. Figure 1.4 shows the relationships and the hierarchical order of the 
science products. 
Figure 1.4: The science products 
Now, let us look at Table 1.1 which explains each component in detail.
TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE  7 
Table 1.1: The Science Products 
Science Products Descriptions 
Science Facts 
A scientific fact is the specific statement about existing objects or 
actual incidents. We use senses to observe the facts. 
There are two criteria that are used to identify a scientific fact: 
(a) It is directly observable; and 
(b) It can be demonstrated at any time. 
Science Concepts 
A concept is an abstraction of events, objects, or phenomena that 
seem to have certain properties or attributes in common. Birds, 
for example, possess certain characteristics that set them apart 
from reptiles and mammals. 
Science Laws And 
Principles 
Principles and Laws also fall into the general category of a 
concept but in a broad manner. These higher order ideas are 
used to describe what exists through empirical basis. For 
example, BernoulliÊs principle and Newton laws of motion. 
Science Theories 
Scientists use theories to explain patterns and forces that are 
hidden from direct observation. The Kinetic theory explains 
how the molecules in a solid, liquid and gas move. 
1.1.3 Science as Attitudes 
The third element in science is attitudes and values. Scientists are persons trained 
in some field of science who study phenomena through observation, 
experimentation and other rational, analytical activities. They use attitudes, such 
as being honest and accurate in recording and validating data, systematic and 
being diligent in their work. 
Thus, when planning teaching and learning activities, teachers need to inculcate 
scientific attitudes and values to the students. For example, during science 
practical work, the teacher should remind students and ensure that they carry 
out their experiments in a careful, cooperative and honest manner. 
Teachers need to plan well for effective inculcation of scientific attitudes and 
noble values during science lessons. They should examine all related learning 
outcomes and suggested teaching-learning activities that provide opportunities 
for the inculcation of scientific attitudes and noble values. This can be referred to 
in any School Science Curriculum Specification.
8  TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 
SELF-CHECK 1.1 
1. Re-read the definitions of science given by various sources. In 
your own words, explain the meaning of science. 
2. Is the statement „the earth rotates on its axis‰ a scientific concept, 
principle or theory? 
3. What are the three major elements of science? 
ACTIVITY 1.2 
With your partner, draw a mind map that summarises your definition 
of science. 
THE NATURE OF SCIENCE 
1.2 
In this subtopic, we will briefly discuss the nature of science. It refers to the main 
principles and ideas which provide a description of science methods and inquiry 
as well as the characteristics of scientific knowledge or products. You should 
read and understand all of these. Otherwise, it will result in your students 
learning distorted views about how science is conducted. 
Some points regarding the nature of science are as follows: 
(a) Scientific knowledge is not absolute but tentative 
The scientific knowledge we know today, may not be true in the future. 
Change is inevitable because new observations may disprove the current 
knowledge. For example, previously we learn that there are nine planets in 
our solar system but now the scientist communities have agreed that there 
are only eight planets. 
(b) Scientific knowledge is durable 
Although scientific knowledge is tentative, most scientific knowledge is 
durable. As technology improves, new findings are added to the field and 
this will lead to the modification of current ideas. Eventually the ideas 
become more refine, precise and widely accepted by the scientific 
community. So, we seldom see strong theories being rejected altogether.
TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE  9 
(c) Science cannot provide complete answers to all questions 
Science cannot answer all questions. Issues relating to moral, ethical, 
aesthetic, social and metaphysical questions cannot be answered by science 
method. Why? The reason is ideas and answers relating to science must be 
supported by concrete evidence. Hence, there is no scientific method to 
prove that belief on moral issues or metaphysical questions can be false. 
(d) Scientists are particularly objective 
Scientists are no different in their level of objectivity as other professions. 
They have to be very careful and thorough when carrying out experiments, 
collecting data, analysing the results and making a valid conclusion based 
on the results. However scientists are human beings too and they can make 
mistakes. So when they conduct experiments, the results may not always 
give a valid explanation as mistakes can occur due to human error. For 
example, when interpreting the data, bias can occur as the scientist may 
interpret using his or her values and beliefs which may not be the values 
and beliefs of the scientific communities. 
(e) The world is understandable 
In order to explain the phenomena that happen around us, scientists 
presume that the things and events in the universe occur in consistent 
patterns. Thus, the phenomena are comprehensible through careful and 
systematic study. They also believe that through the use of the intellect, and 
with the aid of instruments that extend the senses, people can discover 
patterns in all of nature. 
SELF-CHECK 1.2 
Tick [  ] the correct statements. 
(a) Scientific knowledge is static.  
(b) Scientific knowledge is durable.  
(c) Science cannot provide complete answers to all questions.  
(d) Scientists are particularly objective.
1 0  TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 
THE SCIENTIFIC METHOD 
1.3 
The scientific method as shown in Figure 1.5 is a process for experimentation that 
is used to explore observations and answer questions. Scientists use the scientific 
method to search for cause and effect relationships in nature. 
Figure 1.5: The scientific method 
Source: http://www.experiment-resources.com/what-is-the-scientific-method.html 
Now, have a look at the following Table 1.2 that shows the steps of the scientific 
method in detail.
TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE  11 
Table 1.2: Steps of the Scientific Method 
Steps of the Scientific 
Method 
Descriptions 
Ask question  You should start the experiment by asking questions about 
the problem you want to investigate. Start the questions 
with 5W and 1H  what, when, who, which, where and how. 
 Finally you should summarise what you want to investigate 
in the form of a testable question. Then only can you get the 
answer through the scientific method. 
Do background 
research 
 In order to understand the questions that you want to 
investigate, you probably need to collect information from 
various sources. 
 This will help you to understand the concepts surrounding 
your investigation, thus helping you to plan in solving the 
problem. 
Construct a 
hypothesis 
 A hypothesis is an educated guess about how things work: 
If _____[I do this] _____, then _____[this]_____ will 
happen. 
 You should construct the hypothesis in a way to help you 
answer your original question. 
Test your hypothesis 
by doing an 
experiment 
 You then design your investigation to collect enough data. 
 You must remember to plan your experiment to be a fair 
test. 
 You conduct a fair test by making sure that you change only 
one factor at a time, while keeping all other conditions 
unchanged. 
 You should also repeat your experiments several times to 
minimise error. 
Analyse your data 
and draw a 
conclusion 
 Here, you analyse the data collected and relate your findings 
with your hypothesis. 
 If the data support your hypothesis then you accept the 
hypothesis. If not, then probably you need to re-examine 
your hypothesis and start the entire process again. 
Communicate your 
results 
 Finally, you want to share your findings with your friends. 
 You should write your report to include all the various 
elements in your experiment. 
 You should use various tools to display your data such as 
data table, graphs and diagram, so that the findings are 
clearly communicated to others.
1 2  TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 
You must remember that the steps in the scientific method described in Table 1.2 
are cyclical, meaning that you do not just move from one step to another in a 
linear way. The reason for this is that information or thinking always changes. 
Thus, scientists sometime need to back up and repeat the steps at any point 
during the process. This process is called an iterative process. 
The scientific method is not only used to solve scientific problems. It can be 
applied in solving problems that you encounter in your everyday life. The 
systematic way of solving a problem could help you to make decisions in your 
daily life. This is what we called scientific literacy as illustrated in Figure 1.6. 
Figure 1.6: A definition of scientific literacy 
Source: Skamp (2004) 
In other words, scientific literacy means that a person can ask, find or determine 
answers to questions derived from curiosity about everyday experiences. It 
means that a person has the ability to describe, explain and predict natural 
phenomena. A scientifically-literate person should be able to evaluate the quality
TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE  13 
of scientific information on the basis of its source and the methods used to 
generate it. Scientific literacy also implies the capacity to pose and evaluate 
arguments based on evidence and to apply conclusions from such arguments 
appropriately (National Science Education Standards, page 22). 
Why do you think we need to be scientifically literate? One of the main reasons is 
that the society we live in depends on an ever-increasing application of 
technology and the scientific knowledge that makes it possible. Decisions that we 
make every day have the capacity to affect energy consumption, our personal 
health, natural resources and the environment·ultimately the well-being of 
ourselves, our community and the world. Individual decisions may not seem to 
be critical. However, when they are multiplied by 300 million people nationwide, 
or nearly 7 billion around the world, they have the power to change the face of 
the planet (Scearce, 2007). 
SELF-CHECK 1.3 
You want to find out whether the amount of sunlight in a garden 
affect tomato size. Use Figure 1.5 and Table 1.2 to help you to plan the 
experiment and find the answer. 
ACTIVITY 1.3 
Do want to find out whether you are scientifically literate? Try 
answering the test below. Answer the questions before looking at the 
actual answers! 
Test Your Scientific Literacy! 
Richard Carrier (2001) 
Answer each question with 'true' if what the sentence most normally 
means is typically true and 'false' if it is typically false. 
1. Scientists usually expect an experiment to turn out a certain 
way. 
2. Science only produces tentative conclusions that can change.
1 4  TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 
ACTIVITY 1.3 
3. Science has one uniform way of conducting research called 
„the scientific method.‰ 
4. Scientific theories are explanations and not facts. 
5. When being scientific, one must have faith only in what is 
justified by empirical evidence. 
6. Science is just about the facts, not human interpretations of 
them. 
7. To be scientific one must conduct experiments. 
8. Scientific theories only change when new information becomes 
available. 
9. Scientists manipulate their experiments to produce particular 
results. 
10. Science proves facts true in a way that is definitive and final. 
11. An experiment can prove a theory true. 
12. Science is partly based on beliefs, assumptions and the non-observable. 
13. Imagination and creativity are used in all stages of scientific 
investigations. 
14. Scientific theories are just ideas about how something works. 
15. A scientific law is a theory that has been extensively and 
thoroughly confirmed. 
16. ScientistsÊ education, background, opinions, disciplinary focus, 
and basic guiding assumptions and philosophies influence 
their perception and interpretation of the available data. 
17. A scientific law will not change because it has been proven 
true. 
18. An accepted scientific theory is a hypothesis that has been 
confirmed by considerable evidence and has endured all 
attempts to disprove it.
TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE  15 
19. A scientific law describes relationships among observable 
phenomena but does not explain them. 
20. Science relies on deduction (x entails y) more than induction (x 
implies y). 
21. Scientists invent explanations, models or theoretical entities. 
22. Scientists construct theories to guide further research. 
23. Scientists accept the existence of theoretical entities that have 
never been directly observed. 
24. Scientific laws are absolute or certain. 
Source: www.infidels.org/library/modern/richard_carrier/SciLit.html 
Answers to Activity 1.3 
1. T 9. T 17. F 
2. F 10. F 18. T 
3. F 11. F 19. T 
4. T 12. T 20. F 
5. T 13. T 21. T 
6. F 14. F 22. T 
7. F 15. F 23. T 
8. F 16. T 24. F 
How you score: 
No wrong answer A+ 
1 wrong answer A 
2 wrong answers A- 
3 wrong answers B+ 
4 wrong answers B 
5 wrong answers B- 
6 wrong answers C 
7 wrong answers D 
8 or more wrong answers F
1 6  TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 
1.4 
Look at the two ships in Figure 1.7. Can you see the differences? Why did the 
ship change from the traditional to the modern? 
(a) Traditional ship (b) Modern ship 
Figure 1.7: Ships from different ages 
Source: http://scrapety.com 
http://www.titanic-titanic.com 
The answer is as people become more intelligent they use their knowledge to 
improve the ship. They improved the engine, the type of the fuel and many other 
aspects so that the modern ship performs much more efficiently than the 
traditional ship. The use of knowledge to build and improve the modern ship is 
one example of technology. 
1.4.1 What is Technology? 
Did you know the word technology originated from the Greek term technologia 
which is made up of techne, meaning „craft‰, and logia, meaning „saying‰? The 
definition has evolved throughout history and now the word technology means 
different things to different people. 
Technology is a term that covers both the products created by human beings and 
the methods used to create those products. In simple term, technology refers to 
the way of doing something  whether a product, such as machine, or a means of 
organisation. The products of technology have been around since a long time ago 
such as the invention of the wheel. In modern times the products could be as 
simple as a pen or more sophisticated like an iPhone.
TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE  17 
The term technology is said to encompass a number of „classes‰ of technology as 
shown in Table 1.3. 
Table 1.3: Classes of Technology 
Classes Descriptions 
Technology as Objects Tools, machines, instruments, weapons, appliances  the 
physical devices of technical performance 
Technology as Knowledge The know-how behind technological innovations 
Technology as Activities What people do  their skills, methods, procedures, 
routines 
Technology as a Process Begins with a need and ends with a solution 
Technology as a Socio-technical 
System 
The manufacture and use of objects involving people and 
other objects in combination 
Source: http://atschool.eduweb.co.uk/trinity/watistec.html 
The term science and technology always goes hand-in-hand, just like the horse 
and the carriage. So, is there a relationship between science and technology? 
1.4.2 Relationship between Science and Technology 
In general, science can be regarded as the enterprise that seeks to understand 
natural phenomena and to arrange these ideas into ordered knowledge. 
Meanwhile, technology involves the design of products and systems that affect 
the quality of life, using the knowledge of science where necessary. 
Science is intimately related to technology and society. For instance, science 
produces knowledge that results in useful applications through devices and 
systems. We have evidence of this all around us, from microwave ovens, to 
compact disc players, to computers. 
However, the understanding of technology as the application of science 
knowledge has been challenged by many people. Mayr (1976) said „. . . practical 
usable criteria for making sharp neat distinctions between science and 
technology do not exist.‰ 
Technology is marked by different purposes, different processes, different 
relationship to established knowledge and a particular relationship to specific 
contexts of activity. Change in the material environment is the explicit purpose of 
technology but that is not the case with science. Science, is concerned with the
1 8  TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 
understanding of nature to bring about solutions that are more or less effective 
from different points of view. 
SELF-CHECK 1.4 
In your own words, define technology. 
ACTIVITY 1.4 
In a group of three to four people, select two current inventions that 
have been said to improve and benefit mankind. List the positive and 
negative effects of using these inventions. 
 The three elements of science are products, processes and attitudes. 
 The product of science is the body of knowledge of science which comprises 
facts, concepts, laws, principles and theories. 
 The product of science is as a result of its processes and while the processes are 
carried out, the attitudes are practised. 
 The processes of science can be done using scientific skills. 
 Science problem can be solved using scientific method. 
 Nature of science refers to the main principles and ideas which provide a 
description of science methods and inquiry as well as the characteristics of 
scientific knowledge or products. 
 The scientific method is made up of a series of steps: ask question, do 
background research, construct a hypothesis, test your hypothesis by doing an 
experiment, analyse your data and draw a conclusion and communicate your 
results.
TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE  19 
 Science is related to technology. 
 Technology involves the design of products and systems that affect the quality of 
life, using the knowledge of science where necessary. 
Nature of science 
Science 
Science and technology 
Science attitude 
Science process 
Science product 
Scientific literacy 
Scientific method 
Carin, A.,  Sund, R. B. (1989). Teaching science through discovery (6th ed.). 
Belmont: Thomson Wadsworth. 
Esler, W. K.,  Esler, M. K. (2001). Teaching elementary science (8th ed.). USA: 
Belmont, Wadsworth/Thomson. 
Fleer, M.,  Hardy. T. (1996). Science for children. Australia Harcourt Brace: 
Prentice Hall. 
Lee, Y. J. et al. (2004). Knowing science and knowing about science: Teaching 
primary science. Prentice Hall : Singapore. 
Martin, D. J. (2006). Elementary science methods: A constructivist approach. 
Methods for constructing understanding. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. 
Mayr, O. (1976). The science-technology relationship as a historiographics 
problem. Technology and Culture 17. 
Science Buddies. (2011). Steps of the scientific method. Retrieved April 20, 2011, 
from http://www.sciencebuddies.org/mentoring/project_scientific_ 
method.shtml 
Shuttleworth, M. (2009). What is the scientific method? Retrieved April 21, 2011, 
from http://www.experiment-resources.com/what-is-the-scientific-method. 
html 
Skamp, K. (2004). Teaching primary science constructively. Southbank, Victoria: 
Wadsworth Publishing Company, Washington.
2 0  TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 
The UK Technology Education Centre. What is technology? Retrieved April 22, 
2011, from http://atschool.eduweb.co.uk/trinity/watistec.html 
University of California Museum of Paleontology. Understanding science: What 
is science? Retrieved April 20, 2011, from http://undsci.berkeley. 
edu/article/whatisscience_01 
Wolfs, F. L. H. (2004). Introduction to scientific method. Retrieved April 20, 2011, 
from http://teacher.nsrl.rochester.edu/phy_labs/AppendixE/ AppendixE. 
html.
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
 INTRODUCTION 
Imagine there are two scenarios. In Scenario A, a teacher praises a student for his 
excellent science project. While in Scenario B, a teacher praises a student for 
giving a correct answer. What similarity can you see in both of these situations as 
illustrated in Figure 2.1? 
Scenario A Scenario B 
Figure 2.1: Two classroom scenarios 
Topic 
2 
 Behaviourist 
Developmental 
Theories 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Describe the behavioural views of learning; 
2. Apply PavlovÊs theories in the teaching of science; 
3. Apply ThorndikeÂs theories in the teaching of science; and 
4. Apply SkinnerÊs theories in the teaching of science.
2 2  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
The scenarios in Figure 2.1 show the application of the principles of behavioural 
approach to learning. Did you notice that there is an observable behaviour in 
both of these situations? 
In scenario A, the observable behaviour is a teacher praising a student for doing 
an excellent science project. Meanwhile, in scenario B, the observable behaviour 
is a teacher praising a student for giving a correct answer. There is also feedback 
from the teacher, such as, „I am proud of you. Your science project was 
excellent!‰ and „Very good!‰. Do you know that these are the essential elements 
of behavioural approach to learning? The behaviourist theories emphasise the 
study of observable measurable behaviours in order to influence learning. 
In this topic, you will first be introduced to learning theories and behavioural 
views of learning. You will then learn about the contributions of three 
behaviourists namely Pavlov, Thorndike and Skinner. For each of these 
behavioural scientists, you will study their early experiments and the underlying 
principles in each of their theories. Finally, you will explore the applications of 
each of their theories in the teaching of science. 
ACTIVITY 2.1 
Observe a science lesson conducted by a teacher in your school. How 
does the teacher reinforce good behaviours of the students? Write down 
all the different feedback the teacher gives to the students. Do you think 
the feedback that the teacher gives can bring about change in the 
behaviour of the students? Discuss among your coursemates. 
BEHAVIOURAL VIEWS OF LEARNING 
2.1 
First of all, let us have a look at what a learning theory is. 
A learning theory is a set of principles which aim to explain the process of 
learning. 
Do you know why is it important for teachers to know about learning theories? It 
is because, learning theories help us to understand how pupils learn and why 
certain techniques encourage learning more than others. Learning theories can be 
divided into four main schools of thought as shown in Figure 2.2. In this topic,
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  23 
you will be learning about behavioural learning theories. Cognitive learning 
theories will be covered later in other topics. 
Figure 2.2: Classification of learning theories 
For your information, behavioural learning theories were the earliest theories of 
learning that were introduced. There are two main groups of behaviourist 
theories as can be seen in Figure 2.2: 
(a) Classical conditioning theories 
(b) Operant conditioning theories 
Pavlov, Thorndike and Skinner are behavioural scientists who have made major 
contributions in the field of behavioural learning. PavlovÊs theory is known as 
classical conditioning theory, while Thorndike and SkinnerÊs theories are known 
as operant conditioning theories. 
This behavioural approach emphasises observable behaviours that can be 
measured. Learning and behaviour are described in terms of stimulus and 
response relationships (S-R). You will be learning more about the relationship 
between stimulus and response as you read further. 
Behaviourists describe individuals as being conditioned by the environment. 
What does conditioning mean?
2 4  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
Conditioning is a process of teaching, where the learner associates behaviour 
or the response with a stimulus (McInerney  McInerney, 2006). 
Conditioning occurs through interactions with the environment while learning is 
said to have occurred when there is an observable change in behaviour. 
SELF-CHECK 2.1 
In your own words, describe the behavioural views of learning. 
ACTIVITY 2.2 
Behaviourism has its own set of specialised terms to describe the 
learning process. It is worthwhile to be familiar with these terms. Can 
you find the meaning of the following key behaviourist terms: 
(a) Stimulus; 
(b) Response; and 
(c) Conditioning? 
PAVLOV’S THEORY 
2.2 
Now, let us study PavlovÊs classical conditioning theory and its application in the 
teaching of science. Have you heard of the famous experiment that is shown in 
Figure 2.3?
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  25 
Figure 2.3: PavlovÊs experiment on classical conditioning 
Source: http://www.simplypsychology.org/pavlov.html 
This experiment was carried out by the Russian scientist, Ivan Pavlov (1849- 
1936), to find out if a dogÊs behaviour could be conditioned. His theory is known 
as classical conditioning. 
2.2.1 Pavlov and Classical Conditioning 
Classical conditioning is one of the first theories of behaviourism. Pavlov showed 
the simple relationship between a stimulus and a response in teaching 
(conditioning) an animal to modify its behaviour (McInerney  McInerney, 
2006). In his experiment, Pavlov conditioned a dog to salivate to the sound of a 
bell by linking a neutral stimulus to an unconditioned stimulus. 
In order to better understand classical conditioning, let us look at the 
observations studied by Pavlov on his dog as illustrated in Figure 2.4.
2 6  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
Figure 2.4: Schematic representation of classical conditioning 
Source: http://www.simplypsychology.org/pavlov.html 
In reference to Figure 2.4, let us have a look at Table 2.1 for more information on 
each phase in classical conditioning. 
Table 2.1: Phases in Classical Conditioning 
Phase Description 
Before conditioning 
(Figure 2.4 (1 and 2)) 
A dog salivates when presented with food. Pavlov called the food 
an unconditioned stimulus (UC) resulting in an unconditioned 
response (UR) (salivation). A neutral stimulus such as the ringing 
of a bell did not bring about any response. 
During conditioning 
(Figure 2.4 (3)) 
To condition the response behaviour, Pavlov rang a small bell at 
the same time as the meat was presented. He carried out many 
practice sessions where the bell and meat were presented together. 
After conditioning 
(Figure 2.4 (4)) 
The dog eventually learned to salivate when the bell was rung 
without the meat. The bell which originally had no meaning for 
the dog, took on meaning and became the conditioned stimulus 
(CS) because of repeated pairing or association with the food 
which then became the conditioned response (CR) that is 
salivation.
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  27 
This early research demonstrated that a stimulus that readily leads to a response 
can be paired with a neutral stimulus in order to bring about learning. This is the 
essence of classical conditioning. We sometimes learn new responses as a result 
of two stimuli being presented at the same time. As seen in Figure 2.4, it starts 
with two things that are already connected with each other, which are, food and 
salivation. Then, paired with a third thing, which is the bell with the conditioned 
stimulus, which is the food over several trials. Eventually, this third thing may 
become so strongly associated, that it has acquired the power to produce a new 
behaviour. The animal is „conditioned‰ to respond to the third thing or stimulus. 
ACTIVITY 2.3 
Classical conditioning is often used in advertisements. In groups, 
study advertisements on television or in print. Describe how classical 
conditioning is used to sell the product. Use the following terms in 
your description: unconditioned stimulus, unconditioned response, 
neutral stimulus, conditioned stimulus and conditioned response. 
2.2.2 Common Processes in Classical Conditioning 
PavlovÊs work also identified three other processes in classical conditioning, as 
shown in Table 2.2. 
Table 2.2: Other Processes in Classical Conditioning 
Other Processes Description 
Generalisation Pavlov used bells of different tones. The dog still salivated even 
though the tones of the bells were different. The dog responded even 
though the tones of the bells were different or nearly the same. The 
dog is capable of stimulus generalisation and is able to generalise 
across different tones. 
Discrimination The dogs could also respond to one tone of the bell and not to others 
that were similar. Pavlov did this by making sure the food was only 
presented with only that one tone and not others. He called this 
stimulus discrimination. The dog is able to differentiate among 
different tones. 
Extinction Extinction occurs when a conditioned stimulus (bell) is presented 
repeatedly but is not followed by the unconditioned stimulus (food). 
The conditioned response (salivating) gradually fades away and 
disappears. Pavlov continued ringing the bell and not following with the 
food. The dog gradually did not salivate. Extinction had taken place.
2 8  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
ACTIVITY 2.4 
In groups, discuss the situations in your science class where you can 
use the following processes to facilitate learning: 
(a) Generalisation; 
(b) Discrimination; and 
(c) Extinction. 
2.2.3 Applications of Pavlov’s Theory in the Teaching 
of Science 
PavlovÊs theory helps to explain why children behave the way they do in certain 
circumstances. Many childrenÊs attitudes are learnt through classical 
conditioning. For example, some children learn to dislike science or mathematics, 
not because the subject is difficult but because the subject has been paired with 
fear producing stimuli such as strict teachers. 
Once you understand the process of classical conditioning, you will be able to 
understand the importance of creating a healthy classroom environment. For 
example, if you treat your students with warmth and care each time during their 
science lesson, the students will begin to associate the science class with a warm 
and caring teacher. Your warm and caring attitude are the unconditioned stimuli. 
The science class becomes the conditioned stimulus which the students have 
associated with the warmth of the teacher. The unconditioned response is the 
initial response to the teacher. The students develop a positive emotional 
response to science. This is the conditioned response and the whole process is 
illustrated in Figure 2.5.
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  29 
Figure 2.5: Process of classical conditioning 
Now, let us study the applications of PavlovÊs classical conditioning theory in 
science classrooms. Think of how you can use them in your science lesson. 
Applying PavlovÊs Classical Conditioning Theory 
in a Science Classroom 
1. Provide a safe and warm environment so that the science classroom will 
be associated with a positive emotion or attitude. 
2. Associate positive and pleasant events with learning tasks. For example, 
make science experiments fun by having a relaxed and comfortable 
atmosphere in the science room or laboratory. 
3. Help students to risk anxiety-producing situations voluntarily and 
successfully. For example, pair an anxiety-provoking situation, such as 
performing in front of a group, with pleasant surroundings and a non-threatening 
atmosphere. This helps the student learn new associations. 
Instead of feeling anxious and tense in these situations, the student will 
stay relaxed and calm. 
4. Help students recognise differences and similarities among situations, 
so they can discriminate and generalise appropriately. For example, 
assure students who are anxious about taking a major examination that 
this test is like all other tests that they have sat for. 
5. Use motivation to produce positive behaviour. 
Source: Woolfolk (2001)
3 0  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
SELF-CHECK 2.2 
1. What are the main principles in PavlovÊs theory? 
2. Discuss with examples how you can use PavlovÊs theory to 
teach science. 
THORNDIKE’S THEORY 
2.3 
Edward L. Thorndike (1874-1949) introduced a theory of learning called 
connectionism. His theory viewed learning as forming „connections‰ between a 
stimulus (S) and a response (R). He conducted experiments with various animals. 
He placed a hungry animal in a puzzle box and food outside the box. He then 
observed how it learnt to get out. He believed that learning occurred through 
trial and error. His classic experiment with a hungry cat is shown in Figure 2.6. 
Figure 2.6: ThorndikeÊs puzzle box 
Source: http://www.csus.edu/indiv/w/wickelgren/psyc001/ 
ClassLectureThreeOperant.html 
The puzzle box as shown in Figure 2.6 had a lever which opened the door. After 
much trial and error, the cat learned to associate pressing the lever (stimulus) 
with opening the door (response). This S-R connection when established resulted 
in a satisfying state of affairs (escape from box). 
The same cat was placed in the box over and over again. Each time the cat was 
placed back in the box, it took a shorter time to get out. The cat had made 
connection between its behaviour and the reward. Thorndike concluded that cats
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  31 
learn faster if they are rewarded for their behaviour and that learning is 
incremental, that is, it occurred in small steps. 
Can you see any differences between ThorndikeÊs theory and PavlovÊs classical 
conditioning theory? Did you notice that the learner in classical conditioning is 
seen to be passive and responding to the environment? 
In the case of PavlovÊs dog, it responded to the stimulus of food. Whereas the 
learner in ThorndikeÊs theory is seen actively responding to the environment. 
The cat pressed the lever (response) to get to the food (stimulus). This means that 
the learner plays an active part in the changes of behaviour. The learner also 
operates on the environment by responding to the stimulus. This is known as 
operant conditioning. Thorndike established the basis for operant conditioning 
but the person thought to be responsible for developing the concept is Skinner. 
We will learn about SkinnerÊs theory later. 
2.3.1 Thorndike’s Laws 
Based on his experiments, Thorndike proposed three laws as can be seen in 
Table 2.3. 
Table 2.3: ThorndikeÊs Laws 
ThorndikeÊs Laws Description 
Law of Effect Law of effect is the most famous of his laws. Any act that 
produces a satisfying effect in a given situation will tend to be 
repeated in that situation. For example, if a response (e.g. 
answering a science question) is followed by a rewarding 
experience (e.g. student gets right answer and is praised by the 
teacher), the response will be strengthened and become a habit. 
Law of Exercise The more frequent the S-R connection, the stronger it will be. 
For example, the connection between a stimulus (e.g. getting 
the right answer) and response (e.g. doing a science question) is 
strengthened with practice and weakened when practice is 
discontinued. 
Law of Readiness Readiness to do an act is satisfying. Individuals learn best when 
they are physically, mentally and emotionally ready. If 
students are ready, they will make more progress in learning.
3 2  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
2.3.2 Applications of Thorndike’s Theory in the 
Teaching of Science 
Thorndike stressed the importance of stimulus-response connections. So, the task 
of the teacher is to arrange the classroom and learning activities to enhance 
connections between a stimulus and a response. 
The following shows the various ways you can apply ThorndikeÊs theory in a 
science classroom 
Applying ThorndikeÊs Theory 
in a Science Classroom 
1. Give rewards or reinforcement for positive behaviour. This will 
establish the stimulus-response connection. 
2. Use drill practices to associate between a stimulus and a response. This 
will strengthen the S-R connection. 
3. Use routines to help students „practice‰ desired behaviours until they 
become a habit. For example, give step-by step routines on how to write 
science reports. 
4. Get students ready to learn by creating interest in science with 
interesting demonstrations and activities. 
5. Make sure studentsÊ basic needs are satisfied. If students are hungry, 
tired or troubled, they will have little interest in learning. 
SELF-CHECK 2.3 
Discuss the implications of ThorndikeÊs theories on the teaching 
and learning of science.
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  33 
ACTIVITY 2.5 
For each of the ways of applying ThorndikeÊs theory given before, 
suggest examples you can use in your science lessons. Carry out your 
suggestions in your science classes. Record your observations and 
conclusions. 
SKINNER’S THEORY 
2.4 
Have you ever tried to train your pet? How did you do it? Look at Figure 2.7 
which shows trained animals performing. 
Figure 2.7: Animals performing tricks 
Source: http://drsophiayin.com/resources/cattricks, http: 
http://www.insidethemagic.net/2011/04/highlights-one-ocean-makes-a-big-splash-at-seaworld- 
orlando-debut-wetting-guests-with-shamu-size-fun/ 
The complex tricks performed by the cat and the dolphins shown in Figure 2.7 
are the result of many hours of training. The training or conditioning that is 
carried out is based largely on the principles of behavioural learning theories. 
„Of all the theories of behavioural learning, operant conditioning probably 
has the greatest impact on science teachers.‰ (Hassard, 1992).
3 4  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
As was mentioned earlier in this topic, Burrhus Frederic Skinner (1904-1990) is 
responsible for formulating the operant conditioning theory. Like Pavlov and 
Thorndike, Skinner believed in the stimulus-response pattern of conditioned 
behaviour. Skinner thought that behaviour (R) is controlled by a stimulus (S) and 
he called it operant behaviour. 
Do you still remember what operant behaviours are? Yes. Operant behaviours 
are behaviours that operate on the environment to receive reinforcement. That is 
why SkinnerÊs theory is also known as operant conditioning. 
2.4.1 Skinner and Operant Conditioning 
SkinnerÊs early studies were on animals like rats and pigeons. He devised an 
apparatus called the Skinner box as shown in Figure 2.8. 
Figure 2.8: SkinnerÊs box 
Source: http://www.appsychology.com/Book/Behavior/operant_conditioning.htm 
A hungry rat was placed in this box. The box contained a small brass lever that, if 
pressed, delivered a pellet of food. Once it was left alone in the box, the rat 
moved about exploring. At some point in time, it pressed the lever and a small 
food pellet was released. The rat ate this and soon pressed the lever again. The 
food pellet reinforced pressing of the lever.
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  35 
Can you identify the stimulus and response in the example above? Yes, you are 
right. The stimulus is the food pellet and the response is the pressing of the lever. 
Which one occurred first  the stimulus or the response? Yes, the response 
occurred first, that is, the rat carried out the response (pressing lever) to get the 
stimulus (food pellet). The rat operated on its environment. Can you see how the 
rat in SkinnerÊs box is different from PavlovÊs dog? 
What happens if the rat is not given any more food pellet? Skinner disconnected 
the food dispenser. When the rat pressed the lever, no food was released. The rat 
pressed the lever less and less and finally stopped. That is, the operant response 
has undergone extinction with non-reinforcement just as in classical 
conditioning. 
Skinner progressively reinforced behaviour that came close to the goal behaviour 
that is, pressing of the lever to get food. He called this shaping. In this way, the 
animal is gradually taught to perform quite complex behaviour. 
SkinnerÊs work resulted in the development of a number of principles of 
behaviour that have direct implications on teaching. Reinforcement which is the 
key principle in SkinnerÊs theory will be explored in more detail in the next 
section. 
2.4.2 Reinforcement 
In psychology, reinforcement is any consequence that strengthens the behaviour 
it follows. Consequences are simply environmental events that follow the 
behaviour. This can be summarised as shown in Figure 2.9. 
Figure 2.9: Reinforcement 
Source: Woolfolk (2001) 
Consequences to a large extent will determine whether a person will repeat the 
behaviour that led to the consequences. The type of consequences given and also 
the timing of the consequences are important in determining if the behaviour is 
to be strengthened or repeated. We will now look at different types of 
reinforcement and reinforcement schedules.
3 6  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
There are two types of reinforcement as can be seen in Figure 2.10. 
Figure 2.10: Types of reinforcement 
The differences between both of these types of reinforcement are given in 
Table 2.4. 
Table 2.4: Differences between Positive and Negative Reinforcement 
Positive Reinforcement Negative Reinforcement 
A pleasant consequence increases the 
probability of that behaviour occurring in 
the future. 
Taking away something negative to 
increase the probability of that behaviour 
occurring again. 
The pleasant consequence can be verbal 
praise, good grades, tokens, motivating 
words, winning certificates, earning 
privileges, facial expressions or a feeling of 
increased accomplishment or satisfaction. 
Unpleasant consequences are removed 
such as nagging or extra homework. 
Example: 
A student gives the correct answer as in 
situation B in Figure 2.1. The teacher 
praises the student. The student tries 
harder to give the correct response the next 
time. 
Example: 
A teacher announces to the class that they 
have no homework for that day because 
they have done an excellent science project. 
Students work harder for the next science 
project.
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  37 
ACTIVITY 2.6 
Study Table 2.2 again. Give another two examples of each of the 
positive and negative reinforcement that you can use in your science 
classroom. Discuss your answers in groups. 
2.4.3 Punishment 
Now, have a look at Figure 2.8 again. If every time the rat touches the lever, it 
receives an electric shock it will eventually learn to stop pressing the lever. This 
is punishment and can be summarised as in Figure 2.11. 
Figure 2.11: Punishment 
Source: Woolfolk (2001) 
For example, a student gives the wrong answer and is punished by the teacher. 
The teacher makes the student stand in front of the class. The student will then 
try not to give the wrong answer the next time. The undesirable response is 
reduced. What do you think of punishing students this way? 
Generally, reinforcement is preferred over punishment in modifying behaviour 
because punishment can bring about undesired emotional effects in the students. 
Can you suggest another way you can try to solve the teacherÊs problem above? 
2.4.4 Reinforcement Schedules 
What do you know about reinforcement schedules? 
Reinforcement schedules refer to the pattern and frequency in which a 
particular response is reinforced.
3 8  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
In the beginning stages of conditioning, Skinner reinforced the animal each time 
it turned the lever. This is called a continuous reinforcement schedule. After a 
number of trials, the animal slowly learns the desired behaviour. At this point, 
reinforcement is moved to an intermittent reinforcement schedule. An 
intermittent schedule allows for behaviour to be repeated but without constant 
reinforcement. This is shown in Figure 2.12. 
Figure 2.12: Reinforcement schedules 
As can be seen in Figure 2.12, there are two types of intermittent schedules: 
(a) Interval Schedule 
In the interval schedule, reinforcers are given based on the amount of time 
that passes between responses.
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  39 
(b) Ratio Schedule 
In the ratio schedule, reinforcers are given based on number of responses 
the learner gives between reinforcements. Interval and ratio schedules may 
be fixed or variable. 
Now, let us read the following case study and try to solve Encik HamdanÊs 
problem. 
Case Study 
Lisa is a student in Encik HamdanÊs class. She is always very excited during 
the science lessons and just shouts out answers without raising her hand. 
Encik Hamdan wants to reinforce LisaÊs appropriate behaviour that is raising 
her hand to answer the questions with points that she can use to exchange for 
play time. Look at the following reinforcement schedules. Identify which type 
of schedule it is and decide which schedule or combination of schedules will 
be the most effective to use with Lisa: 
(a) Schedule A 
Give Lisa points each time she raises her hands. 
(b) Schedule B 
Give Lisa points every third time she raises her hand. 
(c) Schedule C 
Give Lisa points after she raises her hand a variable number of times. 
2.4.5 Applications of Skinner’s Theory in the Teaching 
of Science 
After learning about the principles of SkinnerÊs theory, let us look at how we can 
apply it effectively in a science classroom. Study the following guidelines on 
how you can apply SkinnerÊs theory in a science classroom.
4 0  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
Applying SkinnerÊs Theory 
in the Science Classroom 
1. Reinforce positive behaviours. For example praise students when they 
complete their work well. 
2. Determine what behaviours you want. For example, carrying out 
science process skills correctly Reinforce these behaviours when they 
occur. 
3. Tell students what behaviours you want. Science teachers deal with a 
complex classroom environment which involves safety issues. 
Specifying behaviours that you expect in the classroom will ensure 
responsible and independent learners. 
4. Create „chains of desired student behaviours‰ by establishing 
reinforcement for those desired behaviours. For example, give students 
gold stars for each time they clean up after an experiment. 
5. Reinforce expected behaviour as soon as it happens. For example, stars 
or tokens are given as soon as students collect work materials and begin 
experiments. 
6. Give praise and other rewards to students who even get desired 
behaviours partially right (SkinnerÊs shaping). This is rewarding them 
for effort. Eventually, as students can do the desired behaviour correctly 
you can remove the rewards. For example, writing science reports 
neatly. When they exhibit these behaviours, reinforce them and tell 
them why. 
7. Reinforcement is best used at variable intervals (SkinnerÊ schedules). For 
example, give rewards for following the rules for science group 
discussions at intervals. You can also take pictures of students doing 
projects and show these pictures once in a while to motivate students. 
8. Develop your science lesson from simpler to more complex tasks. Give 
reinforcements at every concept learnt and continue to more complex 
ones.
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  41 
SELF-CHECK 2.7 
What are the main principles in PavlovÊs, ThorndikeÊs and SkinnerÂs 
theories? Present your answers in the form of a mind map. 
ACTIVITY 2.7 
1. In groups, complete the following table to show what you have 
learnt about SkinnerÊs operant conditioning theory. 
Essentials of operant conditioning Explanation with examples 
Operant 
Shaping 
Reinforcement 
Positive reinforcement 
Negative reinforcement 
Punishment 
Reinforcement schedule 
2. Discuss among your classmates what are any other ways can 
SkinnerÊs theory be applied in the science classroom. 
 Behaviourism refers to the study of observable and measurable behaviour. 
 In behaviourism, learning and behaviour are described in terms of stimulus and 
response relationships. 
 A stimulus is an event that activates behaviour; a response is an observable 
reaction to a stimulus. 
 Behaviourists describe individuals as being conditioned by the environment.
4 2  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
 There are two main groups of behaviourist theories: classical conditioning and 
operant conditioning. 
 Classical conditioning, first described by Ivan Pavlov, is a theory that explains 
how we sometimes learn new responses as a result of two stimuli being 
presented at the same time. 
 Three other processes in classical conditioning are generalisation, discrimination 
and extinction. 
 In operant conditioning, as presented by Skinner and Thorndike, the learner 
actively „operates‰ on their environment to reach certain goals. 
 Thorndike stressed that learning involves stimulus-response connections. 
 He formulated three laws of learning: law of effect, law of exercise and law of 
readiness. 
 SkinnerÊs theory focussed on operants or behaviours that are affected by what 
happens after the reinforcement (consequences). 
 Reinforcement is the process of using a reinforcement to strengthen behaviour. 
 There are two types of reinforcement: positive and negative reinforcement. 
 Reinforcement schedules are the pattern and frequency in which a particular 
response is reinforced. 
 The principles of the theories of Pavlov, Thorndike and Skinner can be used in 
the teaching of science. 
 The teacherÊs job is to create a science learning environment in which certain 
behaviours (the acquisition of knowledge, concepts and skills) are increased and 
reinforced.
TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES  43 
Behaviourism 
Classical conditioning 
Conditioned responses 
Conditioned stimulus 
Conditioning 
Connectionism 
Consequences 
Continuous reinforcement schedule 
Discrimination 
Extinction 
Generalisation 
Intermittent reinforcement schedule 
Negative reinforcement 
Operant 
Operant conditioning 
Positive reinforcement 
Punishment 
Reinforcement 
Reinforcement schedule 
Response 
Shaping 
Stimulus 
Unconditioned response 
Unconditioned stimulus 
Abruscato, J. (2000). Teaching children science  A discovery approach. USA: 
Allyn  Bacon. 
Borich, G. D.,  Tombari, M. L. (1996). Educational psychology: A contemporary 
approach. New York: Allyn  Bacon. 
Culatta, R. (2011). Behavioral theories of learning. Retrieved May 8, 2011, 
from http://www.innovativelearning.com/educational_psychology/ 
behaviorism/webquest.html 
EmTech. (2007). Learning theories. Retrieved May 7, 2011, from 
http://www.emtech.net/learning_theories.htm 
Hassard, J. (1992). Minds on science  Middle and secondary school methods. 
USA: Harper Collins. 
Mclnerney, D. M.,  Mclnerney, V. (2006). Educational psychology-constructing 
learning. Australia: Pearson Prentice Hall.
4 4  TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 
Northern College. (2003). Learning theories  Classical conditioning. Retrieved 
April 27, 2011, from http://www.northern.ac.uk/learning/NC 
Material/Psychology/lifespan%20folder/Learningtheories.htm 
Utah State University. (2000). Positive interaction procedures. Retrieved May 8, 
2011, from http://www.usu.edu/teachall/text/behavior/LRBIpdfs/ 
Positive.pdf 
Woolfolk, A. ( 2001). Educational psychology. USA: Allyn  Bacon.
Topic 
3 
 Cognitive 
Developmental 
Theories 1 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain the main features of cognitive learning theories; 
2. Describe PiagetÊs theory; 
3. Apply PiagetÊs theory in the teaching of science; 
4. Describe BrunerÊs theories; and 
5. Apply BrunerÊs theories in the teaching of science. 
 INTRODUCTION 
In the last topic, you have learnt about behaviourist learning theories. What do 
you think are the main limitation to these theories? According to behaviourist 
theories, the respond that we show as a result of repetitive stimuli given to us is 
called learning. 
As can be seen in Figure 3.1, this theory assumes that a learner is essentially 
passive in responding to environmental stimuli. The behaviour is shaped 
through positive reinforcement or negative reinforcement. Positive reinforcement 
and negative reinforcement will increase the possibility that the prior behaviour 
will recur. Positive reinforcement indicates the application of a stimulus, while 
negative reinforcement indicates the withholding of a stimulus. Learning is 
therefore defined as a change in behaviour in the learner. This however reduces 
complex human behaviour to simple cause and effect. Actually, there are a lot of 
factors that can influence learning other than just respond to the given stimulus. 
We will learn about this in this topic.
4 6  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
Figure 3.1: Behaviourist Learning Theory 
Source: http://tanvirdhaka.blogspot.com/ 
In this topic, we will learn about cognitive learning theory and how we can apply 
this theory in the teaching of science. 
COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORY 
3.1 
As a result of the limitation of behaviourist theory, a group of psychologists 
propose a new approach to explain the process of learning. This new approach is 
called the cognitive learning theory. 
Figure 3.2: Cognitive learning theory 
Source: http://psybibs.revdak.com 
This approach recognises the vital role of the human brain in the process of 
learning. Cognitive experts believed that a lot of thought processes happen in our 
brain that help us to interpret, organise, store and receive information before we 
could respond to the stimulus. These are called cognitive processes (see 
Figure 3.2). 
As we learn, our cognitive structures in our brain are changed or modified. These 
structures enable us to interpret, store and retrieve information. Thus, according 
to Ormrod (1999), there are two main features underlying this cognitive 
approach: 
(a) That the memory system is an active organised processor of information. 
(b) That prior knowledge plays an important role in learning.
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  47 
Kohler, Tolman, Lewin, Piaget and Bruner are among the psychologists who 
contributed to the cognitive learning theory. Atherton (2011) summarised 
cognitive theory as theories that are interested in how people understand 
material. In order to fully understand this, we should also include the study on: 
(a) Aptitude and capacity to learn; 
(b) Learning styles; and 
(c) Constructivism as these three aspects influences how people learn. 
But we are not going to discuss them in this topic as the focus in this topic is 
introducing you to the cognitive learning theories, specifically Piaget and Bruner 
learning theories.. 
SELF-CHECK 3.1 
Explain the difference between behavioural and cognitive theory. 
COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORY 
EXPONENTS 
3.2 
Just imagine that you are at your desk with a pen in your hand and staring at an 
empty book. You are wondering the best approach for a lesson on „Basic needs of 
living things‰ for Year 4 students. What is your basis for planning the lesson? 
Learning theories could be one of the things that you could use to plan an 
effective lesson. As a start, let us learn about PiagetÊs learning theory. 
3.2.1 Piaget’s Learning Theory 
Jean Piaget is a Swiss biologist and psychologist. After working with Alfred 
Binet, Piaget developed an interest in the intellectual development of children. 
Based upon his observations of his children and their processes of making sense 
of the world around them, he eventually developed a four-stage model of how 
the mind processes the new information it encountered. These four stages are 
illustrated in Figure 3.3.
4 8  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
Figure 3.3: PiagetÊs theory on stages of human development 
Cognitive development involves changes in cognitive processes and abilities. In 
Piaget's view, early cognitive development involves processes based upon 
actions and later progresses into changes in mental operations. 
As seen in Figure 3.3, each stage is characterised by new abilities and ways of 
processing information. Piaget believes that, all children pass through these 
stages in this order and that no child can skip a stage, although different children 
pass through the stages at different rates. The same individuals may perform 
tasks associated with different stages at the same time, particularly at points of 
transition into a new stage (Slavin, 2006). 
You would have probably learned this theory in detail in your psychology 
course. If not, you can gather a lot of information from various resources to read 
and understand fully about this theory. This is necessary because soon we are 
going to look at how to apply this theory in a science classroom.
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  49 
3.2.2 Identifying the Stages of Development 
There are four stages of human development as mentioned by Piaget. This means 
that as a teacher, the first thing that you need to do is to identify at what stage 
your students are. This is important because it allows you to plan suitable and 
appropriate teaching and learning activities for your students. 
Do you know how to identify your studentÊs stage of development? One way is 
to look at the characteristics of your student and compare them to the list given 
in Figure 3.3. You could also conduct simple experiments as Piaget had done 
when he was doing his research. Take time to do Activity 3.1 to understand the 
experiments that could be used to identify your students' stage of development. 
ACTIVITY 3.1 
Study the following situations. Determine the stage of development 
described by the situation. 
Situation What 
stage? 
1 Play with a child and then, disappear behind the paper. 
The child becomes distressed at your disappearance. 
2 Show a child four marbles in a row, then, spread them 
out. The child says that there are now more marbles than 
before. 
3 If you take four one-inch square pieces of felt, and lay 
them on a six-by-six cloth together in the centre, and then, 
the same square spread out in the corner, the child says 
that the squares cover the same area in both cases.
5 0  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
4 A set of cards have letters on one side and numbers on the 
other. If a card has a vowel on one side, then it has an even 
number on the other side. 
Take a look at the cards below and tell me, which cards do I 
need to turn over to tell if this rule is actually true? 
5 You have two five inch sticks laid parallel to each other, and 
then, move one of them a little. She says the two sticks are still 
having the same length even though it now extends beyond 
the other. 
6 Fill a tall glass of water and a short glass of water of the same 
volume and ask which glass has more. The child says the tall 
glass. 
Source: http://webspace.ship.edu/cgboer/piaget.html 
Answers: 
1. Sensorimotor period 
2. Pre-operational period 
3. Concrete operational period 
4. Formal operational period 
5. Concrete operational period 
6. Pre-operational period 
By looking at the stages, we could see that generally children in Year 1 and Year 
2 could probably be still in the pre-operational stage, while Year 3 till Year 5 
students would be in the concrete operational stage. By Year 6, they would start 
to be in their formal operational stage. So, what should you do to teach them?
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  51 
SELF-CHECK 3.2 
What are the four stages of human development according to Piaget? 
ACTIVITY 3.2 
Do you think the classification of ages by Piaget still apply in the 
present time? Discuss with your coursemates. 
Now, read the following guidelines which could help you to develop suitable 
tasks based on PiagetÊs theory. What would your classroom look like if you apply 
PiagetÊs theories in your teaching and learning? 
3.2.3 Applications of Piaget’s Theory in Teaching 
Children at Various Stages of Development 
Piaget outlined several principles for building cognitive structures or schemes. 
Children learn by observing and try to understand their experiences by 
comparing their experiences to their existing schemes in their mind. When 
children encounter a new experience in their environment, they will try to 
explain their experience based on their cognitive structures or schemes. If their 
new experience is similar to their schemes, they will add the new information 
into their previously existing schemes. This process is called assimilation. 
However, if the new experience is different from their existing schemes 
(according to their perception), they would alter their existing schemes or new 
schemes may also be developed during this process. When the existing scheme is 
modified or altered, then learning has also taken place. The process whereby 
children has to modify the new experiences before incoprorating it into their 
scheme is called accomodation. This procceses is summarised in Figure 3.4.
5 2  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
Figure 3.4: Reaching equilibrium through assimilation and accommodation processes 
Source: http://eprints.oum/edu.my/411/1/enriching_nantha.pdf 
In short, you as the teacher should present the new knowledge as close as 
possible to the childrenÊs prior knowledge. As a result, the children could 
assimilate rather than take time to accomodate the new experiences or 
information in order for learning to take place. 
Bearing in mind on the principles mentioned earlier, you could use the following 
guidelines or tips so that your childrenÊs schemes will develop through time. Let 
us start with the pre-operational stage, concrete operational stage and finally, 
formal operational stage.
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  53 
Pre-operational Stage (Age 2 - 7 years) 
1. Provide natural objects such as leaves, stones, twigs and real animals for 
the children to manipulate. This is important at this stage as children 
learn through their senses. 
2. Provide opportunities for the children to begin grouping things into 
classes, such as, living/non-living and animal/plant. When doing this, 
they are studying the attributes of the objects and noting the similar and 
different attributes at the same time. 
3. Provide experience that gives children an opportunity to lessen some of 
their geocentricism. For example, have them listen to other childrenÊs 
stories about what was observed on a trip to the zoo. 
4. Use concrete props and visual aids whenever possible as the aids help 
the children to 'seeÊ what you try to explain. 
5. Make instructions relatively short, using actions as well as words. For 
example, add one spoonful of salt to the beaker of water. Then stir. 
6. Be sensitive to the possibility that children may have different meanings 
for the same word or different words for the same meaning. Children 
may also expect everyone to understand words they have invented. 
7. Plan a lot of hands-on activities so that they have enough practice with 
the skills that will serve as building blocks for more complex skills. For 
example, make sure you give them plenty of practice in observing as 
observation is the most basic science process skill but this is the 
foundation for all subsequent skills. 
8. Provide a wide range of experiences in order to build a foundation for 
concept learning and language. This is important as different children 
have different learning styles.
5 4  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
Concrete Operational Stage 
1. Reinforce and continue using concrete and hands-on materials. Prepare a 
lot of concrete teaching aids to help the children to understand the 
concept. For example, give children the opportunities to observe real 
animals when you want to explain about physical characteristics of 
animals. Bring fish, butterfly or bird to the class so that the students could 
use their senses to observe the physical characteristics of these animals. 
You should not be satisfied by just bringing in animal pictures and ask 
students to study the pictures and learn about the physical characteristics 
of animals. They can manipulate ideas mentally, but they need props as 
the ideas presented to them continue to become more abstract. 
2. Organise the materials and concepts presented. Give short and precise 
instructions when you want them to do the activities. The experimental 
procedures must consist of only a few steps. If the procedures are long, 
break them up into a few sections. Be concise and brief when you are 
explaining concepts. The attention span of these students is longer than for 
pre-operational children, but they often want to focus on something new. 
3. Always allow students to relate their prior experiences before 
presenting a new topic. For example, if you want to introduce the 
concept of food chain, you should use animals familiar to your students, 
so that they know the types of food that those animals eat. Then only, 
can they build a food chain. When they have understood the concept of 
food chain, you can extend or elaborate with other less familiar animals. 
4. Let the children classify or group things. Use graphic organisers like 
matrices, charts, diagrams and table to make it easier. This would 
improve and develop their logical ability. You could also use crossword 
puzzles and word mazes. Give more divergent questions rather than 
convergent questions because the former give children more opportunity 
to think and stimulate imagination. Give them opportunities to classify 
objects and ideas into increasingly complex groupings. Without doing 
this, they would never become formal operational. 
5. Offer children many experiences to use their acquired abilities with 
respect to the observation, classification and arrangement of objects 
according to some property. Any science activities that include 
observation, collection and sorting of objects should be able to be done 
with some ease. You should use activities involving living things and 
non-living things that are familiar and concrete to them. You should be 
able to successfully introduce many physical science activities that 
include more abstract concepts such as space, time and number.
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  55 
6. Use familiar objects and ideas to explain more complex concepts. They 
need practice at logical thinking as well as motivation towards starting 
really abstract thinking. 
7. Present problems that require logical thinking of a relatively non-abstract 
level. They need practice dealing with abstractions. What they 
cannot do is abstractions on abstractions. 
Formal Operational Stage (Age 11 through Adulthood) 
1. Even if at this stage the students can visualise abstract concepts, you 
could still continue to use strategies that are effective with concrete 
operational thinkers. Why? Reason for this is because at this stage 
concrete thinking is still easier. Let say, you ask someone to describe to 
you how to go from your school to the shopping mall. Would you be 
able to visualise the route or would you get a map so that you could 
reach the mall easily without getting lost? 
2. Build abstractions upon solidly understood concrete concepts. 
Abstractions are essential for complex ideas, but the concrete ideas 
would help in the early stage of transition from concrete to formal 
operational stage. 
3. Give them opportunities to explore hypothetical questions. Students at 
this stage could formulate their own hypothesis on problems that they 
encounter and plan investigations to test their hypothesis. If you do not 
give them opportunities and encouragement, the students would not be 
able to progress beyond concrete operational stage to formal operational 
stage. In other words, you should give them the opportunities to 
experiment on their own rather than conducting experiments that you 
have planned. 
4. Give them opportunities to solve problems that seem impossible to 
solve. Students take pride and build self-confidence when they are able 
to solve problems that they could not solve when they were less mature. 
5. Integrate concrete concepts with broad concepts and encourage them to 
apply concepts in numerous settings. This could be done by 
encouraging them to generalise the conclusions from their experiments 
by linking the concepts in real life setting. In this way, the learning is 
meaningful and more importantly, they will apply their learning in their 
lives, as that is the purpose of learning science.
5 6  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
6. Respect and encourage lateral thinking that involves insightful 
hypothetical reasoning. Even when they are incorrect, their attempt at 
hypothetical thinking may be a productive step in the right direction. 
7. Model effective formal operational thinking to them. You are probably 
capable of formal operational thinking yourself and children can use 
you as a productive model while developing their own skills. 
SELF-CHECK 3.3 
Imagine that you want to introduce the concept of transparent, 
translucent and opaque materials to your students. What are some 
example of objects that you will use? 
ACTIVITY 3.3 
1. Select a topic from Year 1, Year 3 and Year 6 from a primary 
science curriculum specification and discuss two learning-teaching 
activities that suit PiagetianÊs learning theory. 
2. Compare the activities for the different steps of human 
development. How are they different? Give reasons based on 
PiagetÊs theory. Share your answer with your classmates. 
BRUNER’S THEORIES 
3.3 
We teach a subject not to produce little living libraries on that subject, but 
rather to get a student to think . . . for himself, to consider matters as an 
historian does, to take part in the process of knowledge-getting. Knowing is 
a process, not a product. 
(Bruner, 1966) 
Jerome Bruner is another influential psychologist who introduced many theories 
that could be applied in the science classroom. In this subtopic, we are going to 
discuss some of his theories and how to apply them in the science classroom.
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  57 
Bruner introduced many ideas in explaining the process of learning. His work 
includes the significance of categorisation in learning, the ideas of readiness for 
learning, motivation for learning, intuitive and analytical thinking, inductive 
thinking, discovery learning and spiral curriculum. We are not going to discuss 
all of his ideas. Instead, we are only going to discuss his theory on discovery 
learning, inductive thinking and the three stages of cognitive growth. 
3.3.1 Discovery Learning 
The notion of discovery learning had been discussed by Rousseau, Pestalozzi and 
Dewey. Nevertheless, modern discovery learning environments were initiated by 
Jerome Bruner (Mukerji, 2002). He believes that for learning to be meaningful, 
students must actively be engaged in identifying principles and rules for 
themselves, rather than relying on the teacher's explanations. Therefore, learning 
environments must provide situations, in which students are called upon to 
question, explore or experiment. In typical discovery learning environments, 
information and examples are presented to students and the students work with 
the information and examples until they discover the interrelationships. 
As a result, students may be more likely to remember concepts and knowledge 
discovered on their own. Models that are based upon discovery learning 
includes: 
(a) Guided Discovery 
The student receives problems to solve, but the teacher provides hints and 
directions about how to solve the problem to keep the student on track. 
Guided discovery may require more or less time depending on the task, but 
tends to result in better long term retention and transfer as the students are 
involve actively while learning takes place. Unlike true discovery, the 
instructor directs what problems the learners will learn and sets the pace 
that they will learn at. The students do, however, have to figure out how to 
solve the problems that they are given. Generally, the students first 
discover specific topics and then move to more general ones. 
(b) Problem-based Learning 
Problem-based learning (PBL) is an approach that challenges students to 
learn through engagement in a real problem. It challenges students to seek 
solutions to real-world (open-ended) problems by themselves or in groups, 
rather than learn primarily through lectures or textbooks. You are going to 
learn this approach in detail later.
5 8  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
(c) Simulation-based Learning 
Simulation is a technique to replace and amplify real experiences that 
mirror substantial aspects of the real world in a fully interactive fashion. 
Simulation makes imitated situations available to the learner to practice and 
refine necessary skills, rather than having them jump right into the real 
experience. It also provides an immersive learning experience, where skills, 
process, and knowledge can all be enhanced in a way reality cannot. 
(d) Case-based Learning 
Using a case-based approach engages students in discussion of specific 
situations, typically real-world examples. This method is learner-centered, 
and involves intense interaction between the participants. Case-based 
learning focuses on the building of knowledge and the group works 
together to examine the case. The instructor's role is that of a facilitator and 
the students collaboratively address problems from a perspective that 
requires analysis. Much of case-based learning involves learners striving to 
resolve questions that have no single right answer. 
(e) Incidental Learning 
Incidental learning describes the process in which a child's knowledge is 
gained from interactions with the environment. This learning process lacks 
a formal structure or objectives, and is guided by real-world experiences. 
Through incidental learning, children learn fundamental skills that they 
will use throughout life. 
Discovery learning is a learning method that encourages students to ask 
questions and formulate their own tentative answers, and to deduce general 
principles from practical examples or experiences (Thorsett, 2002). It is a learning 
situation in which the principal content of what is to be learned is not given but 
must be independently discovered by the student. In other words, discovery 
learning can be defined simply as a learning situation in which the principal 
content of what is to be learned is not given, but must be independently 
discovered by the learner, making the student an active participant in his 
learning. 
Ormrod (2000) defines discovery learning as an approach to instruction through 
which children interact with their environment  by exploring and manipulating 
objects, wrestling with questions and controversies, or performing experiments. 
There are certain principles that you need to follow if you want to use discovery 
learning in your class and make it work. Among others, the instructions: 
(a) Must be concerned with the experiences and contexts that make the student 
willing and able to learn (readiness).
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  59 
(b) Must be structured so that it can be easily grasped by the student (spiral 
organisation). 
(c) Should be designed to facilitate extrapolation and/or fill in the gaps (going 
beyond the information given). 
If the principles are not adhered to, it would only: 
(a) Cause confusion to the student if no initial framework is available. 
(b) Lead to inefficiency and be time consuming. 
(c) Result in student frustration. 
(d) Make you fail to detect problems and misconceptions. 
ACTIVITY 3.4 
In a group, discuss the meaning of: 
(a) Guided discovery; 
(b) Problem-based learning; 
(c) Simulation-based learning; 
(d) Case-based learning; and 
(e) Incidental learning. 
3.3.2 Inductive Thinking 
Bruner believes classroom learning should take place through inductive 
reasoning. This reasoning is done by forming generalisations based on the 
specific examples given. This is an important cognitive strategy in discovery 
learning environments. It encourages students to actively use their intuition, 
imagination and creativity. It also relies more on providing students with a range 
of experiences, which gradually increase their familiarity with new concepts 
before attempting to draw them together into a coherent understanding of the 
new concept. If you are going to teach concepts inductively means you do not 
define or explain the concept in the beginning of the lesson. You should provide 
various activities so that the students will use their reasoning to gradually 
understand the concept that you want the students to form. This can be seen in 
Figure 3.5.
6 0  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
Figure 3.5: Inductive approach to instruction 
For example, if the students are presented with enough examples of triangles and 
non-triangles (as shown in Figure 3.6), they will eventually find out what the 
basic properties of a triangle must be. 
Figure 3.6: Forming a concept a triangle 
Source: http://academics.rmu.edu/~tomei/ed711psy/c_bruner.htm
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  61 
Do you realise that discovery learning encompasses the scientific model? 
Children identify problems, generate hypotheses, test each hypothesis against 
collected data and apply conclusions to new situations. Due to this reason, 
discovery learning should be used in the teaching and learning of science as it fits 
to the nature of science itself. We have already discussed about scientific method 
and the nature of science in Topic 1 of this module. 
ACTIVITY 3.5 
Discuss the concept of discovery learning by using a mind map. 
3.3.3 Stages of Cognitive Growth 
In the previous subtopic, we have identified the stages of cognitive development 
suggested by Piaget. According to him, we progress from sensorimotor to pre-operational, 
concrete operational and finally formal operational. Like Piaget, 
Bruner believes in stages of instruction based on development. There are three 
stages according to BrunerÊs theory as can be seen in Table 3.1 below. 
Table 3.1: The Three Stages of Cognitive Growth According to Bruner's Theory 
Stage Description 
Enactive (birth 
to age 3) 
In this stage, children learn by observing and manipulating real or 
concrete objects. For example, if you want to teach about flowers, 
you must let children observe real flowers so that they can see, touch 
and smell the flowers. Knowledge is acquired through senses. This is 
also true if you want to teach a new skill. Let say you want to teach 
students on how to use a thermometer. Get a thermometer and let 
them touch and observe the apparatus. 
Iconic (age 3 to 
8) 
In this stage, knowledge is represented by using models and 
pictures. So, if you want to teach them about flowers, you can use 
pictures of flowers for the children to list the components of a flower 
and classifying flowers based on their characteristics. If you want to 
teach about how the lungs work, you could use a model to explain 
how the size of lung changes when we breathe in and out. In short, 
you do not need to show them the real object as cognitively they are 
ready to understand the concepts with the help of pictures or 
models.
6 2  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
Symbolic (from 
age 8) 
Learners can think in abstract form. So, abstract terms and symbol 
systems can be used to represent knowledge like numbers, 
mathematical symbols, letters, music and language. The precise 
timing of when to use it depends on the child, particularly his or her 
language ability. For the first time, the child can categorise, think 
logically and solve problems. 
Each stage as shown in Figure 3.7 is dominant at different phases of development 
but they are always present and accessible (Johnson, et al.). 
Figure 3.7: Learning stages according to BrunerÊs theory 
Source: http://jaylordlosabia.blogspot.com/2010/05/constructivism-jerome-bruners. 
html 
According to Waring (2011), Bruner rejects the idea of stages as popularised by 
Piaget and to a lesser extent Vygotsky. Rather than looking at the ages of 
developmental changes, Bruner concentrates more on how knowledge is 
represented and organised as the child develops. For Bruner, the earlier ways of 
thinking are still used later in life where they can be very useful for some tasks. 
Teachers, according to Bruner, should be able to speed up the rate of cognitive 
development, primarily by improving language acquisition thereby assisting the 
transition from iconic to symbolic modes of representation. In short, if you plan 
activities in accordance to each stage as Bruner describes it, your children can 
learn more effectively.
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  63 
Say for instance you want to teach them about the concept of animals. If you 
teach younger children, you should use real animals to explain the concept. 
However if your students are older, you could use pictures or models of animals, 
and when they are in the symbolic stage, you could simply use text to teach them 
about animals. 
SELF-CHECK 3.4 
‰Learning subtraction by showing six items and physically removing 
four of them‰. 
To which stage does this classroom activity belong to? 
ACTIVITY 3.6 
Imagine that you want to teach about the different parts of plants. 
Discuss the teaching activities for each of Bruner's stage theory. 
3.3.4 Application of Bruner’s Theories in the Teaching 
of Science 
How do you use BrunerÊs theory in a science classroom? Since discovery learning 
represents or follows the scientific method, you should always try to use this 
method when you teach science. The question is, which model of discovery 
learning should you use? Should you apply guided discovery, free discovery, 
problem-based learning, simulation-based learning or case-based learning? 
Let us look at Table 3.2 which shows some of the suggestions on how we can use 
BrunerÊs theories in the science classroom.
6 4  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
Table 3.2: Suggestions on How BrunerÊs Theories Can Be Used in Science Classroom 
BrunerÊs Theories Explanation 
1 Present both examples 
and non-examples of the 
concepts that you are 
teaching. 
 When teaching about mammals, include people, 
kangaroos, whales, cats, dolphins and camels as 
examples. Besides that, use chicken, fish, alligators, 
frogs and penguins as non-examples. 
 Ask children for additional examples and non-examples. 
 When presenting an explanation of the phases of 
the moon, have the children to observe the phases 
in a variety of ways. For instance, direct 
observation of the changing shape of the moon in 
the evening. A demonstration of the changes can be 
shown by using a flashlight and sphere, and also 
diagrams. 
2 Help children see 
connections among 
concepts. 
 Ask questions such as, „What else could you call 
this apple?‰ (Fruit). „What do we do with fruit?‰ 
(Eat). „What do we call things we eat?‰ (Food). 
 Use diagrams, outlines and summaries to point out 
conclusions. 
3 Design inductive 
activities. 
 Provide them with specific cases or situations. 
Children will need to observe, classify, making 
inferences and prediction in order to make 
conclusion based on the situation given. 
4 Design activities that are 
problem-oriented. 
 Children need to be given enough practice to solve 
problem so that they will learn the heuristics or 
rules of discovery. 
5 Emphasise the basic 
structure of the new 
material. 
 Use demonstrations that reveal basic principles. 
For example, demonstrate the law of magnetism by 
using similar and opposite poles of a set of bar 
magnets. Encourage children to make outlines of 
basic points made in textbooks or discovered in 
activities. 
6 Help children construct 
coding system. 
 Coding system helps children make connections 
between objects and phenomena. 
 For example, ask the students to invent a game that 
requires children to classify rocks and have 
children to maintain scrapbooks in which they 
keep collected leaf specimens that are grouped 
according to observed characteristics.
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  65 
7 Pose a problem to the 
children and let them 
find the answer. 
 Ask questions that will lead naturally to activities. 
For example, why do you need to wear a helmet 
when riding a bicycle? What are some ingredients 
that most junk foods have? 
 Do a demonstration that raises a question in the 
childrenÊs minds. For example, lift a washer using 
magnet or mix two-coloured solutions to produce a 
third colour. 
8 Encourage children to 
make intuitive guesses. 
 Intuitive guesses allow children to be able to build 
meaning, significance or structure to a problem 
without explicit evidence. 
 For example, ask children to guess the amount of 
water that goes down the drain each time they get 
a drink of water from a water fountain. 
 Give the children magazine photographs of the 
evening sky and have them guess the locations of 
some constellations. 
 Instead of defining a particular object, tell your 
students, Let us guess what it might mean by 
looking at the words around it. 
 Do not comment after the first few guesses. Wait 
for several ideas before giving the right answer. 
 Use guiding questions to help children focus when 
their discovery has led them astray. 
There are many resources in the Internet if you want to use the discovery 
learning approach in the teaching of science. Here is just one of the websites you 
can use: http://www.discoverysciencelearning.com/ 
ACTIVITY 3.7 
1. In a group, choose a topic. Describe how you would teach the 
topic using discovery learning. 
2. Use a suitable graphic organiser to compare and contrast PiagetÊs 
and BrunerÊs stages of cognitive growth.
6 6  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
 Cognitive theory is a learning theory of psychology that attempts to explain 
human behaviour by understanding the thought processes. 
 Piaget identified four stages in human cognitive development. They are 
sensorimotor, pre-operational, concrete operational and formal operational. 
 Piaget also explained how the cognitive structures or schemes change through 
the process of assimilation, accommodation and mental equilibrium. 
 The application of PiagetÊs stages of cognitive growth is when you plan to teach 
science based on students' abilities in each stage. 
 Generally primary school students are in the concrete operational stage. Thus, 
concrete materials need to be used in the teaching of science concepts or skills. 
 In BrunerÊs discovery learning model, studentsÊ involvement plays a vital role in 
the learning process. The teachersÊ role is as a guide and advisor in students' 
quest for information rather than as a giver of information. 
 Bruner also identified three stages of cognitive growth: enactive, iconic and 
symbolic. 
 The application of BrunerÊs stages of cognitive growth is when you plan to teach 
activities suited for each stage, whether to use concrete, pictures or models, or 
just use text or description when explaining concepts or skills. 
Cognitive development growth 
Cognitive learning theories 
Cognitive structures or schemes 
Concrete operational 
Discovery learning 
Enactive 
Formal operational 
Iconic 
Inductive reasoning 
Pre-operational 
Sensorimotor 
Symbolic
TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1  67 
Abruscato, J. (2004). Teaching children science: A discovery approach (5th ed.). 
Boston: Allyn  Bacon. 
Atherton, J. S. (2011). Learning and teaching: Cognitive theories of learning. 
Retrieved May 15, 2011, from http://www.learningandteaching.info/ 
learning/cognitive.htm 
Bruner, J. S. (1966). Toward a theory of instruction. Cambridge, Mass.: Belkapp 
Press. 
Johnson, C., Maiden, K., McDonald, R.,  McGuire, A. (n.a.). Retrieved May 19, 
2011, from http://tiger.towson.edu/~cjohns26/Jerome%20Bruner.ppt 
Learning Theories. (2008). Discovery learning (Bruner). Retrieved May 22, 2011, 
from http://www.learning-theories.com/discovery-learning-bruner.html 
Lindgren, H. C.,  Suter, W. N. (1985). Educational psychology in the classroom. 
California: Brooks/Cole Publishing Company. 
Martin, R., Sexton, C.,  Gerlovich, J. (2002). Teaching science for all children  
Methods for constructing understanding. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. 
Ormond, J. (2000). Educational psychology: Developing learners (3rd ed). 
Belkapp Press. 
Slavin, R. E. (2006). Educational psychology: Theory and practice (8th ed.). Upper 
Saddle River: Pearson Education, Inc. 
Subramaniam, N. K. (2010). Enriching blended pedagogy through Piagetian 
learning model: A case study. Retrieved 19 May 2011 from 
http://eprints.oum.edu.my/411/1/enriching_nantha.pdf 
Thorsett, P. (2002). Discovery learning theory. A primer for discussion. Retrieved 
May 19, 2011, from http://general.utpb.edu/fac/keast_d/Tunebooks/ 
pdf/Bruner%20and%20Discovery%20Learning.pdf 
Tomei, L. (2004). Learning theories: A primer exercise. Retrieved May 19, 2011, 
from http://academics.rmu.edu/~tomei/ed711psy/c_bruner.htm 
Waring, P. (2011). Cognition and development. Retrieved May 22, 2011, from 
http://psychology4a.com/cognitive_development.htm#Jerome_Bruner_N 
orthern College. (2003). Learning theories  Classical conditioning. 
Retrieved April 27, 2011, from http://www.northern.ac.uk/learning/NC 
Material/Psychology/lifespan%20folder/Learningtheories.htm
6 8  TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 
Utah State University. (2000). Positive interaction procedures. Retrieved May 8, 
2011, from http://www.usu.edu/teachall/text/behavior/LRBIpdfs/ 
Positive.pdf 
Woolfolk, A. ( 2001). Educational psychology. USA: Allyn  Bacon.
Topic 
4 
 Cognitive 
Learning 
Theories 2 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain the main principles of AusubelÊs learning theory; 
2. Apply AusubelÊs deductive thinking in teaching science; 
3. Explain the main principles of GagneÊs Mastery Learning; 
4. Apply GagneÊs Mastery Learning in teaching science; 
5. Discuss the main principles of the Multiple Intelligences theory; and 
6. Apply Multiple Intelligences theory in teaching science. 
 INTRODUCTION 
We will continue exploring cognitive learning theories in this topic. Can you 
remember what these theories are? Yes, cognitive learning theories focus on the 
mental processes of learning. The cognitive theorists focus on the workings of the 
human brain. They view people as active processors of information and study 
how learners acquire and reorganise mental structures as they process and store 
information. 
The cognitive learning theories that will be discussed in this topic are AusubelÊs 
Deductive Learning theory, GagneÊs theory of Mastery Learning and the 
Multiple Intelligences theory. We will look at the main elements of each theory 
and study how they can be applied in the teaching of science.
7 0  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
AUSUBEL’S DEDUCTIVE LEARNING 
The first theory that we will be looking at is AusubelÊs Theory, which uses the 
deductive approach. A deductive approach is different from an inductive 
approach as used by Bruner in Topic 3. Look at Figure 4.1 to see the steps in 
deductive science teaching. 
Figure 4.1: Deductive science teaching 
Now, study the three sentences given in the box below. Close this module and 
try to remember the three sentences. Which one do you find the easiest to 
remember? 
Adapted from Slavin, R.E. (1994) 
4.1 
(a) Enso flrs hmen matn snoi teha erso iakt siae otin tnes esna rae . 
(b) Easier that nonsense information to makes then sense is learn. 
(c) Information that makes sense is easier to learn than nonsense.
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  71 
You would have found sentence (c) easiest to remember. Why is this so? It is 
because sentence (c) is the one that would have made sense to you. You could 
remember (c) because it was meaningful to you. 
It is the same with AusubelÊs deductive learning which stresses the importance of 
meaningful learning. Let us read further to learn more. 
ACTIVITY 4.1 
Study Figure 4.1. What is the difference between the inductive and 
deductive approaches in teaching science? Explain your answer using 
a specific science example. 
4.1.1 Meaningful Learning 
David Ausubel stressed on the importance of meaningful learning in his learning 
theory. Any material that needs to be learned such as concepts, principles and 
ideas should be presented in an organised way so that the learners can make 
connections to existing knowledge and understand it better. To remember 
sentences (a) and (b) you would be required to memorise them because the 
sentences would have had no meaning to you. Ausubel calls this type of learning 
rote memorisation. Rote memorisation is not considered meaningful learning 
because the material is not connected to existing knowledge. 
Ausubel suggests an Expository Teaching Model to encourage meaningful rather 
than rote learning. „Expository‰ means „explanation‰ or the presentation of 
ideas and concepts. Expository teaching methods present information in an 
organised form rather than having students discovering it for themselves. 
So, what do you think would be the difference between BrunerÊs theory and 
AusubelÊs theory? According to Ausubel, students acquire knowledge mainly 
through reception rather than discovery. He calls his approach reception 
learning. Here, the teacher needs to organise all the required information 
logically, systematically and meaningfully so that the students can receive it in 
the most efficient way. 
Can you see now that AusubelÊs teaching approach is deductive in nature? The 
teacher plays the role of an organiser of subject matter and presents information 
through lectures and tasks. Materials are presented from general to specific or 
from a rule or principle to specific examples.
7 2  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
ACTIVITY 4.2 
1. Explain in your own words what you understand by 
‰meaningful learning‰Ê. 
2. What is the role of the teacher in meaningful learning? 
4.1.2 Advance Organiser 
According to Ausubel, for meaningful learning to occur, students must relate 
new knowledge to what they already know. Ausubel suggests the idea of an 
advance organiser as a way to help students link their ideas with the new 
material that will be presented. An advance organiser is a general statement or 
analogy given in the beginning of the lesson to relate new information to prior 
knowledge of students. 
What is the purpose of an advance organiser? It provides the structure for a new 
topic by relating it to what students already know. It helps the learner place the 
material to be learned in context. Read the introduction for Topic 4 again. Is there 
an advance organiser for this topic? 
Yes No If Yes, which one? 
An advance organiser is a set of ideas or concepts presented before the material is 
learned. It is meant to provide a stable cognitive structure to which new learning 
can be anchored. This means that an advance organiser acts like an intellectual 
scaffolding. 
Advance organisers provide an overview that shows students what to expect and 
summarises all aspects of the unit or lesson in advance. Advance organisers can 
be charts, concept maps, definitions or generalisations and need not be very long. 
For example, you can list, pronounce and discuss science terms like „producers‰ 
and „consumers‰ before starting the lesson on „Food Chain‰. 
Concept maps can be used as advance organisers. Figure 4.2 shows a concept 
map for the topic on „The Five Senses‰. You can start the lesson by using this 
organiser which shows students what they will be learning for the lesson.
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  73 
Figure 4.2: Concept map for a topic on „The Five Senses‰ 
Source: http://nikilavoie.blogspot.com/2007/10/exploring-concept-mapping-with.html 
Another example of an advance organiser is shown below: 
The teacher says: 
„Do you remember that during the last lesson we measured the temperature 
of a glass of water? Well, today we are going to add ice to the water and see 
what happens to the temperature.‰ 
As you can see, even if this advance organiser is short it is effectively linked to 
the prior knowledge of the students.
7 4  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
ACTIVITY 4.3 
Choose a learning area from the primary science curriculum. 
1. Prepare an appropriate advance organiser. 
2. Discuss the effectiveness of your advance organiser with your 
coursemates during the tutorial session. 
SELF-CHECK 4.1 
1. What are the main elements of AusubelÊs theory? 
2. Discuss when it is appropriate to apply AusubelÊs theory in 
your science classroom. 
APPLICATION OF AUSUBEL’S DEDUCTIVE 
THINKING IN SCIENCE TEACHING 
4.2 
You have studied the main elements of AusubelÊs Theory. Let us now look in 
detail how you can use this theory in the teaching of science. 
Joyce and Weil (1986) explain that a lesson using AusubelÊs model of teaching, or 
an expository approach, consists of three principal phases: 
(a) The presentation of an advance organiser; 
(b) The presentation of a learning task or material; and 
(c) The strengthening of cognitive organisation. 
The three phases are shown in Table 4.1 with explanations on what happens at 
every phase.
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  75 
Table 4.1: AusubelÊs Model of Teaching 
Phase 1 Phase II Phase III 
Presentation of the 
Advance Organiser 
Presentation of Learning 
Task or Material 
Strengthening Cognitive 
Organisation 
 Clarify the aim of the 
lesson. The learners 
should be presented 
with a set of learning 
objectives. 
 Present the advance 
organiser which will 
prepare learners for 
the new information. 
 The advance organiser 
must relate the ideas 
to be presented in the 
lesson to information 
already in studentsÊ 
minds. 
 Present new material by 
means of lectures, 
demonstrations, 
discussions or student 
tasks. 
 The material is presented 
clearly, sequentially and 
logically. 
 Engage and maintain 
studentsÊ attention in 
meaningful learning. 
 The teaching should be 
accompanied with good 
examples following 
every explanation. 
 Relate new 
information to the 
advance organiser. 
 Promote active 
reception learning by 
questioning students 
or giving them 
opportunities to ask 
questions. 
 Review or sum up at 
the end of the lesson 
in order to check the 
students' 
understanding of the 
new information. 
Source: Joyce et. al (1986) 
As you can see in AusubelÊs theory, the teacher presents the lesson, sequentially, 
logically and systematically. An advance organiser is presented at the beginning 
of the lesson. Student interest is maintained with interactive questioning and lots 
of examples. Finally, the teacher closes the lesson by reviewing the concepts 
presented and checking for studentsÊ understanding. 
A summary of how you can use AusubelÊs ideas in your classroom is shown in 
the following Figure 4.3.
7 6  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
Figure 4.3: AusubelÊs ideas for your science classroom 
AusubelÊs approach is often thought to be a traditional way of teaching. 
However, this approach can be effective for the teaching of science especially if 
you want to present a broad range of subject matter and if information is not 
easily accessible. You can also use this approach if you want to present difficult 
concepts your students might have difficulty understanding.
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  77 
ACTIVITY 4.4 
1. A science teacher wants to teach the topic „Magnets‰ 
deductively using AusubelÊs Theory. The steps the teacher is 
using are given in the box but they are not in order. Arrange 
them in order according to the three phases below: 
Steps used by the teacher to teach „Magnets‰ 
1. Teacher asks students for other examples of materials that are 
attracted to magnets 
2. Teacher demonstrates how magnets attract materials made of 
iron and steel 
3. Teacher tells students that the lesson is about materials that are 
attracted to magnets 
4. Teacher writes on the board „Magnets are attracted to metals, 
mostly those that are made of iron and steel‰ 
5. Teacher explains all words and ensures all students understand 
them 
6. Teacher gives students materials and magnets and asks students 
to predict which materials will be attracted to magnets 
Phase 1: Presentation 
of the Advance 
Organiser 
Phase II: Presentation of 
Learning Task or 
Material 
Phase III: 
Strengthening 
Cognitive Organisation 
2. Choose a topic from the primary science curriculum. 
Plan the steps you will use to teach the topic using AusubelÊs 
Model of Teaching as shown in Table 4.1. Present your answer in 
the tutorial session.
7 8  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
SELF-CHECK 4.2 
1. Explain briefly how you can use AusubelÊs Learning theory in 
your classroom. 
2. The purpose of an advance organiser is to 
(a) map out new information. 
(b) make new information meaningful. 
(c) provide an overview of new lesson content. 
(d) present new information in the form of analogies. 
GAGNE’S MASTERY LEARNING 
4.3 
Have you heard of the term „„mastery learning‰? What do you understand by this 
term? You might be thinking of someone who has mastered what he or she is 
supposed to learn. That is in essence what mastery learning is all about. Mastery 
learning is based on the assumption that all students, if given appropriate 
instruction and time, can master any learning outcome (Bloom, 1968). That 
should be the goal of all teachers. 
Robert Gagne (1916-2002) was a psychologist who was concerned with learning 
and instruction. He believed that learning must proceed from the simple to the 
more complex in well-defined stages. According to him, mastery learning can be 
designed into the instructional process. Let us now study GagneÊs theory to see 
how this can be done. 
GagneÊs learning theory incorporates three distinct components: categories of 
learning, hierarchy of intellectual skills and the nine events of instruction. This is 
summarised in Figure 4.4.
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  79 
Figure 4.4: Components of GagneÊs learning theory 
4.3.1 Gagne’s Categories of Learning 
Gagne identified five major categories or domains of learning, which are: 
(a) Intellectual skills 
(b) Cognitive strategies 
(c) Verbal information 
(d) Attitudes 
(e) Motor skills 
Each category has different abilities and performances and is learned in different 
ways. The significance of this is that different categories of learning require 
different types of instruction. For example, if you want to teach your students an 
intellectual skill like the „properties of light‰, you will instruct them in a different
8 0  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
way as compared to teaching them an attitude like „honesty‰. Figure 4.5 shows 
GagneÊs categories of learning. 
Figure 4.5: GagneÊs categories of learning 
ACTIVITY 4.5 
Gagne identified five categories of learning as shown in Figure 4.4. 
For each of these categories, provide examples using the primary 
science curriculum. Think about how you will teach these categories 
in your science classroom. Discuss your answers during the tutorial 
class.
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  81 
4.3.2 Gagne’s Hierarchy of Intellectual Skills 
Gagne focused on one category, that is, „intellectual skills‰. He suggested that 
these skills be arranged in a hierarchy from the simple to the more complex. For 
learning to occur, the student would need to learn the more simple tasks before 
the more complex tasks. This means the simpler tasks become prerequisites or 
building blocks that should be completed before higher level learning can occur. 
Study Figure 4.6 which shows how the different learning types are arranged in a 
hierarchy. 
Figure 4.6: GagneÊs Hierarchy of Learning 
Learning hierarchies can help teachers plan their teaching or instruction. So the 
first question you should ask is, „What are the intellectual skills that are needed 
in order to master the learning outcomes?‰ Once you know the final objective, 
you can plan backwards and make sure the simpler skills are mastered first 
before teaching a new skill. Table 4.2 shows examples of GagneÊs Hierarchy of 
Learning Skills.
8 2  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
Table 4.2: Example of GagneÊs Hierarchy of Learning Skills 
GagneÊs hierarchy 
of learning What is it? Examples 
Problem Solving Applying rules to the solution 
of a problem and learning 
something new. 
Experimenting on the effect of 
heat on solubility. 
Rule Learning Chain of two or more concepts 
that make up knowledge. 
Water when heated will boil. 
Concept Learning Grouping and categorising. Characteristics of animals and 
plants or metals and non-metals. 
Discrimination 
Learning 
Learning to make different 
responses to different stimuli. 
Using our five senses to 
identify substances. 
Verbal Association Verbalisation e.g. naming, 
reciting. 
Mg  magnesium, 
Fe  iron. 
Chaining Learning of chains or 
connection. Requires stimulus 
response learning sequences. 
How to reduce and increase 
the bunsen burner flame to 
suit experiment. 
Stimulus-Response 
Learning 
Ability to perform a particular 
behaviour when a certain 
stimulus is present. 
When the bunsen burner heat 
is too high, reduce it. 
Signal Learning Learning how to make a 
response to a signal. 
When a bunsen burner is 
lighted, ask students to give a 
response. 
ACTIVITY 4.6 
GagneÊs theory states that learning hierarchies can be constructed by 
working backwards from the final learning objective. 
Choose a concept, rule or principle from the primary science 
curriculum. What are the intellectual skills your students need to 
master first in order to learn the concept that you have chosen?
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  83 
4.3.3 Gagne’s Nine Instructional Events 
Gagne introduced nine instructional events that need to be part of the learning 
situation. The nine instructional events are shown in Table 4.3 and Figure 4.7. 
Table 4.3: GagneÊs Nine Instructional Events 
INSTRUCTIONAL EVENT LESSON ACTIVITY 
Gain attention  Use multimedia technology to grab attention. 
 Tell a story. 
Inform learner of objectives  Make learners aware of what to expect so they are 
aware and prepared to receive instruction. 
Recall prior learning  Ask questions or do activities that help students 
recall prior knowledge. 
Present stimulus material  The learning content is meaningfully organised 
and explained and then demonstrated. 
 A variety of strategies should be used. 
Provide learning guidance  Teacher facilitates the learning process by giving 
hints and cues when needed. 
Elicit performance  Teacher asks students to demonstrate new 
knowledge using questions, worksheets or 
activities 
Provide feedback  Teacher gives feedback to students. 
Assess performance  Provide exercises to assess students. 
 Provide test to check if learning outcomes were 
achieved. 
Enhance retention and transfer  Provide activities where students can transfer 
their learning and review lesson. 
 Applying learning in real-life situations is a step 
towards mastery learning.
8 4  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
Figure 4.7: GagneÊs Nine Instructional Events 
Source: http://eet.sdsu.edu/eetwiki/index.php/Gagne's_Nine_Events_of_Instruction 
ACTIVITY 4.7 
Choose a topic from the primary science curriculum. 
1. Plan how you will teach the topic you have chosen using GagneÊs 
Nine Instructional Events. 
2. Specify clearly the activities you will carry out for each event. 
Prepare your answer in the form of a table.
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  85 
APPLICATION OF GAGNE’S MASTERY 
LEARNING IN SCIENCE TEACHING 
You have just studied the three main components of GagneÊs theory namely 
categories of learning, hierarchy of intellectual skills and the nine events of 
instruction. As a teacher, you need to first determine the category of learning as 
the type of instruction you will use will depend on this. Then, plan your 
instruction based on the nine events of instruction. If you want to teach 
intellectual skills, then determine the prerequisite skills needed and make sure 
students have mastered them before teaching the new skill. 
As a summary, keep the following principles in mind on how you can apply 
GagneÊs Mastery Learning in science teaching (see Figure 4.8). 
Figure 4.8: Application of GagneÊs mastery learning in science teaching 
4.4
8 6  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
SELF-CHECK 4.3 
Answer the following questions. 
1. „Students are able to solve problems using the formula for 
speed‰. 
According to Gagne, what type of learning category is shown 
in the learning outcome above? 
(A) Verbal information 
(B) Intellectual skills 
(C) Cognitive strategies 
(D) Attitude 
2. Which of the following is NOT one of GagneÊs instructional 
events ? 
(A) Present material 
(B) Enhance retention and transfer 
(C) Promote discrimination learning 
(D) Stimulate recall of prior knowledge 
3. According to GagneÊs theory, what is the first event of 
instruction teachers should use? 
(A) Stimulate prior learning 
(B) Enhance retention 
(C) Present the stimulus 
MULTIPLE INTELLIGENCES THEORY 
4.5 
Howard Gardner suggests a new way of thinking about intelligence. According 
to him, there are eight different intelligences that he believes everyone has in 
different degrees (Figure 4.9). These intelligences make people perceive and 
understand the world differently. One or more of these intelligences may be 
more dominant for different individuals.
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  87 
Figure 4.9: Gardner's eight intelligences 
Study Table 4.4 to understand the main characteristics and skills for each 
intelligence. 
Table 4.4: Multiple Intelligences  the Characteristics and Associated Skills 
Intelligence Characteristics Skills 
Logical / 
Mathematical 
Ability to use reason, logic and 
numbers. These learners think 
conceptually in logical and 
numerical patterns making 
connections between pieces of 
information. 
Problem solving, classifying and 
categorising information, working 
with abstract concepts, 
performing complex mathematical 
calculations, working with 
geometric shapes. 
Verbal / 
Linguistic 
Ability to use words and 
languages. These learners have 
highly developed auditory 
skills and are generally good 
speakers. They think in words 
rather than pictures. 
Listening, speaking, writing, 
storytelling, explaining, teaching, 
using humour, remembering 
information, convincing someone 
of their point of view.
8 8  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
Musical 
Ability to produce and 
appreciate music. These 
musically inclined learners 
think in sounds, rhythms and 
patterns. 
Singing, whistling, playing 
musical instruments, recognising 
tonal patterns, composing music, 
remembering melodies. 
Visual / Spatial 
This intelligence is the ability 
to perceive the visual. These 
learners tend to think in 
pictures and need to create 
vivid mental images to retain 
information. 
Puzzle building, reading, writing, 
understanding charts and graphs, 
a good sense of direction, 
sketching, painting, manipulating 
images, constructing, fixing, 
designing practical objects, 
interpreting visual images. 
Bodily / 
kinesthetic 
Ability to control body 
movements and handle objects 
skilfully. These learners 
express themselves through 
movement. They have a good 
sense of balance and eye-hand 
co-ordination. 
Dancing, physical co-ordination, 
sports, hands-on experimentation, 
using body language, crafts, 
acting, miming, using their hands 
to create or build, expressing 
emotions through the body. 
Interpersonal 
Ability to relate and 
understand others. These 
learners try to see things from 
other people's point of view in 
order to understand how they 
think and feel. 
Listening, using empathy, 
understanding other people's 
moods and feelings, counselling, 
co-operating with groups, noticing 
people's moods, motivations and 
intentions. 
Intrapersonal 
Ability to reflect and analyse 
oneself. These learners try to 
understand their inner 
feelings, dreams, relationships 
with others, strengths and 
weaknesses. 
Recognising their own strengths 
and weaknesses, reflecting and 
analysing themselves, awareness 
of their inner feelings, desires and 
dreams, evaluating their thinking 
patterns. 
Naturalist Ability to identify and classify 
patterns in nature. These 
learners have a sensitivity and 
appreciation for nature. 
Good at nurturing and growing 
things, ability to care for and 
interact with animals, enjoys 
gardening and keeping pets, likes 
to camp and hike, conscious of 
environmental issues. 
Source: 
http://www.ldpride.net/learningstyles.MI.htm#Multiple%20Intelligences%20Explained
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  89 
Are you interested to find out what intelligences you have? Visit the website 
below and try doing the test to find out how your mind works: 
http://www.bgfl.org/bgfl/custom/resources_ftp/client_ftp/ks3/ict/multiple_i 
nt/questions/choose_lang.cfm. 
If you have difficulty accessing the Internet, try the test given in Appendix 1 at 
the end of this topic. 
Have you discovered how your mind works? The intelligence that you scored the 
highest will generally be the best way that you study or do things. Look at the 
intelligences where your score was low and think of how you can increase that 
particular intelligence. 
APPLICATION OF MULTIPLE INTELLIGENCES 
THEORY IN SCIENCE TEACHING 
According to GardnerÊs theory, each child can be viewed as having these eight 
intelligences in different degrees. What does this mean to you as a science 
teacher? It means your teaching should have experiences for as many of the 
multiple intelligences as possible so every student has an opportunity to learn. 
First, you need to find out the multiple intelligences your students have. You can 
do this by observing students when they are studying, observing activities 
students like to do during their free time, looking at studentsÊ achievement 
records and reports, or using the above link to test your students. 
How can you incorporate multiple intelligences in the teaching and learning 
process? Look at each of the intelligences and think of what activities will help 
each of these intelligences. A few ways you can incorporate multiple intelligences 
in your science classroom are given below: 
Ways to Incorporate Multiple Intelligences in The Science Classroom 
(a) Multiple Intelligence Stations 
You can set up different multiple intelligence stations in your classroom. 
Each station can have certain elements for each intelligence. The stations can 
be created using themes or intelligences in rotation if the space is not enough. 
E.g.: Naturalist station can have flora and fauna. 
The Intrapersonal Station should be away from noise and disturbance. 
Pupils can be given ear plugs so it is quiet and they can read, write, 
think and do self-reflection. 
4.6
9 0  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
(b) Classroom Decorations 
You can decorate the classroom with information that can be appreciated 
by each intelligence. Get the students involved in this activity. 
E.g.: Verbal-linguistic students can prepare posters about science concepts 
and definitions. 
Logical-mathematical students can prepare models of shapes and 
formulas. 
(c) Field Trips 
You can take students out for trips to different places to observe and 
understand nature. 
E.g.: For naturalist learners, you can ask them to collect and classify leaves. 
Musical learners can be asked to compose and sing science-themed 
songs during the field trip. 
(d) Classroom Resources 
You can incorporate many different types of resources in a lesson to 
increase studentsÊ interest. 
E.g.: For kinesthetic learners, you can use balls, building kits, stop watches, 
robotic kits. 
For interpersonal learners, you can use board games, role play cards 
and science games. 
ACTIVITY 4.8 
1. Identify a science topic from the primary science curriculum. 
Discuss activities you can use to teach the concepts using the 
different multiple intelligences. 
2. There is now a ninth multiple intelligence, that is, existentialist 
intelligence. Research this and discuss the implications for 
science teaching. 
SELF-CHECK 4.4 
What are the advantages of using multiple intelligences theory in the 
classroom? What are some of your concerns? Discuss.
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  91 
 Cognitive theories view learning as involving the mental processes through 
which humans acquire, process and store information. 
 Ausubel suggests that teachers use a deductive approach. That is, they 
should introduce a topic with general concepts, and then gradually include 
specific examples. 
 Information that makes sense and has meaning to the student is more 
meaningful than unrelated information learned by rote memorisation. 
 The expository teaching model stresses on a teacher-planned, systematic 
presentation of meaningful information. 
 The purpose of expository teaching is to transmit knowledge and skills from 
those who know (e.g. teacher and workbook) to those who do not know (e.g. 
students). 
 Reception learning is a teaching method in which the teacher structures the 
learning situation to select materials that are appropriate for students and 
then presents them in well-organised lessons that progress from general to 
specific details. 
 An advance organiser is an initial statement or an outline about a subject to 
be learned that provides a structure for the new information and relates it to 
information students already possess. 
 The purpose of an advance organiser is to activate as much of the studentsÊ 
existing knowledge to help them understand new information. 
 AusubelÊs model of teaching or an expository approach consists of three 
principal phases: the presentation of an advance organiser, the presentation 
of a learning task or material and strengthening the cognitive organisation. 
 Mastery learning means that all students if given appropriate instruction and 
time can master any learning objective. 
 The three main components of GagneÊs theory are categories of learning, 
hierarchy of intellectual skills and the nine events of instruction. 
 Gagne identified five major categories or domains of learning, which are: 
verbal information, intellectual skills, cognitive strategies, motor skills and 
attitudes. 
 Different categories of learning require different types of instruction.
9 2  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
 Intellectual skills can be arranged in a hierarchy; with the simpler tasks being 
prerequisites for the more complex tasks. 
 Nine instructional events that need to be part of the learning situation are 
gaining attention, informing learner of objective, recalling of prior 
information, present stimulus material, provide learning guidance, elicit 
performance, provide feedback and assess performance. 
 Howard GardnerÊs Multiple Intelligences theory consists of eight different 
intelligences. 
 The eight multiple intelligences are logical-mathematical, verbal-linguistic, 
visual-spatial, bodily-kinesthetic, interpersonal, intrapersonal, musical and 
naturalist. 
 Each child can be viewed as having these eight intelligences in different 
degrees. 
 The teacher should provide experiences for as many of the multiple 
intelligences as possible so every student has an opportunity to learn. 
 Ways to incorporate multiples intelligences in the classroom include having 
multiple intelligence stations, classroom decorations, field trips and using a 
variety of learning resources. 
Advance organiser 
Bodily-kinesthetic 
Categories of learning 
Deductive learning 
Expository Learning 
Hierarchy of intellectual skills 
Instructional events 
Interpersonal 
Intrapersonal 
Logical-mathematical 
Mastery Learning 
Meaningful Learning 
Multiple intelligences 
Musical 
Naturalist 
Reception Learning 
Rote memorisation 
Verbal-linguistic 
Visual spatial
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  93 
Abruscato, J. (2000). Teaching children science: A discovery approach. USA. 
Allyn  Bacon. 
Bloom, B. (1968). Learning for mastery. Evaluation Comment 1(2). Los Angeles: 
University of California, Center for the Study of Evaluation of Instructional 
Programs. 
Hassard, J. (1992). Minds on science  Middle and secondary school methods. 
USA. Harper Collins. 
Joyce, B., Weil, M.,  Showers, B. (1992). Models of teaching (4th ed.). USA. Allyn 
 Bacon. 
Joyce, B., Weil, M.,  Showers, B. (1986). Models of teaching (3rd ed.). Allyn and 
Bacon. USA.) 
Retrieved 1/6/11 http://lrc.binus.ac.id/downloads/TE/Gagne.pdf 
Retrieved 1/6/11 http://questgarden.com/12/56/4/060120212752/credits.htm 
Retrieved 12/5/11.http://surfaquarium.com/MI/ 
Retrieved 20/5/11 http://my-coach.com/project.php?id=12152project_step= 
28465 
Retrieved 20/5/11. Presents http://tip.psychology.org/gagne.html 
Retrieved 30/5/11 http://www.bgfl.org/bgfl/custom/resources_ftp/client_ 
ftp/ks3/ict/multiple_int/what.cfm 
Retrieved 31/5/11 http://lth3.k12.il.us/rhampton/mi/lessonplanideas.htm# 
Naturalist 
Retrieved 31/5/11 http://www.ldpride.net/learningstyles.MI.htm#Multiple%20 
Intelligences%20Explained 
Santrock, J. W. (2001). Educational psychology. USA. McGraw-Hill. 
Slavin, R. E. (1994). Educational psychology. Theory and Practice. USA. Allyn 
and Bacon. 
Woolfolk, A. ( 2001). Educational psychology. USA. Allyn and Bacon.
9 4  TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
APPENDIX 1: EVALUATING MYSELF ON 
GARDNER’S EIGHT TYPES OF INTELLIGENCE 
Read the following items and rate yourself on a 4-point scale. Each rating 
corresponds to how well a statement describes you: 
1 = Not like me at all 
2 = Somewhat unlike me 
3 = Somewhat like me 
4 = A lot like me 
Verbal Thinking 1 2 3 4 
1. I do well on verbal tests 
2. I am a skilled reader and read a lot 
3. I love the challenge of solving verbal problems 
Logical / Mathematical Thinking 
4. I am a very logical thinker 
5. I like to think like a scientist 
6. Maths is one of my favourite subjects 
Spatial Skills 
7. I am good at visualising objects and layouts from 
different angles 
8. I have the ability to create maps of spaces and 
locations in my mind 
9. If I had wanted to be, I think I could have been an 
architect 
Bodily-Kinesthetic Skills 
10. I have great hand-eye coordination 
11. I excel at sports 
12. I am good at using my body to carry out an 
expression, as in dance 
Musical Skills 
13. I play one or more musical instruments well 
14. I have a good „ear‰ for music 
15. I am good at making up songs
TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2  95 
Interpersonal Skills 
16. I am very good at „reading „ people 
17. I am good at working with other people 
18. I am a good listener 
Intrapersonal Skills 
19. I know myself well and have a positive view of 
myself 
20. I am in tune with my thoughts and feelings 
21. I have good coping skills 
Naturalist Skills 
22. I am good at observing patterns in nature 
23. I excel at identifying and classifying objects in the 
natural environment 
24. I understand natural and man-made systems 
Scoring and Interpretation 
Total your scores for each of the eight intelligences and place the totals in the 
blank that follows the label for each kind of intelligence. Which areas of 
intelligence are your strengths? In which area are you the least proficient? It is 
highly unlikely that you will be strong in all eight areas or weak in all eight areas. 
By being aware of your strengths and weaknesses in different areas of 
intelligence, you can also identify which areas of teaching will be easiest or 
hardest for you.
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
 INTRODUCTION 
Teacher Areena started the 
lesson by telling a story about 
two best friends going to the 
sea using the `Wayang kulitÊ 
prop. She asked her students 
to discuss about the story and 
what they can learn from the 
story. 
Topic 
5 
 Inquiry 
Learning 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. State the main difference between discovery and inquiry; 
2. Describe the advantages of inquiry learning; 
3. Explain the inquiry process; 
4. Discuss the conditions needed for inquiry learning 
5. Explain the types of questions needed for inquiry learning; and 
6. Construct questions that are relevant to inquiry learning.
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  97 
Later she asked her students: 
Teacher : How did the shadow form? 
Aiman : It is because of the light behind the puppet. 
Teacher : Yes, Aiman! Do all kinds of objects form shadows if a light is shone on 
them? 
Kumari : I donÊt think so. Only opaque objects form shadows. 
Teacher : Good! 
Then she asked them to draw a diagram to explain how the shadow is formed. 
Teacher : What if I want to make the shadow bigger? What should I do? 
Aina : I know! I will show you. 
Teacher Areena gave a puppet and a torchlight to Aina to demonstrate it to the 
class. 
Teacher : Yes! You can move the torchlight closer to the puppet. 
She then asks her students to discuss other ways of changing the size of the 
shadow formed on the screen. 
How would her class look like? Can you imagine a class where the children 
actively pose questions, seek answers to questions, demonstrate a strong interest 
in outcomes, and discuss their theories and ideas with others? If you do, then you 
do have some understanding of inquiry learning. Her approach involves her 
students learning science using the inquiry approach. 
In this topic, we will be discussing the concept of inquiry teaching and learning; 
the steps involved; its advantages; the environment; and the types of questions 
asked in the process. 
ACTIVITY 5.1 
Recall your own classroom. Does it resemble AreenaÊs class? How 
does it differ?
9 8  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
INQUIRY AND DISCOVERY 
5.1 
The word inquiry has many interpretations. It ranges from a simple question, 
such as How many different kinds of fish are in the aquarium?, or as complex 
as understanding the nature of science itself (Pratt and Hackett, 2000). 
If you look up the Webster dictionary, to „inquire‰ is to ask about something; to 
search into it, especially by asking questions; and to investigate something. This 
is the heart of inquiry learning. Children play the role of active learner; when 
challenged with a problem, they will determine how to find the solution to the 
problem through investigation. 
Martin, et. al (1994), quoting Birnie  Ryan, said that „those who inquire exert an 
effort to discover something to the inquirer  though not necessarily new to the 
world‰. Children will be able to inquire when they are given the following: 
(a) Hands-on activities; 
(b) Materials to manipulate; 
(c) Enough structure to help them focus or maintain a productive direction; and 
(d) Enough freedom to make a personal learning discovery. 
They further explain that if a child is able to acquire a new fact, concept, 
principle, or solution through the inquiry process, the student is making a 
discovery. 
In simple terms, inquiry is a means to an end  the discovery. What the student 
acquires is not only content knowledge, but skills on how to approach a problem, 
identify important resources, both design and carry out hands-on investigations, 
analyse and interpret data, and perhaps most importantly, recognise when they 
have answered the question or solved the problem. The goal of inquiry is to help 
them gain a better understanding of the world around them through active 
engagement with real-life experiences. 
SELF-CHECK 5.1 
1. State in your own words what inquiry learning is. 
2. What is the main difference between discovery and inquiry? 
Discuss with your coursemates.
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  99 
5.1.1 Inquiry Cycle 
To conduct inquiry learning, we will explore using the Inquiry Cycle. 
Different people describe inquiry cycle differently. The simplest is based on 
DeweyÊs philosophy. The spiral path of inquiry is shown in Figure 5.1. 
Figure 5.1: DeweyÊs inquiry cycle 
Source: http://www.cii.illinois.edu/InquiryPage/ 
Based on DeweyÊs inquiry cycle, you begin the class by asking your students 
questions based on a problem presented. Besides that, you can also encourage 
your students to state the question that need to be investigated. When the 
question is clear, students can then plan different ways to find the answer to the 
question. After that, the students will do investigations to test their ideas or 
solution to the problem. When data have been collected, they will analyse and 
interpret the data, thereby creating new knowledge. Later, they will discuss their 
finding about new discoveries and experiences, and finally reflect on their new-found 
knowledge. 
Another inquiry cycle worth discussing is from Warner and Myers, as shown in 
Figure 5.2. Comprising six stages, their model is more comprehensive than 
DeweyÊs: 
(a) Inquisition  stating a what if or I wonder question to be investigated; 
(b) Acquisition  brainstorming possible procedures; 
(c) Supposition  identifying an I think statement to test;
1 00  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
(d) Implementation  designing and carrying out a plan; 
(e) Summation  collecting evidence and drawing conclusions; and 
(f) Exhibition  sharing and communicating results. 
Figure 5.2: Warner and Myers Inquiry Cycle 
Source: http://edis.ifas.ufl.edu/wc076 
Does the Warner and Myers' cycle sound familiar? Yes, their model corresponds 
to the description of the scientific method described in Topic 1. That is why 
inquiry learning is very suitable in the science classroom. The process of inquiry 
not only enhances students' understanding of natural phenomena, but also 
develops their science processing skills. Composed of the same basic 
components, both the scientific method and the inquiry process require students 
to conduct research investigations by formulating a question, developing a 
hypothesis, conducting an experiment, recording data, analysing data and 
drawing conclusions.
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  101 
Teachers play a vital role in adapting the inquiry process to the knowledge and 
ability level of their students. When using inquiry-based lessons, teachers are 
responsible for: 
(a) Starting the inquiry process; 
(b) Promoting dialogue among students; 
(c) Ensuring the smooth transition from small groups to classroom discussions; 
(d) Intervening to clear misconceptions or developing studentsÊ understanding 
of content material; 
(e) Modelling scientific procedures and attitudes; and 
(f) Utilising studentsÊ experiences to create new content knowledge. 
Based on the objectives of the lesson and the abilities of the students, teachers 
must decide how much guidance they will provide. Regardless of the amount of 
assistance that teachers provide, the fundamental goal of inquiry is for the 
students to be engaged during the learning process. 
ACTIVITY 5.2 
Robert Suchmann also suggested a strategy that can be used to teach 
using the inquiry approach. 
1. Collect information about his strategy. 
2. Compare his strategy to Warner and MyersÊ cycle. Discuss your 
findings with your tutor and coursemates. 
SELF-CHECK 5.2 
1. State whether the following statement about inquiry learning is 
true or false. 
(a) Inquiry learning is an example of a student-centred 
approach. 
(b) The teacher plays an important role in inquiry learning.
1 02  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
(c) Inquiry is the process of defining and investigating 
5.1.2 Advantages of Inquiry Learning 
In a traditional science classroom, the teacher will first explain science concepts 
to students. If the student are involved in doing the investigations, the 
investigation will be planned by the teacher. In inquiry learning however, 
students are allowed to learn and experience science firsthand, by taking on the 
roles of scientists. This benefits students in many ways. According to the Institute 
for Inquiry (2005), students who do inquiry-based science will have the following 
characteristics: 
(a) View themselves as scientists in the process of learning; 
(b) Accept an „invitation to learn‰ and readily engage in the exploration 
process; 
problems, formulating hypotheses, designing 
experiments, gathering data and drawing conclusions 
about problems. 
(d) The teacher’s roles are to ask open-ended and high level 
questions, solicit and accept divergent responses and 
probe and redirect questions. 
(e) Do not allow your children to make their own correction 
as far as possible. 
(f) Let the children make their own conclusions. 
2. The following table lists the characteristics of inquiry and 
traditional learning. Fill in the blanks. 
Inquiry Aspect Traditional 
Constructivism Principle learning theory Behaviourism 
Student participation Passive 
Increased 
responsibility 
Student involvement in 
outcomes 
Problem solver Student role 
Teacher role Director/transmitter
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  103 
(c) Plan and carry out investigations; 
(d) Communicate using a variety of methods; 
(e) Propose explanations and solutions and build a store of concepts; 
(f) Raise questions; 
(g) Use observations; and 
(h) Critique their science practices. 
Thus, opportunities to think and behave as scientists provide relevancy and 
credibility to students understanding of science. They learn that it is appropriate 
to ask questions and seek answers. In addition, students learn the challenges and 
pitfalls of investigations. 
Inquiry-based learning has other advantages as well: 
(a) The approach is flexible so you can use it in different ways. It could be a 
simple and short project that can be done in a lesson, or a more 
comprehensive type that lasts a week or a month. The complex project 
could be an interdisciplinary project that reinforces multiple skills or 
knowledge areas (you will learn this type of project in Topic 7). The inquiry 
could involve students just researching the answers from various resources, 
or students to research and then test their ideas in the laboratory. In doing 
the projects, they will develop competencies in problem solving as well as 
in critical and creative thinking. 
(b) It could benefit those students that have different learning styles. Some 
students do not like just sitting down and listening to you. They like to do 
things, and find out the answers for themselves rather than being told. This 
is especially true for gifted students. They learn rapidly compared to their 
peers and would not be patient to wait for the others to catch up with them. 
So you could be giving this student a project to be carried out on their own 
while you concentrate on the other students who need more of your 
attention. 
(c) It is an approach that is very suitable if you are thinking of using 
cooperative and collaborative learning. You could assign different 
problems to different groups; different groups working on the same 
question; or on different aspects of the same question. They are not just 
finding solutions to the problem but they are developing their social and 
emotional skills as well. Of course you cannot expect the skills to happen 
automatically when they are working in a team. You need to plan 
purposely the skills that you want to incorporate into the lesson.
1 04  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
(d) An inquiry-based approach can work with any age group. Even though 
older children will be able to pursue much more sophisticated questioning 
and research projects, build a spirit of inquiry into activities wherever you 
can, even with the youngest, in an age-appropriate manner. 
(e) It also teaches students to develop self-directed learning skills when they 
are assigned individual tasks. For some students, they may need more 
guidance initially; but as they gain skills and confidence, they can do the 
inquiry on their own. These skills are important as they can apply them in 
their daily lives. 
(f) It develops studentsÊ ownership of their inquiry and enhances their interest 
in science. When they find the answer to a problem on their own, they 
would feel very proud. This then strengthens their confidence and will act 
as an intrinsic motivation for them to learn. 
SELF-CHECK 5.3 
Based on the points given earlier, create a mind map to summarise 
the advantages of inquiry learning. 
ACTIVITY 5.3 
What do you think are the challenges faced by teachers in conducting 
inquiry learning? Discuss with your tutor and coursemates. 
TYPES OF INQUIRY LEARNING 
5.2 
Alan Colburn, in An Inquiry Primer, defines inquiry as the creation of a 
classroom where pupils are engaged in essentially open-ended, pupil-centred, 
hands-on activities. 
However, there are other types of inquiry learning, that are structured and 
guided besides being open-ended as mentioned by Colburn. They are classified 
based upon the role of the teacher and students in the inquiry process. The types 
of inquiry learning can be represented in a continuum as shown in Figure 5.3. It 
ranges from teacher-led to student-led processes. The teacher plays a dominant 
role in the structured type but only facilitates learning in the other continuum, 
known as the open type. Students play an active role in open-type inquiry as
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  105 
they will determine the problem and the way to solve it; whereas, they usually 
wait for the teacher to determine what they will learn in a structured type of 
inquiry. Meanwhile, in guided inquiry, the situation is a compromise between 
open and structured inquiry. 
Figure 5.3: Types of inquiry continuum 
There is debate as to which type of inquiry is best. The general consensus is that 
any form of inquiry (structured, guided or open) can be useful to children when 
taught appropriately and well. 
Now let us discuss each type of inquiry on the continuum. 
(a) Structured inquiry 
In this strategy, the teacher has prepared questions as well as procedures 
and materials necessary to complete the inquiry. The teacher leads students 
step-by-step through the scientific process. Students discover relationships 
between variables or generalise from the data collected, which in essence 
leads to the discovery of expected outcomes. Certain topics can only be 
explored through structured inquiry, particularly those that involve 
answering standard-based questions using a method which is not intuitive, 
or which involve the use of specialised instruments. For example: 
(a) Do plants lose water through their leaves? 
(b) What does fire need to burn? 
(c) What is the relationship between inertia and momentum? 
These lessons will familiarise students with the inquiry method and allow 
them to develop scientific processing skills. In other words, structured 
inquiries provide students with common learning experiences that can be 
used in guided or open inquiry.
1 06  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
(b) Guided inquiry 
In this strategy, the teacher poses a question and provides the students only 
with the materials to be used in their investigation. Guided inquiry requires 
students to be familiar with the main steps of scientific inquiry as they then 
need to design the experiment themselves. Examples of questions a teacher 
might ask include: 
(a) What happens to a balloon if it moves from a hot to a cold place? 
(b) What structures must these objects have for them to be stable? 
(c) How will a change in temperature affect the solubility of a solution? 
Another example of guided inquiry could also be getting students to create 
a model. You provide them with the criteria that you want and the students 
have to think critically and creatively in order to best fit your criteria. 
(c) Open inquiry 
This type of inquiry is the opposite of structured inquiry. It requires the 
least amount of teacher intervention and is student-led. Students formulate 
not only their own problem, but also the procedures. Open inquiry is 
analogous to doing science. For example, the teacher might provide 
students with the following objects and ask them to formulate questions 
about the objects: 
(a) Primary coloured paints and materials they can use to mix together; 
(b) A variety of objects that may sink or float at a water table; and 
(c) A bag of marbles with a few marbles of different sizes. 
Since students follow their own paths of questioning, it is more difficult to 
sometime connect it to the topics in the curriculum. In order to ensure 
learning takes place and you can complete the syllabus at the same time, 
you would probably need to consider the following guidelines: 
(a) Provide carefully planned inquiry-based assessments; 
(b) Create well-established classroom rules for interaction and the 
handling of materials; 
(c) Offer guidance to students who show frustration; and 
(d) Prepare guided questions following the activity that tie into 
standards. 
You should start introducing the inquiry approach to your class by first using the 
structured inquiry before the guided, and finally when your students are ready 
you could use the open or free inquiry (Figure 5.4). Just like going up the stairs
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  107 
step by step, you only proceed to the next step when your students are ready. 
Teachers and students may need more practice to get comfortable with the 
learning experience that require less guidance and teacher intervention. 
Figure 5.4: Stages of inquiry learning 
SELF-CHECK 5.4 
Construct a graphic organiser to differentiate among structured, 
guided and open inquiry. Compare yours with your coursemates. 
ACTIVITY 5.4 
This website below can provide you with many examples of a science 
lesson using the structured, guided or open inquiry learning: 
http://www.justsciencenow.com/inquiry/index.htm 
Choose one and present it in the next tutorial.
1 08  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
CONDITIONS FOR INQUIRY LEARNING 
5.3 
Can you now picture the differences between traditional learning and inquiry 
learning? In inquiry learning , the students will be actively involved doing 
hands-on activities, asking questions and busily interacting with each other. In 
order for the lesson to run smoothly, there are conditions that need to be met. 
Moll (2005) suggests that the keys to a good inquiry-based activity are as follows: 
(a) Hands-on with simple materials; 
(b) Pairs or small groups; 
(c) Questioning checkpoints for longer activities; 
(d) Well-structured handouts with lots of place for students to write their 
answers; 
(e) Lots of questions asking students to describe their observations in their 
own words; 
(f) Answer questions with questions (point out things that do not make sense, 
try to identify misconceptions, ask whether each observation fits their 
theory), try not to tell them anything; 
(g) Flexible, allowing students to investigate things they are interested in, even 
if it strays from the worksheets or topic; 
(h) Lots of time; and 
(i) Aim to convey scientific concepts (the big picture) and not details. 
Meanwhile, Schuman proposes six rules that teachers need to consider in 
successful inquiry teaching and learning. The six procedures are as shown in 
Table 5.1.
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  109 
Table 5.1: Conditions for Inquiry Teaching 
Rule Procedure 
Questions Students must ask questions that are phrased in such a way 
that they can only be answered by Yes or No. This is to 
ensure that the teacher is not giving out the answer. 
Freedom to ask 
questions 
A student may ask as many questions as desired once the 
teacher begins the class. This encourages the student to use his 
or her previous questions to formulate new ones to pursue a 
reasonable theory. 
Teacher response to 
statements of theory 
When students suggest a theory, the teacher should refrain 
from evaluating it. The teacher might simply record the theory 
or ask a question about the studentÊs theory. 
Testing theories Students should be allowed to test their teories at any time. 
Cooperation Students should be encouraged to work in groups in order to 
confer and discuss their theories. 
Experimenting The teacher should provide materials, texts and reference 
books so that the students can explore their ideas. 
Source: Rashid Johar, Lilia Halim,  Kamisah Othman (2004) 
ACTIVITY 5.5 
Go to this website. Analyse the conditions upon which the lessons are 
conducted: 
http://hea-www.harvard.edu/ECT/threads.html 
Then, discuss with your tutor and coursemates.
1 10  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
QUESTIONING SKILLS FOR INQUIRY 
TEACHING 
5.4 
As mentioned above, inquiry means asking questions. Thus, if your students do 
not know how to ask questions, then the inquiry process will not be effective. If 
you as the teacher do not know how to help your children to develop their 
questioning skills, then you will have problems in carrying out this approach. 
Teachers need to have a clear understanding of the kinds of questions that 
support inquiry learning, and also how to facilitate children's questioning skills. 
In inquiry teaching, skillful questioning allows the teacher to foster high-level 
discussions; either with the whole class, in small groups, or with individual 
children. 
5.4.1 Types of Questions 
Different types of questions accomplish different tasks and help us to build up 
our answers in different ways. One way to classify the type of question is based 
on how open the question is. This can be classified as follows: 
(a) Convergent questions 
This type of question requires „Yes‰ or „No‰ answers. For example, what is 
the shape of this box? Children do not have to think too long. Convergent 
questions focus on specific, teacher acceptable answers, and reinforce the 
„correct‰ answers you may be looking for. 
Use convergent questions to guide the student and to evaluate what he or 
she sees, knows, or feels about the event. Convergent questions help direct 
the studentÊs attention to specific objects or events. They also sharpen the 
studentÊs recall or memory faculties. These questions evaluate the studentÊs 
observational and recall skills, allow you to adjust your teaching to present 
ideas again, or go back to less complicated ideas. 
(b) Divergent questions 
This is an open-ended type of question (Figure 5.5). These questions 
encourage a broad range of diverse responses. It allows different answers 
from your students, invites opinions, thoughts and feelings, and stimulates 
discussion. All these will encourage student participation in the learning 
activities. 
For example, how do you prove your idea? Children need to justify or 
explain their answers. Pursuing studentsÊ divergent questions and 
comments is one of the central elements of inquiry teaching. It not only
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  111 
engages students in classroom discussions, but also allows them to think 
independently, creatively and more critically. It also teaches them to take 
ownership of their own learning, while also feeling a shared responsibility 
for the learning of the entire class. 
Figure 5.5: Divergent questions 
TodayÊs technologically advancing society has complex problems which 
need more than one solution. Therefore, divergent thinking is a particularly 
important skill. Using divergent questioning will broaden and deepen your 
studentsÊ responses and involve them in thinking creatively and critically. 
Divergent questions stimulate students to become better observers and 
organisers of the objects and events you present. Many of these questions 
guide them in discovering things for themselves; help them to see 
interrelationships; and make hypothesis or draw conclusions from the data. 
(c) BloomÊs Taxonomy 
As a teacher, you should be very familiar with BloomÊs taxonomy of asking 
questions (Figure 5.6). The system consists of six levels, which are arranged 
in hierarchical form, moving from the lowest level of cognition to the 
highest level of cognition (or from the least complex to the most complex).
1 12  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
Figure 5.6: BloomÊs Taxonomy 
Source: http://blogs.pupillife.utoronto.ca/deliberatepractice/ 
Each of the levels has its purpose and should be used at different stages of 
the inquiry process. At the beginning of the inquiry process, you should 
probably use higher level questioning so that the inquiry can be 
accomplished. When the students are interpreting the data, you should be 
using knowledge or comprehension questions so that they are more 
focused. At the end of the inquiry process, you should ask evaluative 
questions so that they can reflect on their discoveries. 
Questions should also promote the mental processes involved in inquiry 
learning. These questions would help students develop their scientific 
processing skills. Some examples are shown in Table 5.2.
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  113 
Table 5.2: Examples of Questions to Promote Mental Processes in Inquiry Learning 
Science processing skills Examples of questions 
Observing What are the features of these animals that you can 
observe? 
Classifying What features do these animals have in common? 
Inferring Why do you think the temperature dropped? 
Formulating hypothesis What do you think will happen to the solubility of the salt 
when you heat the solution? 
Experimenting How would you determine the factors affecting the 
period of the pendulum? 
(d) Productive and Unproductive Questions 
In their study, Harlen and Qualter (2004) discussed productive and 
unproductive questions. The latter are questions that are asked when you 
want to know the studentsÊ understanding of facts or reasons where there is 
clearly a right answer. Productive questions are useful in helping them to 
investigate and think. Table 5.3 shows you the productive questions 
introduced by Elstgeest (1985). 
Table 5.3: ElstgeestÊs Types of Productive Questions 
Type Purpose 
Attention-focusing Drawing childrenÊs attention to features that might 
otherwise be missed; for example, Have you noticed?, 
What do you think of that? - are the kinds that children 
often supply for themselves and the teacher may have to 
raise them only if observation is superficial and attention 
fleeting. 
Comparison 
In what ways are these leaves different?, What is the 
same about these two pieces of rocks?  These questions 
draw attention to patterns and lay the foundation for using 
keys and categorising objects and events. 
Measuring and counting 
How much?, How long?  Are particular kinds of 
comparison questions that take observations into the 
quantitative sphere. 
Action 
What happens if you shine the light from a torch on to a 
worm?, What happens when you put an ice cube into 
warm water?, What happens if ?  Are the kinds of 
questions that lead to investigation.
1 14  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
Problem-posing 
Give children a challenge and leave them to work out how 
to meet it. Questions such as Can you find a way to make 
your string telephone sound clearer? and How can you 
make a coloured shadow? require children to have 
experience or knowledge that they can apply in tackling the 
problem. Without such knowledge, the question may not 
even make sense to the children. 
Source: Harlen and Qualter (2004) 
It does not matter what classification of questions you use in conducting the 
inquiry lesson, each type of question has its own purpose. It should be used at 
different points of the inquiry lesson , depending on your purpose or depending 
on the phase of the inquiry cycle. 
SELF-CHECK 5.5 
1. Look at the table below. Identify whether the following 
questions are convergent or divergent. Then, change the 
convergent questions into divergent questions. 
Questions Convergent/Divergent 
1. What do you think I am going to do with this 
material? 
2. What conclusions can you make from the data? 
3. Can anything else be done to improve the 
design? 
4. Is baking powder a producer of gas? 
5. Do you think heat caused the plant to wilt? 
6. What can you tell me about pollution in this 
area from the photograph? 
7. Which of these animals would you like to be 
and why? 
8. Would you say you have sufficient information 
to come to that conclusion? 
9. How can you make the bulb light up with the 
wire, switch and battery? 
10. How would you describe the world during the 
time of the dinosaurs?
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  115 
2. Which of these are good questions for an inquiry lesson? Give 
your reasons. 
(a) How does a siphon work? 
(b) Are all big trees of the same size, shape and age? 
(c) Look at the culture plates. What do you see? 
5.4.2 Ways to Facilitate Questioning from Students 
If you want your students to continue asking questions, you should give them 
feedback. They would want to know if their inquiries are acceptable or logical. 
To respond to their questions effectively, you may find the following guidelines 
useful: 
(a) Wait for children to think and formulate responses 
Researchers have found that you have to wait at least 5 seconds before you 
rephrase the question. This period, called wait-time, is for the students to 
think about the answer. 
(b) Do not interrupt childrenÊs answers 
Sometimes you interrupt because you think you know what the children 
are going to say, or they are not giving you the expected answer. You 
should be patient and listen to their full response before you decide they 
have understood or not. 
(c) Show that you are interested in their answers, whether right or wrong 
You could acknowledge their answers by saying „yes‰, nod your head, use 
facial expressions that show you are listening and interested in their 
answers. 
(d) Develop responses that keep children thinking 
Do not immediately accept an answer from a student. Ask other students to 
give their responses, or ask the same student to elaborate further.
1 16  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
(e) If a student gives an incorrect or weak answer, point out its weakness, but 
ask the student a follow-up question that will lead to the correct or stronger 
answer 
For example, note that the studentÊs answer overlooks the most important 
conclusion of the study you are discussing. Then, ask the same student to 
recall what that conclusion is. If he or she does not recall the conclusion, 
open this question up to the class. 
(f) Give feedback in terms of explicit criteria 
Be clear, specific and personal when giving the feedback. This will help the 
student to continue with that kind of question or answer if it is good, or if it 
isn't improve on it. 
(g) Only give feedback on one aspect of their work at a time 
This will help them to focus on one aspect, improve on it, and move on to 
the next. This is easier than trying to improve on so many aspects at the 
same time. 
Using different kinds of questions to facilitate your studentÊs questioning, needs 
practice and planning. You cannot just enter a classroom without knowing what 
to ask at the beginning, middle and end of the lesson. Remember, practice makes 
perfect! 
ACTIVITY 5.6 
Choose a topic from the curiculum. 
1. Plan a lesson using the inquiry learning method. 
2. Ask a senior colleague to critique your lesson plan. 
3. Replan it.
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  117 
 Inquiry is the process of defining and investigating problems, formulating 
hypotheses, designing experiments, gathering data and drawing conclusions 
about problems. 
 Discovery is the product of the inquiry process. 
 Inquiry is a student-centred approach. 
 DeweyÊs inquiry cycle consists of ask, investigate, create, discuss, and reflect. 
 Marner and Myers' inquiry cycle consists of inquisition, acquisition, 
supposition, implementation, summation and exhibition. 
 The advantages of inquiry learning are: students can develop critical and 
creative thinking; scientific skills; and social and intra-personal skills. 
 Students can also become independent learners as inquiry learning could 
give them the opportunity to develop their self-directed learning skills. This 
is a useful skill if we want students to adopt life-long learning. 
 The three types of inquiry learning are structured, guided and open inquiry. 
 Structured inquiry is the first stage where most of what is needed for the 
inquiry process is prepared by the teacher. 
 Guided inquiry is the intermediate phase where, the teacher poses a question 
and provides the students only with materials to be used in their 
investigation. 
 In open inquiry, students formulate their own problem to solve and 
determine the procedures to inquiry. 
 The questioning skills of the teacher as well as the students are central to 
inquiry learning. 
 Different types of questions should be used at different stages of the inquiry 
process.
1 18  TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 
 Questions can be categorised as convergent and divergent; as six levels of 
cognition in BloomÊs taxonomy; or as productive and non-productive 
questions. 
 Productive questions will enhance inquiry learning. 
BloomÊs taxonomy 
Convergent 
Discovery 
Divergent 
Guided inquiry 
Inquiry cycle 
Inquiry learning 
Open inquiry 
Productive questions 
Structured inquiry 
Asking Questions. (n.d.). Retrieved June 1, 2011, from 
http://www.youthlearn.org/learning/teaching/techniques/asking-questions/ 
asking-questions 
Colburn, A. (2000). An inquiry primer. Science scope. March 2000. Retrieved June 
15, 2011, from http://www.experientiallearning.ucdavis.edu/module2/ 
el2-60-primer.pdf. 
Hackett, J.,  Pratt, H. Teaching science: The inquiry approach. Principal (Reston, 
Va.). 78 no2, p20-2 N '98. Retrieved June 2, 2011, from 
http://www.library.unesco-iicba.org/English/PRIMARY_SCIENCE_ 
SERIES/SCIENCE_PAGES/science_articles/teaching_science_the_inquiry_ 
approach.htm 
Harlen, W.,  Qualter, A. (2004). The teaching of science in primary schools (4th 
ed.). London: David Fulton Publishers. 
Institute for Inquiry. (1995, MarchApril). Inquiry based science: What does it 
look like? Connect Magazine, 13. Retrieved June 12, 2011, from 
http://www.exploratorium.edu/ifi/resources/classroom/inquiry_based.h 
tml 
Martin, D. J. (2006). Elementary science methods: A constructivist approach. 
Methods for constructing understanding. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING  119 
Martin, E. M., Sexton, C., Wagner, K.,  Gerlovich, J. (1994). Teaching science for 
all children. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. 
Moll, R. (2005). Teaching elementary science using inquiry-based or activities. 
Retrieved June 12, 2011, from http://www.ubclts.com/docs/Inquiry- 
Based_Learning.doc. 
Rashid Johar, Lilia Halim,  Kamisah Othman. (2004). SBSC3403 Methodology in 
Teaching Science Module. Kuala Lumpur: UNITEM Sdn. Bhd. 
Retrieved June 2, 2011, from http://hea-www.harvard.edu/ECT/Inquiry/ 
inquiry1text.html. 
Retrieved June 15, 2011, from http://www.justsciencenow.com/inquiry/ 
index.htm 
Retrieved June 2, 2011, from http://teachingcenter.wustl.edu/asking-questions-improve- 
learning 
Skamp, K. (2004). Teaching primary science constructively. Sydney: Pearson.
Topic 
6 
 Constructivism 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Explain the concept of constructivism; 
2. Describe the characteristics of a constructivist classroom; 
3. Discuss the implications of alternative conceptions in the learning of 
science; and 
4. Apply constructivist teaching approaches such as 5-E Learning 
Cycle Model, Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model and 
NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model in the teaching of science. 
 INTRODUCTION 
As a start, let us look at the definition of a student according to this proverb: 
What do you think is the teacherÊs role based on the proverb? Are students seen 
as active or passive learners? 
Based on the proverb, the teacher is not viewed as a transmitter of information 
who just pours knowledge into studentÊs heads, but rather as someone who 
guides students to build their own knowledge. Students are not empty vessels; 
they are learners with prior knowledge who participate and take part actively in 
their own learning. These are the main principles of constructivism.
TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM  121 
Constructivism is an approach to learning in which learners are provided an 
opportunity to construct their own ideas of what is being learnt by building 
internal connections or relationships among the ideas and facts being taught 
(Borich  Tombari, 1997). 
In this topic, you will learn about the meaning of constructivism and the 
characteristics of a constructivist classroom. You will then explore alternative 
conceptions and implications to science learning. You will also learn how you 
can apply constructivist learning approaches such as Learning Cycles Model, 
Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model and NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model in the 
teaching of science. 
ACTIVITY 6.1 
„In the constructivist view, children actively construct knowledge by 
continuously assimilating and accommodating new information.‰ 
What do you understand by this statement? This statement can be 
linked to whose theory? Discuss with your tutor and coursemates. 
WHAT IS CONSTRUCTIVISM? 
6.1 
(Anderson, 1989). 
Constructivism is derived from cognitive psychology. It is based largely on 
PiagetÊs and VygotskyÊs work, both of whom emphasise that cognitive change 
only takes place when previous conceptions go through a process of 
disequilibration when new information is received. Do you remember reading 
about disequilibration and adaptation in Topic 3? You will remember that new 
information has to be either assimilated or accommodated into the existing 
schemata during learning. 
The basic idea of constructivism is that learners are not „„blank slates‰ or „„empty 
cups‰ to be filled with knowledge but that they already have a huge body of 
knowledge and experience. This means there is already existing schema in their 
minds. Since knowledge is a structured network rather than a disconnected 
bundle of facts, new knowledge has to be built on the foundation of existing 
knowledge and integrated with it either through assimilation or accommodation. 
In constructivism, learners construct knowledge for themselves as shown in 
Figure 6.1. This means that teachers cannot simply „pour‰ knowledge into 
studentsÊ heads. Students need to construct knowledge in their own minds. The
1 22  TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 
constructivist learners are active creators of their own knowledge. What does 
this mean to you as a science teacher? 
Figure 6.1: Constructivist view of learning 
Source: http://syifadanmpt1393.wordpress.com/page/3/) 
ACTIVITY 6.2 
1. Define constructivism in your own words. 
2. Discuss with your tutor and coursemates why there is a change 
of emphasis to constructivism in the teaching of science.
TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM  123 
6.1.1 Characteristics of a Constructivist Classroom 
How can you practice constructivism in your science classroom? What 
characteristics should your science classroom have? Figure 6.2 shows the main 
characteristics of a constructivist classroom. 
Figure 6.2: Main characteristics of a constructivist classroom 
Study each of the characteristics carefully. Does your science classroom have 
these characteristics? Do the following activities and then continue reading the 
next sections to learn more on how you can practise constructivism in your 
science classroom.
1 24  TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 
ACTIVITY 6.3 
Compare and contrast a traditional science classroom with a 
constructivist science classroom. Present your answer in the form of a 
table. Then, discuss it with your tutor and coursemates. 
SELF-CHECK 6.1 
1. Which of the following statements is correct about 
constructivism? 
(A) Meaning is created by students, not acquired. 
(B) Strategies used include reinforcement and practice. 
(C) Teacher delivers information systematically. 
(D) Students learn basic skills before they move on to more 
complex processes. 
2. In a science classroom, how can the lesson be conducted with a 
constructivist approach? 
(A) By following the curriculum strictly. 
(B) View students as thinkers with ideas about the world. 
(C) Present the curriculum in parts with emphasis on basic 
skills. 
(D) Rely less on experimental data and manipulative materials. 
ALTERNATIVE CONCEPTIONS: SCIENCE 
LEARNING IMPLICATIONS 
6.2 
How do you present a science concept to your students? What do you do if they 
have the wrong concept of science? Figure 6.3 shows some students might have 
misconceptions in primary school might have about science.
TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM  125 
Figure 6.3: Student misconceptions about science 
Source: http://www.peter-ould.net/2011/02/23/what-is-marriage-children/ 
As you can see from the picture above, the children have the wrong idea about 
certain science concepts. These ideas are known as alternative conceptions. What 
do alternative conceptions mean? Let us read the definition of alternative 
conceptions given below: 
Alternative conceptions are „experience-based explanations constructed by a 
learner to make a range of natural phenomena and objects intelligible‰. 
(Wandersee, 1994) 
As you can see, alternative conceptions are ideas learners have constructed for 
themselves based on their experiences to make sense of phenomena around 
them. Sometimes these ideas might be different from scientific concepts and 
principles taught in science instruction as shown in Figure 6.3. Other terms used 
to describe these ideas are alternative frameworks, preconceptions, 
misconceptions or naive conceptions. 
Educational research shows that students enter the classroom with their own 
ideas about concepts the teacher wants them to learn. This is especially so with 
science. In fact, students have had prior experiences about many topics in
1 26  TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 
science. For example, they might have seen the sun „changing‰ its position. 
Based on these experiences they would make conclusions as shown in Figure 6.3. 
Scientists will readily dismiss these misconceptions but that may not be easy for 
young students to do so. Children might prefer these false conceptions over 
scientific knowledge and this can hinder their understanding of accepted 
scientific explanations. It is important that you, as a teacher, are aware of these 
alternative conceptions and take appropriate steps to correct them. 
Misconceptions should not be viewed as wrong as it is natural for children to 
form ideas from their daily experience. This is how they make sense of the world. 
It is your responsibility to work with this existing knowledge and understanding 
and to develop it (Farmery, 2002). 
How can you go about doing this? You need to first identify alternative concepts 
that your students have with regards to the science concepts that you want to 
teach. You can do this through observation or assessment. For example, you can 
give a pre-test, or interview them, or give them a concept mapping exercise or 
give them questionnaires to answer. Once you know your studentsÊ 
misconceptions, you can prepare hands-on activities for students to learn the 
correct concepts. Finally, you can provide exercises in the forms of worksheets or 
quizzes where students can consolidate and apply their new learning. These 
steps are summarised in Figure 6.4.
TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM  127 
Figure 6.4: Steps to correct studentsÊ alternative conceptions 
Adapted from Edwards and Knight, 1994 
ACTIVITY 6.4 
Choose a concept from the primary science curriculum: 
1. Use an appropriate technique to identify your studentsÊ 
alternative conceptions. 
2. Plan an activity you can carry out to correct your studentsÊ 
alternative conceptions.
1 28  TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 
CONSTRUCTIVIST TEACHING APPROACHES 
Looking back at your own style of teaching, do you think you adopt the 
constructivist teaching approaches? Do you know any of the approaches? To 
teach using a constructivist approach, you need to provide opportunities for 
students to explore and involve themselves directly in activities that require them 
to think or reflect. There are many models that have been developed using the 
constructivist approach. Three of the them are: 
(a) 5-E Learning Cycle Model; 
(b) Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model; and 
(c) NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model. 
6.3.1 5-E Learning Cycle Model 
In the 5-E Learning Cycle model, teaching is divided into a sequence of steps or 
phases. This sequence is known as a learning cycle. They are 5 steps/phases in 
5-E Learning Cycle. Further elaboration on the model is shown in Table 6.1. 
Table 6.1: The 5-E Learning Cycle Model 
Phase / Step Aim TeacherÊs Actions 
Step 1: 
ENGAGE 
 Elicit prior knowledge. 
 Motivate. 
 Get attention. 
 Assesses students' prior knowledge. 
 Reads a story, asks questions. 
 Does a demonstration. 
 Shows a video clip. 
Step 2: 
EXPLORE 
 Get students involved 
in the topic. 
 Provide students a 
chance to build their 
own understanding. 
 Gives students time to work with one 
another to explore ideas through 
activities. 
 Act as a facilitator by encouraging, 
listening, observing and questioning 
students. 
Step 3: 
EXPLAIN 
 Provide students with 
an opportunity to 
communicate what 
they have learnt and 
explain their ideas. 
 Teaches students to construct 
explanations of the concepts they are 
exploring. 
 Clarifies students' understanding of 
concepts and helps them to develop 
skills. 
6.3
TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM  129 
Step 4: 
ELABORATE 
 Allow students to use 
their new knowledge 
and continue to 
explore. 
 Help students to apply what they 
have learned to a new situation. 
 Help students to extend what they 
have learned. 
Step 5: 
EVALUATE 
 Determine how much 
learning and 
understanding has 
taken place. 
 Assesses the students' understanding 
of the concept by observing and 
asking them open-ended questions. 
 Also uses journals, drawings, 
models, projects, portfolios and other 
performance tasks to evaluate 
students. 
Adapted from Trowbridge, L. W., Bybee, R. W.,  Powell, J. C. (2000) 
ACTIVITY 6.5 
1. Choose a topic from the primary science curriculum. Plan 
appropriate activities for each phase of the 5-E Learning Cycle 
Model. 
2. Then, carry out the lesson in your class. Discuss the effectiveness 
of your lesson with your coursemates during the tutorial session. 
6.3.2 Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model 
The Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model is another constructivist approach 
which can be used in the teaching of science. It is good if this approach can be 
accompanied by demonstration as it is suitable in teaching about the physical 
and material world in the science curriculum.
1 30  TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 
Figure 6.5: Demonstration to show heating causes expansion of gases 
Source: http://www.online.bcelearner.ca/login/index.php 
For example, you could show the apparatus in Figure 6.5 to your students first 
and ask them to predict what will happen if hot water is poured into the pan. 
After students have made their predictions, you carry out the demonstration by 
firstly pouring hot water into the pan. Students are asked to observe and write 
down the results of the demonstration. Finally, the students are asked to compare 
their initial predictions with what they see in their observations. These steps are 
summarised in Table 6.2. 
Table 6.2: The Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Learning Model 
Step Details 
Step 1: 
PREDICT 
 Ask the students to predict the outcome of an experiment. 
Step 2: 
OBSERVE 
 Carry out the demonstration. 
 Ask students to write down what they see. 
Step 3: 
EXPLAIN 
 Ask students to rectify their explanation if their prediction is 
different from their observation. 
 After students have written their explanations on paper, ask 
them to discuss their ideas with the class.
TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM  131 
1. Prepare an appropriate activity to teach any science concept 
from the primary science curriculum using the Predict-Observe- 
Explain (POE) Model. 
2. Carry out the activity in your classroom. Discuss the 
effectiveness of your activity with your coursemates. 
6.3.3 Needham's Five Phase Model 
NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model is another important constructivist approach. It is 
shown in Table 6.3. 
Table 6.3: Needham's Five Phase Model 
Phase Aim Activities 
Orientation Teacher tries to stimulate 
studentsÊ interest. 
Laboratory practical work, 
solving problem, demonstration, 
film clips, video, newspaper 
articles. 
Elicitation of 
ideas 
Teacher finds out studentsÊ 
prior knowledge and 
determine whether there are 
any misconceptions there . 
Practical, group discussion, 
concept map, report. 
Restructuring 
of ideas 
Teacher carries out activities to 
help students correct their 
misconceptions and learn new 
concepts. 
Discussion, reading, teacherÊs 
input, practical work, project, 
experiment, demonstration. 
Application of 
ideas 
Teacher gives student the 
opportunity to use their 
developed ideas in a variety of 
situations, both familiar and 
different. 
Application in similar situations 
such as in daily life, solving 
problems, writing project reports. 
Reflection Teacher asks students to reflect 
on their ideas which might 
have changed from the 
beginning of the lesson with 
that at the end of it. 
Writing of reflective journals, 
self-reflection, group discussion 
of outcomes of lesson. 
ACTIVITY 6.6
1 32  TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 
Constructivism is a theory in which individuals construct knowledge through 
experience, and prior knowledge. It requires hands-on learning. Teachers and 
students need to play active roles in the teaching learning process. The 
constructivist approach to learning takes into consideration ideas that children 
have so that suitable activities can be prepared to correct their alternative 
conceptions. 
SELF-CHECK 6.2 
1. What do you understand about constructivism? 
2. List the characteristics of constructivist learning. 
3. Discuss two benefits of constructivism. 
4. Discuss the roles of the teacher and student in constructivist 
learning. 
5. Explain why the 5-E Learning Cycle Model, Predict, Observe and 
Explain (POE) Model and NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model are 
known as constructivist models. 
ACTIVITY 6.7 
Study NeedhamÊs Five Phase Constructivist Model carefully. Then 
choose a topic from the primary science curriculum and plan a lesson 
using NeedhamÊs Model. Carry out your lesson. Write a brief report of 
your lesson.
TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM  133 
 Constructivism is a theory in which individuals construct knowledge 
through participation experience, and prior knowledge. 
 Students are not empty vessels. They have prior knowledge and can 
participate and take part actively in their own learning. The teacherÊs role is 
that of a facilitator. 
 The main characteristics of a constructivist classroom are as follows: it is 
student centred and the teacher acts as a facilitator. There is cognitive 
exploration through suitable activities. Students have autonomy that is they 
are in charge of their own learning. There are discussion of ideas that allow 
students to interact with one another. 
 Alternative conceptions are ideas learners have constructed by themselves 
based on their experiences, that is, in their effort to make sense of the 
phenomena around them. Sometimes these ideas might be different those of 
from scientific concepts and principles taught in science class. 
 Students do not easily get rid of their beliefs and might choose alternative 
conceptions over scientific knowledge. This can affect their understanding of 
the latter. 
 It is important for teachers to be are aware of alternative conceptions and take 
appropriate steps to correct them. 
 Models which make use of constructivist approach are the 5-E Learning Cycle 
Model, the Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model and NeedhamÊs Five Phase 
Model. 
 There are 5 steps/phases in 5-E Learning Cycle. They are engage, explore, 
explain, elaborate and evaluate. Each phase has a specific function. 
 The Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) requires students to first predict, then 
observe demonstrations and then explain the differences in the prediction 
and actual occurences. 
 There are also 5 phases in NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model. They are 
orientation, the elicitation/generation of ideas, restructuring of ideas, 
application of ideas and reflection.
1 34  TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 
5-E Learning Cycle Model 
Alternative Conceptions 
Cognitive Exploration 
Constructivism 
Hands-on Activities 
Minds-on Activities 
Misconceptions 
Naive Conceptions 
NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model 
Preconceptions 
Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model 
Student Autonomy 
Student-centred 
Anderson, L. M. (1989). Learners and learning. Slavin, R. E. (1994). Educational 
Psychology. Pg 48. (1994). Massachusetts. Allyn and Bacon. 
Borich, G. D.,  Tombari, M. L. (1997). Educational psychology: A contemporary 
approach. New York: Allyn  Bacon. 
Esler, W. K.,  Esler, M. K. (2001). Teaching elementary science (8th ed.). 
Washington: Wadsworth Publishing Company. 
Farmery, C. (2002). Teaching science 3-11. The essential guide. Great Britain: 
Biddles Ltd, Guildford, and KingÊs Lynn. 
Martin, R., Sexton, C.,  Gerlovich, J. (2002). Teaching science for all children- 
Methods for constructing understanding. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. 
Retrieved 27 June 2011 http://enhancinged.wgbh.org/research/eeeee.html 
Retrieved 27 June 2011 http://www.palmbeachschools.org/qa/documents/ 
Handout3-5EModelofInstruction.pdf 
Retrieved 28 June 2011 http://arb.nzcer.org.nz/strategies/poe.php 
Retrieved 29 June 2011 http://digitalcommons.unl.edu/cgi/viewcontent.cgi? 
article=1019context=teachlearnfacpub 
Retrieved 29 June 2011-06-29 http://www.apa.org/education/k12/alternative-conceptions. 
aspx 
Skamp, K. (2004). Teaching primary science constructively. Southbank, Victoria: 
Harcourt Brace.
TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM  135 
Trowbridge, L. W., Bybee, R. W.,  Powell, J. C. (2000). Teaching secondary 
school science strategies for developing scientific literacy. New Jersey: 
Prentice Hall.
Topic 
7 
 Teaching 
Approaches in 
Science 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Desribe the science, technology and society approach in teaching 
science; 
2. Describe the contextual approach in teaching science; and 
3. Describe the problem-based teaching approach in science. 
 INTRODUCTION 
Do you still remember teacher Areena in Topic 5? She was very happy when she 
found out that most of her students understood the concepts that she has taught 
them. So she decided to use the same approach on another class. However this 
time when she assessed the students' understanding, she found only a few could 
understand the concepts taught. She wondered why. She asked her students for 
feedback and later talked to her colleagues about it. 
What do you think she should do next? 
Probably she should explore other teaching approaches that are suitable for this 
particular group of students. Some of them need to see the relationship between 
new information and experiences that they already have, or with other 
knowledge they have already mastered in order to understand the new
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  137 
knowledge. Students' interest and motivation could also be increased as they 
could see how those concepts can be used outside the classroom, in their 
workplace and within the larger society in which they live and work. 
This is the essence of contextual approach of teaching and learning science. In 
this topic, we will be discussing three approaches for teaching science: 
(a) Contextual approach; 
(b) Science, technology and society approach; and 
(c) Problem-based learning approach. 
All these approaches have their own unique characteristics that would suit 
certain group of students or for teaching certain science topics. Science, 
technology and society approach looks at the application of scientific knowledge 
in everyday life and the impact of technology upon mankind and environment. 
The main focus of contextual approach is looking at how to relate scientific 
knowledge and skills to daily life events so that the students can see the reason 
why they need to learn them. On the other hand, in problem-based learning, 
students are made to engage in solving problems in the society. 
All three teaching approaches have common characteristics i.e. they use 
interdisciplinary approaches and discuss real-world or authentic problems. 
ACTIVITY 7.1 
Use KWL (Know, Want, Learn) chart, list what you know and want to 
learn about the three approaches of teaching science. 
SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY AND SOCIETY 
APPROACH 
7.1 
According to Yager (1996), most people think of science as the subject studied in 
science classes, that is, the science that they report as not too useful, or not 
particularly valuable, or not useful to their daily life. Yet, the same people also 
feel that the subject of science taught in schools is valuable for their children. 
Why do these people have conflicting ideas about the learning of science? The 
reason could be because, those days, they could not determine the usefulness of 
science. They only view science as the mastery of certain concepts about the 
natural world.
1 38  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
A new approach is needed to teach science if we want to change the views of 
these people. One approach suggested by educational reformers is the science, 
technology and society (STS) approach. 
7.1.1 Concept of STS 
There is no clear definition of STS (Aldridge, 1992). To him, STS is „.. a new 
approach to teaching science...where technology provides a tie to current 
problems...‰. STS involves „real-life situations...making decisions in society...‰ 
and „such personal concerns as nutrition, health, safety, and maintanance of the 
environment.‰ „ STS aims to integrate science with technology.‰ 
Science, technology and society is the study of how social, political and cultural 
values affect scientific research and technological innovation; and how these in 
turn affect society, politics, and culture (Figure 7.1). STS means focusing on 
personal needs of students - that is, teaching students science concepts and 
process skills that are useful in their daily lives. It also focuses on societal issues, 
that is, issues and problems at home, school, and the community as well as 
universal problems that concern all man kind. STS also means focusing on the 
occupations and careers that are known today; it means using human resources 
in identifying and resolving local issues (Yager, 1996). 
Figure 7.1: The essence of STS education 
Source: http://www.usask.ca/education/people/aikenhead/sts05.htm
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  139 
This approach aims to teach science and technology to society in an integrated 
manner as science and technology will shape society, and society will shape 
science and technology. In order to do this, the teaching should use 
multidisciplinary approaches  meaning that, to explore and understand the 
impact of science and technology upon a society, we need to use knowledge and 
skills from other disciplines other than just science. STS explores a variety of 
problems including the relationships between scientific and technological 
innovations, and the directions and risks of science and technology and their 
effects on society. 
ACTIVITY 7.2 
Read the definition of STS by Aldridge again and think about it. Then, 
write your definition of STS. 
7.1.2 Background of STS Approach 
The STS movement began in several European countries. There were also 
domestic attempts to institute an STS-like curriculum, in the University of Iowa 
Laboratory School during the early 1960s (Yager, 1990). According to Yager, the 
effort in the United States was finally given an added emphasis in the early 1980s 
in order to address the concern for science education and strive for academic 
excellence. The issue was to create a science programme that would involve all 
students  not just the one or two percent who would eventually study science at 
tertiary level. 
The idea behind the STS programme was to provide a real-world connection 
between the classroom and society for the students. The process should give the 
students practice in identifying potential problems, collecting data with regard to 
the problems, considering alternative solutions, and considering the 
consequences based on particular decisions (Yager, 1990). 
The STS approach views science subjects in schools in a much broader sense than 
does the typical discipline-centred, textbook-driven science course. Zoller (1992), 
describes the need for all students to be informed of the content and processes in 
science, but with the understanding that science and society have an impact on 
each other.
1 40  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
7.1.3 Characteristics of STS Approach 
Having read about the concept and background of the STS approach, we shall 
now proceed to look at its characteristics. Brunkhorst and Yager (1990), examined 
a number of exemplary STS programmes, and found that most have the 
following characteristics: 
(a) They emphasise scientific knowledge for all students; 
(b) They emphasise higher order thinking skills across content areas; 
(c) They are interdisciplinary in nature; 
(d) They are hands-on and student-centred programmes that require students 
to use their mental faculties; 
(e) They include student action plans, projects, field experiences and field 
research; 
(f) They utilise many outside resources; 
(g) They tie STS issues to the traditional content of the course; 
(h) Evaluation is structured very differently; 
(i) Evaluation includes awareness and reasoning components; 
(j) In many cases, there is no attempt to use typical tests; instead, tests are 
designed to assess a variety of domains; and 
(k) When standardised tests and/or textbooks are used, students do well (if 
not better) than students in typical science courses. 
Do you realise that these characteristics point towards achieving the current 
notion of what constitutes scientific literacy  using science in making 
responsible decision about societal issues? 
Aikenhead (1994) in his paper entitled ÂConsequences to Learning Science 
Through STS: A Research PerspectiveÊ concluded that: 
(a) Students in STS classes (compared to those in traditional science classes) 
significantly improved their understanding of (i) the social issues involving 
science, and (ii) how science, technology and society interact with one 
another; depending on what content is emphasised and evaluated by the 
teacher; 
(b) Students in STS classes significantly improved their attitudes towards 
science, science classes and learning, resulting from STS content and STS 
teaching methods;
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  141 
(c) Students in STS classes not only make modest but significant gains in the 
way they think, such as applying scientific knowledge to everyday 
situations. They also developed critical and creative thinking and decision 
making, as long as these skills are explicitly practised and evaluated; 
(d) StudentsÊ achievement on traditional subject matter at the next level of 
science education (at a higher grade level or at university) will not be 
significantly compromised by teaching science through STS. This result is 
particularly true only for more academically talented students; 
(e) Students can benefit from studying science through an STS approach, 
provided that: 
(i) The instruction is at least category 3-type or higher (refer to Table 5.1 
in Topic 5); 
(ii) Appropriate classroom materials are available; and 
(iii) A teacher's orientation toward science instruction is in reasonable 
synchrony with the STS approach expected to be used. 
The following are examples of issues that can be discused using the science, 
technology and society approach: 
(a) Globally, energy use is on the rise, and energy in any form is being sought 
after like never before. Yet, some types of energy are far more difficult to 
find than others. This could easily include science concepts like the 
different forms of energy, renewable and non-renewable energy, and how 
energy is used in our modern world. 
(b) In the year 2000, 50% of the global population lived in cities. By 2025, the 
world's city dwellers are expected to reach 5 billion, i.e. over 70% increase 
of the present global population. The basic concepts discussed would be 
population growth and how it affect environment. 
(c) Human-induced climate change, which we are already experiencing, is 
confronting civilisation with challenging problems for the science, 
engineering, and political institutions to collaboratively solve. 
(d) Safe food and clean water are becoming ever more difficult to obtain, 
particularly in many poorer parts of the world. 
(e) Doctors and medical specialists are developing new techniques in 
biological processes, yet many of these promising solutions pose social and 
ethical problems that have never been faced before.
1 42  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
In conclusion, STS approach is the involvement of learners in experiences and 
issues which are directly related to their lives. As such this approach provides 
students with the skills which allow them to become active and responsible 
citizens. Eventually, they will become scientifically literate citizens. 
ACTIVITY 7.3 
1. List a few examples of issues that can be used in science lesson 
using the STS approach. 
2. Discuss some challenges that a teacher may encounter using the 
STS approach. 
CONTEXTUAL APPROACH IN TEACHING 
AND LEARNING OF SCIENCE 
7.2 
Why do I need to learn about force, human anatomy or the characteristics of 
hydrogen gas? These are questions that some students usually ask. In contextual 
approach of teaching, the teacher may ask, „How can I communicate effectively 
with students who wonder about the reasons for, the meaning of, and the 
relevance of what they study?‰ and „How can we open the minds of a diverse 
student population so they can learn concepts and techniques that will open 
doors of opportunity for them throughout their lives?‰. These are among the 
daily concerns of a science teacher. The answer to this problem lies in a 
curriculum and an instructional approach based on contextual learning. 
To break it down simply, contextual teaching and learning (CTL) approach 
relates to what is being taught in the context of the real world, with the hope to 
engage the students in interactions to eliminate the question Why do I need to 
learn this stuff?.
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  143 
7.2.1 Definitions and Concepts of CTL Approach 
The contextual approach recognises that learning is a complex and multifaceted 
process that goes far beyond drill-oriented, stimulus-and-response 
methodologies. 
According to contextual learning theory, learning occurs only when students 
process new information or knowledge in such a way that it makes sense to them 
in their own frames of reference (their own inner worlds of memory, experiences 
and responses). This approach to learning and teaching assumes that the mind 
naturally seeks meaning in context, that is, in relation to a person's current 
environment, and that it does so by searching for relationships that make sense 
and appear useful to that person. 
Building upon this understanding, contextual learning theory focuses on the 
multiple aspects of any learning environment, whether a classroom, a laboratory, 
a computer lab, a worksite or even a vegetable garden. It encourages educators to 
choose and design learning environments that incorporate as many different 
forms of experience as possible  social, cultural, physical and psychological  in 
working towards the desired learning outcomes. 
In such an environment, students discover meaningful relationships between 
abstract ideas and practical applications in the context of the real world; concepts 
are internalised through the process of discovering, reinforcing, and relating. For 
example, a physics class studying thermal conductivity might measure how the 
quality and amount of building insulation material affect the amount of energy 
required to keep the building heated or cooled. Meanwhile, in a biology or 
chemistry class students might learn basic scientific concepts by studying the 
spread of AIDS or the ways in which farmers suffer from and contribute to 
environmental degradation (CORD, 1996, p.1). 
During the late Â70s and the early Â80s, reports and discussion documents of the 
UK government advocated the need for broad and balanced science for all. This 
stimulated change and development of science curriculum education in the UK 
(Yam, n.d). Among the issues that were proposed to be addressed include the 
following: 
(a) Scientific literacy; 
(b) Public understanding of science; and 
(c) Decreasing number of students who want to take up science at A-levels. 
During the Â80s in the US, the concern of lowering high school achievements, lack 
of standards in students' performance and the mismatch between high school
1 44  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
education and work sparked efforts to encourage educational reforms to facilitate 
students' transition from the school to the working world and real life. 
Seen in this context, CTL motivates more students to study science as it provides 
an authentic picture of science, and plays a role in peopleÊs lives. When students 
see the connection of what they learnt in the science classroom and the world, 
they will find learning meaningful as they see that what they learnt makes them 
understand more of the things and phenomena around them. 
Lubben et al.(2005) observes that contextualised lessons allow students to: 
(a) Work on personally useful applications of science; 
(b) Participate in the lesson activities by contributing their expertise and 
knowledge; and 
(c) Discuss contentious issues. 
There are many definitions of the so called contextual learning. A narrow 
perspective of context would be to focus on an application of a principle or 
theory for the purpose of teaching a concept. For example, if you are teaching the 
different types of electrical circuits, then you would discuss examples of series 
and parallel circuits found in a house, in a toy or in a car. If this is contextual 
learning, then this has been done by almost all science teachers. However, 
sometimes introducing an application of a scientific principle or concept after 
teaching the theory may not be an effective strategy for all students. They may 
feel lost due to the abstract information they have to digest resulting in 
disinterest in the subject before they get to the point where the real-life 
application is introduced and explained. 
The broader perspective of a contextual approach adopts a constructivist model 
where the context is the central tenet of the discussion. Context is central to student 
learning, not an analytically separate entity or a backdrop to student learning. 
According to Berns and Erickson (2001), „contextual teaching and learning helps 
students connect the content they are learning to life context in which that 
content could be used. Students then find meaning in the learning process. As 
they strive to attain learning goals, they draw upon their previous experiences 
and build upon existing knowledge. By learning subjects in an integrated, 
multidisciplinary manner and in appropriate contexts, they are able to use the 
acquired knowledge and skills in applicable contexts‰. 
In 1998, the Technical Education Department of Malaysia in its strategic plan of 
action introduced a contextual approach of teaching science in technical schools 
throughout the country (Nafisah Kamariah Md Kamaruddin  Zulkarnain Md
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  145 
Amin). This plan was in view of the prospective marketability of the school leavers 
upon completion of secondary school education. Previously, skilled craftsman and 
apprentices performed tasks manually with their bare hands and basic traditional 
tools, but now all that have changed drastically with the introduction of technology 
influencing the workplace. Malaysia, like other developing countries in the world, 
has been under pressure from individuals, community and various levels of 
educational institutions to turn out not only students who are academically 
knowledgeable, but also those who can apply this knowledge contextually. We may 
have advanced in science and technology, but the school of thought that educators 
still uphold is to disseminate knowledge and skills, which in current times, does not 
serve the demands and needs of the ever-changing society. 
The definition of CTL that the Technical Education Department Malaysia uses is 
the one that was given by the Centre for Occupational Research and 
Development (First Malaysian Tech Prep National Convention, 1997) which is 
learning that incorporates examples drawn from everyday experiences in the 
personal, societal and occupational life and which also provides concrete hands-on 
applications of material to be learned. Contextual Approach was introduced 
for the studentsÊ technical and career preparation or Tech Prep by the Centre for 
Occupational Research and Development, Texas, USA. 
SELF-CHECK 7.1 
Which statements are true about contextual learning? Mark True (T) or 
False (F) in the column below. 
Statement T/F 
Contextual learning theory focuses on the multiple aspects of any 
learning environment. 
Contextual learning relates what is being taught with the context 
of the real world. 
Most teachers claim that the contextual approach is adopted to 
make the learning process interesting. 
Students discover meaningful relationships between abstract 
ideas and practical applications in the context of the real world. 
Contextual learning can only be used in teaching applied science 
content.
1 46  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
7.2.2 CTL Forms of Learning 
There are five essential forms of learning in contextual learning which are shown 
in Figure 7.2. 
Figure 7.2: Five essentials of learning 
Source: http://www.cord.org/the-react-learning-strategy/ 
Let us read the elaboration on each form further: 
(a) Relating 
Here, the teacher encourages students to relate what they learn in the 
classroom to real-life experiences. In traditional teaching of science, what 
they learn in the science classroom or laboratory stays in those rooms. The 
content of science is treated in isolation of what is happening in the real 
world. As such, students are not quite sure how science fits into their social 
roles or responsibilities. Under ideal conditions, teachers might simply lead 
students from one community-based activity to another, encouraging them 
to relate what they are learning to real-life experience. Thus, you must use 
everyday sights, events and conditions as a starting point before 
introducing new information or solving problems. As such, you are relating 
learning in the context of life experiences. What is learned will stay with the 
students much longer, and the impact of the subject material will be 
stronger. The learning will be much more focused and helpful to the 
students. They will really care and really want to be good at what is 
learned. Students will be much more active and self-motivated in the 
learning process.
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  147 
(b) Experiencing 
Experiencing-learning in the context of exploration, discovery and 
invention·is the heart of contextual learning. Students enjoy doing hands-on 
activities as they like to manipulate materials and being able to see for 
themselves rather than being told about the knowledge. In contextual 
academic texts, laboratories are often based on actual workplace tasks. The 
aim is not to train students for specific jobs, but to allow them to experience 
activities that are directly related to real-life work. Many of the activities 
and skills selected for labs are cross-occupational; that is, they are used in a 
broad spectrum of occupations. 
(c) Applying 
In contextual learning courses, applications are often based on occupational 
activities. If they are to get a realistic sense of connection between 
schoolwork and real-life jobs, then the occupational context must be 
brought to them. If we want them to be an engineer, for instance, then we 
must let them see how the knowledge and skills that they learn in the 
classroom are used by engineers. This could be done by letting them have 
firsthand experiences such as having tours to specific sites, mentoring 
arrangement or internship in the workplace. 
(d) Cooperating 
Learning by cooperating is sharing, responding and communicating with 
other learners as a primary instructional strategy in contextual teaching. 
The students need to learn how to work in a team. They need to be able to 
cooperate and be able to communicate effectively so that they will be able 
to function as one of the team members in the workplace later on. In the 
laboratory, they could work in pairs or a group of threes or fours to 
complete the task given to them. 
They would be able to practise communication and social skills and as they 
work in groups when solving a problem or completing the projects. They 
would carry these skills into their daily life and hopefully in their 
workplace later on. In doing so, they would be sought after by many 
employers.
1 48  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
(e) Transferring 
Transferring is when students use knowledge learnt in the science 
classroom in another context. For example, students who have learned 
about ICT skills can use these skills to gather information when they are 
researching a topic or when they are preparing reports or slides for their 
presentation. Later, they could also use these skills in their own chores; for 
example, they could be helping their parent to do online banking 
transactions. 
Transferring also uses and builds upon what the student already know. 
Such an approach is similar to Relating, in that it calls upon the familiar. We 
can help them retain their sense of dignity and develop confidence if we 
make a point of building new learning experiences on what they already 
know. 
Figure 7.3 illustrates the examples of contextual lesson: 
(a) The teacher is discussing the application of microorganism in the 
production of food; 
(b) The teacher is discussing the responsibilities of a microbiology technician, 
an example of a career in the field of microbiology; and 
(c) The teacher is discussing weight gain, a major concern for teenagers.
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  149 
Figure 7.3: Snapshot of lessons
1 50  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
Now, how do you determine if you are using this approach? One way is by 
ensuring whether you are using the following strategies: 
(a) Emphasise problem-solving; 
(b) Recognise the need for teaching and learning to occur in a variety of 
contexts such as home, community and work sites; 
(c) Teach students to monitor and direct their own learning so they become 
self-regulated learners; 
(d) Anchor teaching in students' diverse life-contexts; 
(e) Use teams or interdependent group structures to encourage students to 
learn from each other and together; and 
(f) Employ authentic assessment. 
Trying to draw a conclusion on what contextual teaching and learning approach 
is difficult, if not impossible. However the consensus seems to be that contextual 
teaching and learning approach is an attempt to make the delivery of education 
to be more natural. Natural here means how the brain naturally works when the 
students learn and work in real life by letting them actively participate, 
communicate and work together and learn what others are good at; and to be of 
higher order, including training on problem solving, decision making, creative 
and critical thinking (Yam, n.d). 
In order to make sure the implementation of this approach is sucessful, the 
school must agree on a definition of what learners should learn and what 
strategies support learning. Then, the learning also needs considerable support 
from the school organisation  from the headmaster to non-academic staff and 
the parents as well. Finally, external support provides encouragement and 
resources to help students and educators create high quality teaching and 
learning. 
ACTIVITY 7.4 
1. Take this self-test and see if you are teaching contextually. 
These standards appear to some degree in almost all texts. 
However, contextual instruction is rich in all ten standards. 
1. Are new concepts presented in real-life (outside the 
classroom) situations and experiences that are familiar to 
the student?
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  151 
2. Are the concepts in examples and the student exercises 
presented in the context of their use? 
3. Are new concepts presented in the context of what the 
student already knows? 
4. Do examples and student exercises include many real, 
believable problem-solving situations that they can 
identify with. 
5. Do examples and student exercises evoke their interest. 
6. Do students gather and analyse data in their discovery of 
the important concepts. 
7. Are opportunities presented for students to gather and 
analyse their own data for their enrichment? 
8. Do lessons and activities encourage the student to apply 
concepts and information to useful contexts, projecting the 
student into imagined future undertakings (e.g., possible 
career) and unfamiliar locations (e.g., workplaces). 
9. Do students participate regularly in interactive groups 
where sharing, communicating and responding to 
important concepts and decision making occurs. 
10. Do lessons, exercises and lab sessions improve studentsÊ 
reading and other communication skills in addition to 
scientific reasoning and achievement. 
Source: http://www.scribd.com/doc/51699892/1/The-Contextual-Approach-to- 
Learning 
2. Visit this website: http://www.phy.cuhk.edu.hk/contextual/ 
approach/tem/brief_e.html 
Read and summarise the main issues concerning contextual 
learning.
1 52  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
PROBLEM-BASED LEARNING (PBL) 
7.3 
Another teaching approach that places importance on the connection between 
scientific content and skills in the classroom and the real-world is problem-based 
learning. In doing so, the students can see why they are learning the content of 
science and more importantly they would be applying these content and the 
skills in their daily lives. Thus, the learning would be meaningful and this will 
motivate and increase the interest of students to learn science. 
7.3.1 What is PBL? 
Problem-based learning (PBL) is an approach that challenges students to learn by 
engaging themselves in a real problem. It challenges students to seek solutions to 
authentic (open-ended) problems by themselves or in groups, rather than learn 
primarily through lectures or textbooks. More importantly, PBL engages students 
in developing skills as self-directed learners (Smith, 1995). 
Problems are selected to exploit their natural curiosity by connecting learning to 
students' daily life experiences and emphasising the use of critical and analytical 
thinking skills. It is a format that simultaneously develops both problem solving 
strategies and disciplinary based knowledge and skills. Students are placed in 
the active role of problem-solvers, confronted with an ill-structured situation that 
simulates the kind of problems they are likely to face as future managers in 
complex organisations. PBL believes that when students develop their own 
problem-solving procedures, they are integrating their conceptual knowledge 
with those of their procedural skills (Gallagher,1997). The effectiveness of PBL 
depends on the nature of student engagement and the culture of the classroom, 
as well as the appropriateness of the problem task assigned. 
Since students are actively involved in the learning processes, this approach is an 
example of student-centred learning. „Student-centred‰ refers to learning 
opportunities that are relevant to the students, the goals of which are at least 
partly determined by the students themselves. This does not mean that the 
teacher does nothing and lets them plan and do the learning by themselves. The 
teacher needs to make decisions to determine what might be important for 
students to learn, especially if he or she is teaching in a primary school. 
The context for learning in PBL is highly context-specific. It presents the content 
with a real-world challenge, similar to the one faced by the practitioner of the 
discipline. The classes usually start with the teacher presenting the problem to be 
solved. The „problems‰ in PBL are typically in the form of „cases‰, narratives of 
complex, real-world challenges common to the discipline being studied. There is
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  153 
no right or wrong answer. Instead, there are reasonable solutions based on the 
application of knowledge and skills deemed necessary to address the issue. The 
„solution‰ therefore is not only dependent on the acquisition and comprehension 
of facts, but also based on the ability to think critically and creatively. 
7.3.2 PBL Characteristics 
The characteristics of PBL are as follows: 
(a) Student-centred and experiential 
Select authentic assignments from the discipline, preferably those that 
would be relevant and meaningful to the studentsÊ interests. They are also 
responsible for locating and evaluating various resources in the field. 
(b) Inductive 
Introduce content through the process of problem solving, rather than 
problem solving after introduction to content. The learning of the content 
can be built upon the challenges presented by the problem solving activity 
at the beginning of the lesson. If a case has some relevance to students, then 
they are required to call on what they already know or think they know. By 
focusing on their prior learning, students can test assumptions, prior 
learning strategies and facts. 
(c) Context-specific 
Choose real or contrived cases and determine the kinds of challenges faced 
by practitioners in the field. 
(d) Problems are complex and ambiguous, and require meta-cognition 
Select real-life examples from the discipline that have no simple answers. 
These require students to analyse their own problem solving strategies. 
(e) Creates cognitive conflict 
Select cases with information that makes simple solutions difficult. While 
the solution may address one part of a problem, it may create another 
problem. Challenge students' prior knowledge. 
(f) Collaborative and interdependent 
Have students work in small groups in order to address the presented case. 
Source: http://www.pbl.uci.edu/whatispbl.html
1 54  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
Figure 7.4 illustrates the steps that you can use to plan a problem-based learning 
lesson. You start by presenting the ill-defined problem to the students. 
Greenwald (2000) characterised an ill-defined problem as being unclear and 
raises questions about what is known, what needs to be known, and how the 
answer can be found. Because the problem is unclear, there are many ways to 
solve it, and the solutions are influenced by one's vantage point and experience. 
When the problem is presented, students will then explore and try to understand 
it. They will list facts about the problem that they know. If the students know 
very little about the problem, they will gather information and learn new 
concepts, principles or skills that they need as they engage in the problem-solving 
process. 
Figure 7.4: Steps in problem-based learning 
Source: http://www.ncsu.edu/pbl/design.html
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  155 
The second step is when students need to list what they know to solve the 
problem. This includes both what they actually know and the strengths and 
capabilities that each team member has. Then they will try to rewrite the problem 
in their own words. You should check the original problem presented or they can 
ask you to give feedback as to whether they have understood the problem. This 
is important because if students do not understand the problem, they would not 
be able to solve it. 
The next step would be to think of all the possible solutions. They could then 
arrange them in the order from the strongest to weakest solution and then choose 
the best one, or one that is most likely to succeed. Then they choose one possible 
solution, try it out and then analyse the data collected. If it seems logical, then the 
students have solved the problem. Otherwise they would have to repeat the 
process all over again. Of course, there is no right or wrong answer. What is 
important to stress to your students is to reach the best possible solution 
supported by data. Once the best possible solution has been discovered, the 
students can share the whole process by writing a report or presenting it to the 
class. Sharing the findings with teachers and other students is an opportunity in 
demonstrating what they have learned. 
7.3.3 PBL and Inquiry 
Problem-based learning is the best way for students to learn how to conduct real-life 
science investigations. They apply many strategies they learned in science 
classes, such as asking questions, designing experiments and developing a 
hypothesis based on prior research. Also, students follow the scientific method, 
or a variation, as they conduct their investigation. Solving science problems and 
mysteries provide students with real-world applications of the inquiry-based 
learning. They learn to investigate the same way as scientists. 
When using the scientific method in combination with problem-based learning, 
students develop a better understanding of experimental investigations. The best 
type of investigation for this strategy is called science mysteries. In the 
investigation, students use critical thinking skills as they design and conduct an 
investigation to solve a mystery. They will be provided with a scenario 
surrounding a problem and then will follow the scientific method to solve the 
problem.
1 56  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
The students could follow the following steps to solve a problem (Figure 7.5): 
Figure 7.5: Steps to solve a problem using scientific method 
However, similar to scientific method that is not linear, inquiry-based learning 
allows students to skip any step. In other words, they need not start at step 1, 
then go to step 2, and so on. 
Figure 7.6 illustrates an example of a problem-based lesson in science. In this 
lesson, the students are solving a problem about the owl population which has 
been affected by a change in the environment.
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  157
1 58  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
Figure 7.6: An example of a problem-based lesson 
Source: http://www.sciencesupport.net/pblowl.htm
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  159 
SELF-CHECK 7.2 
Fill the blank spaces with the appropriate words from the list below. 
Authentic learning self-directed 
collaborative learner responsibility 
ACTIVITY 7.5 
The problem statement is very crucial in problem-based learning. 
Study the example given in Figure 7.6. Choose a topic, write an 
authentic or real-world problem that can be used in a problem-based 
lesson.
1 60  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
All the three approaches discusssed use various types of strategies. Most of the 
strategies involve students doing tasks and projects individually or in groups. 
They do not just sit in class and listen to a teacher's presentation. The tasks that 
the students are asked to perform are authentic and require knowledge and 
skills. Thus, the assessment should also be an authentic assessment. This type of 
assessment will be able to evaluate the knowledge, skills and attitudes involved 
in doing the tasks. Students will also be able to assess themselves. Besides, it is a 
way to teach students to monitor and direct their own learning, so those who are 
left behind know that they are behind and lacking in which areas. It is also to 
help them self-regulate their learning as they can benefit from it tremendously in 
different areas and levels of abilities. 
ACTIVITY 7.6 
Based on KWL chart that you used at the beginning of this topic, write 
what you have learnt about the three approaches being discussed. 
 All three teaching approaches  science, technology and society approach, 
contextual approach and problem-based approach are student-centred 
learning. 
 Science, technology and society (STS) has been defined as teaching and 
learning in the context of human experiences. This approach is where 
students would engage with different viewpoints on issues concerning the 
impact of science and technology in everyday life. 
 The students will also understand the relevance of scientific discoveries, 
rather than just concentrate on learning scientific facts and theories that 
seemed distant from their realities. 
 STS approach will develop critical and creative thinking skills and problem 
solving skills. 
 The contextual approach recognises that learning is a complex and 
multifaceted process that goes far beyond drill-oriented, stimulus-and-response 
methodologies
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  161 
 When science is set in context, this is a way to motivate more students to 
study science as it provides an authentic picture of science, and its role in 
peopleÊs lives as science is the study of the natural world. 
 When they see the connection of what they learn in the science classroom and 
the world, the learning will be meaningful. 
 There are five essential forms of learning in contextual learning: relating, 
experiencing, applying, cooperating and transferring. 
 Problem-based learning (PBL) is an approach that challenges students to 
learn through engagement with a real problem. 
 It challenges students to seek solutions to the real-world (open-ended) 
problems by themselves or in groups. 
 PBL characteristics are student-centred and experiential, inductive, builds on 
prior learning, context-specific, problems are complex and ambiguous, and 
require meta-cognition, creates cognitive conflict, and they are collaborative 
and interdependent. 
 Solving science problems and mysteries provide students with real-world 
applications of inquiry-based learning. 
Applying 
Authentic problem 
Contextual approach 
Cooperating 
Experiencing 
Experiential 
Ill-defined problem 
Inductive 
Multi-discipline 
Problem-based learning 
Real-world problem 
Relating 
Science, technology and society 
Self-directed 
Student-centered 
Transferring
1 62  TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 
Aikenhead, G. (1994). What is STS Science Teaching. Retrieved July 10, 2011, 
from http://www.usask.ca/education/people/aikenhead/sts05.htm 
Aikenhead, G. (1994). Consequences to Learning Science Through STS: A 
Research Perspective. Retrieved July 2, 2011, from 
http://www.usask.ca/education/people/aikenhead/sts16.htm 
Aldridge, B. G. (1992). Basic science or STS: Which is better for science learning? 
Improve science education using basic science with application. In 
Handbook of science, technology and society.Arizona State University 
Berns, R. G.,  Erikson, P. (2001). Contextual teaching and learning. The Higlight 
Zone: Research @ Work No. 5. The National Centers for Career and 
Technical Education, USA. 
Brunkhorst, H. K.,  Yager, R. E. (1990). Beneficiaries or victims. School Science 
and Mathematics, 90 (1), 61-69 
CORD. What is Contextual Learning? Retrieved July 7, 2011, from 
http://www.cord.org/contextual-learning-definition/ 
Gallagher, S. A. (1997). Problem-based learning: Where did it come from, what 
does it do, and where is it going? Journal for the Education of the Gifted, 
20(4), 332-362 
Gallow, D. (n.d). What is Problem-Based Learning? Retrieved July 1, 2011, from 
http://www.pbl.uci.edu/whatispbl.html 
Greenwald, N. L. (2000). Learning from problems. The Science Teacher, 67 (4), 28- 
32. 
Lubben, F., Bennett, J., Hogarth, S.,  Robinson, A. (2005). A systematic review of 
the effects of context based and Science-Technology-Society (STS) 
approaches in the teaching of secondary science on boys and girls, and on 
lower ability pupils. In Research Evidence in Education Library. London: 
EPPI-Centre, Social Science Research Unit, Institute of Education, 
University of London. 
Nafisah Kamariah Md Kamaruddin  Zulkarnain Md Amin, (n.d). 
Implementation of Contextual System in Mathematics Course. Retrieved July 
4, 2011, from http://eprints.uthm.edu.my/108/1/nafisah_kamariah.pdf- 
Smith, C. A. (1995). Features section: problem based learning. Biochemistry and 
Molecular Biology Education, 23 (3), 149-152. 
Study Guides and Strategies (n.d). Problem-based Learning. Retrieved June 25, 
2011, from http://www.studygs.net/pbl.htm-
TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE  163 
Teaching Science Contextually: The Cornerstone of Tech Prep3. Retrieved July 2, 
2011, from http://www.scribd.com/doc/51699892/1/The-Contextual- 
Approach-to-Learning. 
TeachNET. What is contextual teaching and learning. Retrieved July 1, 2011, 
from http://www.cew.wisc.edu/teachnet/ctl/ 
Yager, R. E. (1990). The science/technology/society movement in the United 
states: Its origin, evolution, and rationale. Social education, 54 (4), 198-200. 
Yager, R. E.(1996). Science/technology/society. As reform in science education. 
Albany: State University of New York Press. 
Yam, H. ( n.d). What is contextual learning and teaching in physics? Retrieved 
July 10, 2011, from http://www.phy.cuhk.edu.hk/contextual/approach/ 
tem/brief_e.html 
Zoller, U. (1992). The technology/education interface: STES education for all. 
Canadian Journal of Education, 17 (1), 86-91.
Topic 
8 
 Teaching and 
Learning 
Methods 
LEARNING OUTCOMES 
By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 
1. Plan experiments effectively for the teaching and learning of 
scientific concepts; 
2. Describe how you can carry out discussions in your lesson 
effectively; 
3. Discuss how you can use simulations in your teaching; 
4. Describe how you can use projects to teach science; and 
5. Plan and organise visits to external resources effectively in order to 
enrich science learning. 
 INTRODUCTION 
We have now come to the last topic of this module. To begin with, let us look at 
Figure 8.1.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS  165 
Figure 8.1: A classroom scene 
Source: http://edserver1.uow.edu.au/DiveInEduc/contents/student/inschools/ 
malaysia.html 
Figure 8.1 shows a classroom scene where the students are doing their own thing 
and the level of involvement in learning is low. What can you do to make 
students more actively engaged in learning? One of your answers might be to 
use a variety of teaching and learning methods which can stimulate their interest. 
Using different methods of teaching and learning can enhance studentsÊ interest 
in science. Science lessons that are not interesting will not motivate students to 
learn and this will affect their performance. 
This topic will enable you to explore teaching and learning methods such as 
experiments, discussions, simulations, projects and visits and see how they can 
be used to enhance learning of science. Each of these methods will be discussed 
in terms of its general concepts and how they can effectively be used in the 
teaching and learning of science.
1 66  TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
ACTIVITY 8.1 
1. What do you understand by the term „teaching methods‰? 
2. Can you think of some teaching methods that you can use for 
your science lessons? Discuss with your coursemates. 
EXPERIMENTS 
8.1 
Children in primary school learn best through firsthand experiences. Thus, 
experiments play a central role in learning of science. What is an experiment? For 
an example, have you ever wondered whether brown sugar or white sugar 
dissolves more quickly in water? You might say white sugar but this is only a 
prediction which you have made based on your previous experience  this is 
how a hypothesis is formed. 
An experiment are (Merriam-Webster dictionary, 2003.): 
(a) A tentative procedure or policy. 
(b) An operation or procedure carried out under controlled conditions in order 
to discover an unknown effect or law, to test or establish a hypothesis, or to 
illustrate a known law. 
A hypothesis can be defined as tentative answers or untried solutions to the 
question or problem that is being investigated. For example, „White sugar will 
dissolve more quickly than brown sugar‰. A fair test of this is an experiment. A 
fair test is one in which only one variable is changed and all other variables are 
kept constant. 
Now, what are variables? Variables are factors in an experiment which can 
change its outcome. In an experiment, you have to determine the variables 
involved. This simply means taking all the factors of the experiment into account. 
There are three kinds of variables as shown in Table 8.1.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS  167 
Table 8.1: Variables of an Experiment 
Variable Meaning Example 
Manipulated Variable 
Something that is changed 
„What shall we change?‰ 
in the experiment. 
Type of sugar 
Responding Variable 
„What are we trying to find 
out?‰ 
Something that responds to 
the manipulated variable. 
Time taken to dissolve 
Constant variable 
„What shall we keep the 
same?Ê 
Something that is kept the 
same throughout the 
experiment. 
Volume/Temperature 
of water 
So, what do you think are the variables involved in the sugar experiment? First, 
look at what you are testing. Yes, it is a type of sugar (brown or white) which can 
dissolve quickly in water. This is known as manipulated variable. How are you 
checking to see (evaluating) what happens? You will observe the time taken for 
each type of sugar to dissolve. This is known as responding variable. At the same 
time, you will keep all other variables constant. In this case, the constant 
variables are the volume of water you use and the temperature of the water. 
As you can see, an experimental procedure requires a high degree of logical 
thinking, or according to Piaget „„formal thinking‰. Thus, it is not advisable to 
introduce the term „hypothesis‰ and „variables‰ to lower primary school 
students (Lind, 2005). However, the concept of a fair experiment can be easily 
understood by young children by getting them to think about variables with 
questions like „What are we trying to find out?‰, „What shall we change?‰ and 
„What shall we keep the same? 
Remember to provide your students with an opportunity to design their own 
experiments (see Figure 8.2). This is to prevent experiments from becoming 
„recipes‰ that are mindlessly carried out by student. Have a discussion with 
them to determine the hypothesis and variables involved. Let your students plan 
the experiments. Allow them to measure and analyse data, and eventually 
present the results of their own experiment themselves. You should take up the 
role of a facilitator and not as an information provider.
1 68  TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
Figure 8.2: Students should have an opportunity to design their own experiments 
Source: http://games.pppst.com/science.html 
8.1.1 Discussion of Experimental Results 
After the students have carried out the experiment, they need to discuss the 
results and form a conclusion. Discussion of results should be carried out by the 
students under your guidance. This involves two procedures: data processing 
and information reporting techniques. Conducting both these procedures 
properly brings about meaningful learning. 
Let us look at the details of data processing and information reporting 
techniques: 
(a) Data processing 
(i) Representing the data in various formats such as tables, charts and 
graphs. An example of how data can be presented in a table form is as 
shown in Table 8.2. 
(ii) Interpreting graphs and charts. 
(iii) Identifying the pattern of data and its relationship. 
(iv) Classifying the data.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS  169 
Table 8.2: An Example of a Table to Represent Data 
My results table. 
Brown Sugar White sugar 
Time taken to 
dissolve 
I found out that: _____________________________________________________ 
(b) Information reporting techniques 
(i) Interpreting the relationship among the results, hypothesis and 
prediction. 
(ii) Explaining the results. 
(iii) Making the report orally or in writing. 
(iv) Suggesting ways to improve or improvise the experiment or to 
conduct further experiments. 
During the discussion, you need to act as a facilitator and ensure that your 
students are actively involved. You will need to reinforce important concepts and 
facts and correct studentsÊ mistakes. It is important for you to show attention and 
appreciation for each of the ideas expressed by your students. At the end of the 
discussion, remember to summarise all ideas generated during the discussion. In 
this way, you will ensure that the experiment is meaningful to your students. 
SELF-CHECK 8.1 
Your students want to know if different types of surfaces like glass and 
sand paper will affect the distance a trolley moves. 
1. State an appropriate hypothesis for this experiment. 
2. Identify the manipulated, responding and constant variables. 
3. How would you present the data collected?
1 70  TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
ACTIVITY 8.2 
Julia loves roses and has decided to grow them in her garden. She wants 
to know whether she is wasting money buying an expensive fertiliser 
when many cheaper brands are available in the market. She wonders if 
the expensive fertiliser will make her rose plants grow more healthy than 
before. 
How would you advise her to find out if the expensive fertiliser is better? 
DISCUSSION 
8.2 
A discussion is an activity in which students exchange questions and opinions on 
a given topic and is an excellent way to engage students in thinking and 
analysing. It provides students with a clearer and in-depth understanding of 
scientific concepts. They will also be able to form opinions and attitudes about 
issues that are discussed. Discussions can be conducted before, during or after 
an activity. Here again, teachers should play the role of a facilitator and lead the 
discussion by asking questions that stimulate thinking. Teachers should also 
encourage all of the students not to be afraid in expressing themselves. 
We will further discuss the types of discussion that can be conducted in class in 
the next sub-topic. 
8.2.1 Whole Class Discussions and Small Group 
Discussions 
There are two forms of discussions that you can use in the teaching of science: 
whole class discussions and small group discussions. Study Table 8.3 which 
outlines the main principles of both types of discussions. 
Always remember that before beginning a discussion, it is important to make 
sure that students have adequate knowledge about what is to be discussed. A 
discussion becomes boring when participants do not know much about the 
subject of discussion.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS  171 
Table 8.3: Whole Class Discussion vs Small Group Discussion 
Whole Class Discussions Small Group Discussions 
 All the students in a class participate in 
discussion. 
 Teacher acts as the facilitator and a 
source of information. 
 Teacher controls the discussion. 
 Teacher should encourage inquiry 
training as it helps students to develop 
skills in asking questions and drawing 
conclusions. 
 Example: 
 Teacher shows a rusty bicycle 
wheel to the students. 
 Students are asked to give opinions 
on why the wheel has became 
rusty. 
 StudentsÊ ideas can be written on 
the board, discussed and a 
conclusion can be made together. 
 Whole class discussions provide 
greater interaction between teacher 
and students. 
 Students may stay focused on the 
lesson because they might be called on 
to answer questions. 
 Students form small groups (usually 
four or five students in each group) to 
discuss a topic. 
 Teacher moves from group to group 
and aids their discussion. 
 Information through teacher-directed 
lessons, demonstrations, books, videos 
or pictures should be given to students. 
 Students can work together and may 
pull their desks closer to one another in 
order to talk and hear one another 
better. 
 Each group should have a leader who 
has to make sure the group stays on 
the topic and to ensure all students 
participate. 
 A group secretary can be appointed to 
write down the groupÊs ideas. 
 At the end of the discussion, group 
members can prepare a report or make 
a presentation to the rest of the class. 
 Groups may all discuss the same topic 
or different sub topics. 
 Example: 
 Students are shown a video on 
different types of pollution. 
 Each group discusses the ways to 
overcome one type of pollution. 
ACTIVITY 8.3 
1. Study the primary science curriculum and list three topics that 
you can use for small group discussions in your class. 
2. What are your concerns while carrying out this method? Discuss 
with your tutor and coursemates.
1 72  TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
SIMULATION 
8.3 
We will now move on to discuss the topic of simulation. What is simulation? A 
simulation is an activity which resembles an actual situation. Students take on 
roles and engage in activities appropriate to those roles (Slavin, 1994). 
Simulations can make science lessons fun and help students understand concepts 
more meaningfully. You can use simulations you have designed yourself or use 
computer programmes that show simulations for science concepts available for 
the teaching of science. Simulations increase studentsÊ interest and motivation 
and allow them to learn about science in a situation which resembles the actual 
situation. 
Let us look at Figure 8.3 which shows animal masks which you can use to do 
simulations when teaching about animals. 
Figure 8.3: Animal masks 
Source: http://whattheteacherwants.blogspot.com/2010/12/mitten.html 
8.3.1 Types of Simulation Methods 
There are three main types of simulation methods: role play, games and models. 
(a) Role Play 
In role play, students play out a particular role based on certain pre-determined 
conditions. Students are given a situation in which they have to 
act as characters (human or non-human). Students try to act, feel and react 
according to the characters they represent. For example, if you want to 
reinforce your studentsÊ understanding of „food chains‰, you can carry out 
an activity using masks like those shown in Figure 8.3. When students take 
on the roles of the animals, they can learn the terms ÂpredatorÊ and ÂpreyÊ,
TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS  173 
and can decide from their own experience what characteristics predators 
and preys have. 
(b) Games 
Games used in science teaching require the application of science 
knowledge and skills to win. You need to prepare rules that need to be 
followed when students are playing games. Examples of games are cut-and- 
paste games, board games, puzzle games, crossword puzzles and 
memory games. You can also use online games to help you teach. The game 
as shown in Figure 8.4 cames from http://primarygames.com/science.htm 
Figure 8.4: An example of a cut-and-paste game 
Source: http://primarygames.com/science.htm
1 74  TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
(c) Models 
Models are used to represent objects or actual situations so that students 
can see these objects or situations and understand the science concepts and 
principles to be learned. Figure 8.5 shows the three main types of models: 
solid models, sectional models and moving models. 
Figure 8.5: Types of models 
ACTIVITY 8.4 
Prepare one activity for your science classroom using one of the 
following types of simulations: 
1. Role play; 
2. Games ; and 
3. Models.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS  175 
PROJECTS 
8.4 
A project is a learning activity that is generally undertaken by an individual or a 
group of pupils to achieve a particular objective or to solve a problem. A project 
generally requires several lessons to complete and can be carried out either 
inside or outside the school. The outcome of the project can either be in the form 
of a report or an artefact and needs to be presented to the teacher and other 
students. 
A project can be carried out according to the need of the topic taught. It can also 
be done according to studentsÊ interests, or for a science exhibition. 
Projects allow students to develop their knowledge and skills in science, their 
thinking skills as well as communication skills. They also encourage 
collaboration and give an opportunity for students to show their creativity. 
8.4.1 Factors to Consider while Carrying Out Projects 
in the Science Classroom 
What are the factors you would need to consider when proposing a project to 
students? Study Figure 8.6 which shows the factors you needs to be considered in 
doing a project work in the science classroom.
1 76  TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
Figure 8.6: Factors to consider in doing project work in the science classroom 
8.4.2 The Process of Doing a Project 
In a project work, you should follow a series of steps in order to achieve the 
objectives that have been identified. The key steps are as shown in Figure 8.7 and 
should be carried out with your guidance as the teacher.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS  177 
Figure 8.7: The process of doing a project 
ACTIVITY 8.5 
Describe how you would carry out a project on one of the topics given 
below. Discuss your steps during the tutorial session. 
1. Growth of seedlings 
2. Recycling waste materials
1 78  TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
VISITS AND USE OF EXTERNAL 
RESOURCES 
8.5 
The learning of science is not limited to activities carried out in the school 
compound. It can be enhanced through the use of external resources such as 
zoos, museums, science centres, research institutes, mangrove swamps and 
factories. The primary purpose of these visits should be to develop and support 
learning. Visits to these places make the learning of science more interesting, 
meaningful and effective. Taking children out of school and into interesting 
places provides links between classroom activities and those of everyday life, in 
particular learning of new things that cannot be carried out in class and to see 
science in action (Harlan  Qualter, 2004). 
A visit should be fun and must make the most of the learning opportunities 
available. Examples of places you can take your students include (Harlan  
Qualter, 2004): 
(a) Natural locations (parks, seashores, mangrove swamps, ponds, forests, etc) 
where there may or may not be a formal structure for visitors. 
(b) Places of work (factories, farms, supermarkets, airports, meteorological 
stations) where there will be someone to accompany the children as well as 
act as tour guide of the premise. 
(c) Science museums, aquariums, planetariums, parks, zoos, wildlife centres, 
science and technology centres, conservation areas, where groups can be 
supervised by teachers with or without help from staff, but where there are 
usually finance and other requirements available to enable the visit to be 
carried out. 
(d) Other locations (local landmarks, educational institutions, historic 
buildings, vacant land, etc.) which initially do not seem to have any 
connection with science but has science potential. 
8.5.1 Planning a Visit or Field Trip 
The key to a successful visit is preparation. There are many aspects you would 
need to consider when you plan a visit or field trip. First, you need to choose the 
place you want to visit and identify the aim of the visit. You would then need to 
check the schoolÊs policy regarding procedures like parental approval, 
transportation and arrangement with authorities at the place of visit. 
Study what you would need to do before, during and after a visit or field trip as 
shown in Table 8.4.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS  179 
Table 8.4: Things that Need to be Done when Planning a Visit 
Before During After 
 Check your schoolÊs policy 
regarding procedures to carry 
out visit. 
 Obtain necessary permission 
from the people from the site of 
the field trip. 
 Visit the site to find connections 
to the science curriculum and to 
assess potential problems. You 
can also plan appropriate 
activities that can be carried out 
during the visit. 
 List specific activities available 
and plan how the students will 
use their time. Plan what you 
want students to notice or 
investigate. 
 Decide on the date, funding, 
method of transport and number 
of teachers needed. 
 Tell students the objectives of the 
trip and what they will be doing 
during the trip. 
 Conduct a briefing session 
regarding safety precautions and 
appropriate behaviour. 
 Prepare all materials (e.g. 
worksheets etc.) and equipment 
(e.g. hand lens, camera, etc.) that 
you would need for the visit. 
 Write letters to parents asking 
for permission and describing 
the field trip (include the 
educational purpose of the trip, 
trip itinerary, bus arrangements, 
date of the trip, student cost, 
eating arrangements) 
 On the day of the trip, 
remind students of the 
objectives of the trip. 
 Take attendance and 
distribute name tags 
to students. 
 Divide the class into 
small groups and 
assign a leader for 
each group. 
 Discuss safety 
regulations. 
 Interact with students 
as in a classroom 
science inquiry lesson. 
Ensure every student 
is actively involved 
and answer any 
question that arises. 
 Provide students the 
opportunities for 
them to view the site 
alone or in groups. 
 Point out interesting 
features seen during 
the trip. 
 Take attendance every 
time there is a 
movement from one 
location to another. 
 Carry out a post-mortem 
session 
with your 
students to 
reflect on and 
evaluate the trip. 
Ask students to 
identify the most 
important or 
significant things 
they have 
learned from the 
trip. 
 Ask students to 
write a report 
about the trip. 
 Have the class 
compose and 
send a thank-you 
letter to the 
host of the site of 
field trip. 
 Conduct 
appropriate 
follow-up 
activities and 
projects based 
on the visit.
1 80  TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
8.5.2 Virtual Field Trips 
As teachers, we know that field trips can motivate and educate students. We also 
know they are time-consuming, difficult to organise and often affected by 
unpredictable weather and events. In many cases, the places we would like to 
visit are not those in short distance to our location. Here, the next best thing to do 
is to organise a virtual field trip. Virtual field trips are often better because they 
take you to places you could not easily go to like inside a volcano, under the 
ocean or into the Solar System. 
What is a virtual field trip? It is a guided and narrated tour of websites that have 
been selected by educators and arranged in a thread that students can follow 
from site to site with just the click of a button. Virtual field trips challenge and 
expose students to new types of technology. They are a great way to spark 
studentsÊ interest and motivate their learning in science. In addition, virtual field 
trips can improve studentsÊ reading skills and expose them to various cultures 
and environments. 
SELF-CHECK 8.2 
1. Discuss how you would conduct an experiment in your science 
classroom. 
2. Explain briefly the main features of whole class and small group 
discussions. 
3. Describe the three types of simulation methods. What are the 
reasons for implementing simulation activities in the teaching 
and learning of science? 
4. Give an example of a project you can carry out in your science 
classroom. Write down the procedures for the implementation of 
the project. 
5. Suggest an external resource to which you would like to take 
your students. List out the procedures you need to follow when 
carrying out the visit.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS  181 
ACTIVITY 8.6 
1. Make a list of places you can visit with your students which are 
near your school. For each of the places you have mentioned, 
discuss which science content from the primary science 
curriculum can be incorporated into the visit. 
2. What would be some of your concerns when you organise visits 
or field trips for your students? Discuss with your coursemates. 
 Teaching and learning methods such as experiments, discussions, 
simulations, projects and visits can be used to teach science more effectively. 
 An experiment is a method that enable students to test hypotheses through 
investigations to discover specific science concepts and principles. 
 An experiment must contain both a hypothesis and variables. 
 A hypothesis can be described as tentative answers or untried solutions to the 
question or problem that is being investigated. 
 Variables are factors in an experiment which can change the outcome of the 
experiment. 
 A manipulated variable is something that is changed in the experiment. 
 A responding variable is something that responds to the manipulated 
variable. 
 A constant variable is something that is kept the same throughout the 
experiment. 
 A fair test is an experiment in which only one variable is changed while all 
other variables are kept constant. 
 Experimental results needs to be discussed at the end of the experiment. 
 Discussion of experimental results involves two procedures: data processing 
and information reporting techniques.
1 82  TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
 Data processing refers to how the data is presented, classified and 
interpreted. 
 Information reporting techniques refers to how the results are explained and 
reported. 
 A discussion is an activity in which students exchange questions and 
opinions on a given topic. 
 There are two forms of discussions you can use in science teaching: whole-class 
discussions and small group discussions. 
 In whole class discussions, all the students in a class discuss an issue. 
 In small group discussions, students form small groups to discuss a topic. 
 A simulation is an activity which resembles an actual situation. 
 There are three main types of simulation methods: role play, games and 
models. 
 In role play, students play out a particular role based on a given task. 
 Games that use science concepts and skills can be used in the teaching of 
science. Examples are cut and paste games, board games, puzzle, crossword 
puzzles, and memory games. 
 Models are used to represent objects or actual situations so that students can 
visualise these objects or situations and understand the science concepts and 
principles to be learned. 
 There are three main types of models: solid models, sectional models and 
moving models. 
 A project is a learning activity that is generally undertaken by an individual 
or a group of pupils to achieve a particular objective or to solve a problem. 
 The factors you would need to consider in doing a project work in the science 
classroom are age and ability levels of students, availibility of time and 
resources, mode (individual/pair/group work) and guidelines on how the 
report need to be presented. 
 The steps to carry out the project are: select a topic, gather information, plan 
and carry out experiment/activities, analyse and interpret data and write and 
present report.
TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS  183 
 Learning of science can be enhanced through visits to external resources such 
as zoos, museums, science centres, research institutes, mangrove swamps and 
factories. 
 To optimise learning opportunities, visits need to be carefully planned. 
Planning must be done before, during and after a visit or field trip. This 
means there must be clear purpose for the visit that the children understand 
and, most importantly, appropriate follow-up work. 
 A virtual field trip is a guided and narrated tour of websites that have been 
selected by educators. 
Constant variable 
Discussion 
Experiment 
Fair test 
Games 
Hypothesis 
Manipulated variable 
Models 
Moving Models 
Project 
Responding variable 
Role playing 
Sectional Models 
Simulation 
Simulation 
Small group discussions 
Solid Models 
Variables 
Virtual field trip 
Visits to external resources 
Whole class discussions
1 84  TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
Chin, L. F. (2004). Primary science project work in teaching primary science. 
Singapore: Pearson Education. 
Esler, W. K.,  Esler, M. K. (2001). Teaching elementary science (8th 
ed.).Washington: Wadsworth Publishing Company. 
Harlan, W.,  Qualter, Q. (2004). The Teaching of Science in Primary Schools (4th 
ed.). London. David Fulton Publishers. 
Hassard, J. (1992). Minds on science  Middle and secondary school methods. 
USA: Harper Collins. 
Lind, K. K. (2005). Exploring science in early childhood (4th ed.). United 
States:Thomson Delmar Learning. 
Martin, D. J. (2006). Elementary science methods: a constructivist approach (4th 
ed.). United States of America: Thomson Wadsworth. 
Retrieved 13 July 2011. Virtual Field Trips http://campus.fortunecity.com/ 
newton/40/field.html 
Retrieved 13 July 2011. Virtual Science Museums and Exhibits for Children. 
http://dir.yahoo.com/Society_and_Culture/Cultures_and_Groups/Childr 
en/Museums_and_Exhibits/Science/ 
Retrieved 13 July 2011. Virtual Zoo Field Trip http://engagetolearn.com/ 
ETL/virtualzoo/zoomap.htm 
Retrieved 17 July 2011. How to do a science project 
http://www.miniscience.com/How-to-do-a-scienceproject.asp?count=7 
Retrieved 17 July 2011. Science Fair Projects http://users.rcn.com/ 
tedrowan/primer.html 
Retrieved 21 July 2011. Free Science games and activities 
http://www.wartgames.com/themes/science.html 
Retrieved 22 July 2011. Classroom Science Activities 
http://www.powerhousemuseum.com/pdf/education/toys_science_activ 
ities.pdf. 
Slavin, R. E. (1994). Educational psychology. Massachusetts: Allyn and Bacon.
ANSWERS W 185 
TOPIC 4: COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 
Activity 4.1 
In an inductive approach, the lesson begins with the presentation of specific 
examples/applications. Then the students are led to form a generalisation. 
In the deductive approach, the lesson begins with a generalisation, a rule or a 
concept. Students are then introduced to specific examples or applications of the 
generalisation. 
Activity 4.4 
Phase 1 Phase II Phase III 
Presentation of the 
Advance Organiser 
Presentation of Learning 
Task or Material 
Strengthening Cognitive 
Organisation 
• Teacher tells students 
that the lesson is about 
objects that are 
attracted to magnets. 
• Teacher writes on the 
board „Magnets are 
attracted to metals, 
mostly those that are 
made of iron and 
steel‰. 
• Teacher explains all 
words that he has 
written on the board 
and ensures all 
students understand 
them. 
• Teacher demonstrates 
how magnets attract 
objects that are made of 
iron and steel. 
• Teacher asks students 
for other examples of 
modules that are 
attracted to magnets. 
• Teacher gives students 
objects and magnets 
and asks students to 
predict which materials 
will be attracted to 
magnets. 
Answers
1 86 X ANSWERS 
TOPIC 6: CONSTRUCTIVISM 
Activity 6.3 
Comparison of roles of traditional science teacher and a constructivist science 
teacher. 
Traditional Science Teacher Constructivist Science Teacher 
Teacher provides all science knowledge to 
students 
Teacher prepares activities that help 
students to discover knowledge in science 
Identifies important information Invites students to identify additional 
content that interests them 
Helps students remember information by 
giving clear explanations and examples 
Helps students discover knowledge 
Students are passive learners Students play an active role in their 
learning 
Teacher keeps students quiet and focused 
on task 
Teachers encourages students to create 
their own learning; allows a reasonable 
amount of noise. 
Teacher has authority and gives directions Teacher is interactive and negotiates with 
students 
Students work alone Students work in groups 
Self-Check 6.1 
1. A 
2. B 
TOPIC 8: TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 
Activity 8.1 
1. A teaching method is a method of instruction based on a learning theory, 
model or principle. It includes a series of actions or steps taken by the 
teacher to achieve certain teaching and learning outcomes.
ANSWERS W 187 
2. Other teaching methods that can be used to teach science are 
demonstrations, learning through playing, story telling, problem solving, 
cooperative learning, etc. 
Self-Check 8.1 
1. Hypothesis: Different surfaces affect the distance a trolley moves. 
2. Manipulated variable: type of surface (glass, sand paper) 
Responding variable: time taken for trolley to move 
Constant variable: distance trolley moves, trolley, etc. 
3. The data can be presented in the form of a table. 
Activity 8.2 
Julia can carry out an experiment using the design below: 
Hypothesis: The expensive fertiliser will make the rose plants grow more 
healthily. 
Manipulated variable Type of fertiliser (expensive and cheap one) 
Responding variables Number of leaves / Height 
Constant variables Place planted / Volume of water / etc 
Activity 8.6 
2. Ć Sometimes a field trip might not achieve the anticipated objectives 
Ć Weather can be a hindrance 
Ć It can be costly 
Ć Extra effort is needed for planning 
Ć Safety measures must be taken 
Ć Transportation has to be planned

More Related Content

PPTX
Constructivist Methods of Teaching and Learning
PPT
Inquiry based learning[1]
PPTX
Different approaches and methods
PPTX
Objective Type Items, Recognition Type Items and Recall Items
PPT
Learning outcomes
DOCX
Lesson plan-in-science- (PARTS OF THE BODY)
PPT
Integrated curriculum
PPTX
THINK PAIR SHARE PRESENTATION - TPC
Constructivist Methods of Teaching and Learning
Inquiry based learning[1]
Different approaches and methods
Objective Type Items, Recognition Type Items and Recall Items
Learning outcomes
Lesson plan-in-science- (PARTS OF THE BODY)
Integrated curriculum
THINK PAIR SHARE PRESENTATION - TPC

What's hot (20)

PPTX
integrated curriculum
PDF
Typology of learners with special need part 1
PPTX
Progressive methods of teaching
PPT
Differentiation powerpoint for tuesday pd
PPTX
Differentiated instruction
PPTX
Completion type of test
PPT
Information Processing Model and its implications in learning and teaching
PPT
Discovery learning presentation
PPT
Effective questioning and reacting techniques
PPTX
Bloom’s Revised Taxonomy of Educational Objectives
PPTX
Science strategies
PPTX
Instructional Materials & Technology Used in Teaching
PPTX
Deductive and inductive method of teching
PDF
What is inquiry based learning
PPTX
THE ART OF QUESTIONING
PPTX
Foundations of Mathematics Teaching and Learning (Philippine Context)
PDF
The 4 Pillars of Education
PPT
Transfer Of Learning
PPTX
Importance of Lesson Plan
PPT
Differentiated instruction
integrated curriculum
Typology of learners with special need part 1
Progressive methods of teaching
Differentiation powerpoint for tuesday pd
Differentiated instruction
Completion type of test
Information Processing Model and its implications in learning and teaching
Discovery learning presentation
Effective questioning and reacting techniques
Bloom’s Revised Taxonomy of Educational Objectives
Science strategies
Instructional Materials & Technology Used in Teaching
Deductive and inductive method of teching
What is inquiry based learning
THE ART OF QUESTIONING
Foundations of Mathematics Teaching and Learning (Philippine Context)
The 4 Pillars of Education
Transfer Of Learning
Importance of Lesson Plan
Differentiated instruction
Ad

Viewers also liked (15)

PPTX
Labs in elementary science classroom (Teacher)
PPTX
Pendekatan inkuiri penemuan
PDF
P&P Inkuiri Penemuan
PPT
Reinforcement theory observational learning theory
PPTX
Reinforcement (Behavioral Learning)
PPT
Constructivist pedagogy
PPTX
Reinforcement and punishment
PPTX
Reinforcement motivation theory
DOCX
PPTX
Direct method
PPTX
Direct method
PPT
Direct Method (DM) of Language Teaching
DOCX
Field Study 2 Episode 7
PDF
Speech recognition project report
DOCX
Field Study 2 Episode 1 Principles of Learning
Labs in elementary science classroom (Teacher)
Pendekatan inkuiri penemuan
P&P Inkuiri Penemuan
Reinforcement theory observational learning theory
Reinforcement (Behavioral Learning)
Constructivist pedagogy
Reinforcement and punishment
Reinforcement motivation theory
Direct method
Direct method
Direct Method (DM) of Language Teaching
Field Study 2 Episode 7
Speech recognition project report
Field Study 2 Episode 1 Principles of Learning
Ad

Similar to Teaching and Learning of Science (20)

PDF
Hmef5103 cg
DOCX
Os scope animal-systems-5 (1)
PPTX
ENGAGE problem-solving with convesation
PDF
Thesis Writing
PPTX
LCNHS_CROSSING_RESEARCH.pptxINTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH: WRITING AN ACTION RESEA...
PPT
How to write thesis proposal
PPT
How to write thesis proposal
DOCX
ATT00001.txtATT00002.txtATT00003.txtATT00004.t.docx
PPTX
understanding the curriculum as a dynamic field in education
PPTX
CHAPTER 2 - THE RESEARCH PROBLEM
PPTX
Teaching Science
PPTX
24_MANJUNATH_CONTENT_ANALYSIS_OF_THEORIES.pptx
PPTX
Practical Research Grade 11 April 1-5.pptx
PPTX
INQUIRY-BASED-eugenelouie.pptxmmmmmmmmmm
PPTX
INQUIRY-BASED-eugenelouie.pptxioookkkooooll
PPTX
Concept -Based Inquiry 2vhvvhhjjvgccccch
PPTX
Concept -Based Inquiry adfgjfdgjkdfhgjfdh
PPTX
ENGAGE MOOC problem solving
DOCX
Research a lifelong learning experience
PPTX
Construction & Organization of Curriculum
Hmef5103 cg
Os scope animal-systems-5 (1)
ENGAGE problem-solving with convesation
Thesis Writing
LCNHS_CROSSING_RESEARCH.pptxINTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH: WRITING AN ACTION RESEA...
How to write thesis proposal
How to write thesis proposal
ATT00001.txtATT00002.txtATT00003.txtATT00004.t.docx
understanding the curriculum as a dynamic field in education
CHAPTER 2 - THE RESEARCH PROBLEM
Teaching Science
24_MANJUNATH_CONTENT_ANALYSIS_OF_THEORIES.pptx
Practical Research Grade 11 April 1-5.pptx
INQUIRY-BASED-eugenelouie.pptxmmmmmmmmmm
INQUIRY-BASED-eugenelouie.pptxioookkkooooll
Concept -Based Inquiry 2vhvvhhjjvgccccch
Concept -Based Inquiry adfgjfdgjkdfhgjfdh
ENGAGE MOOC problem solving
Research a lifelong learning experience
Construction & Organization of Curriculum

More from Cool University (20)

PDF
Sains (kssr) upsr 2016 format dan instrumen
DOCX
Introduction of Science lab
DOCX
Report of science lab
DOCX
Pengenalan makmal sains
DOCX
Laporan pembangunan makmal sains
DOCX
Earth and Space
DOCX
Fizik Radioisotop
DOCX
中华文化概论
PDF
HBMT 3103 Teaching of Elementary Mathematic
PDF
HBMT 1203 Mathematic
PDF
HBCL3103 Tatabahasa Bahasa Cina Moden II
PDF
HBSC1203 BIOLOGY I
PDF
HBSC3303 School Science Curriculum
PDF
HBSC 3203
PDF
HBSC 2103
PDF
HBMT 3203
PDF
HBMT2103 Pengajaran Matematik Sekolah Rendah
PDF
HBCL3203 中国古代诗歌教学
PDF
HBCL2103 Pedagogi Bahasa Cina
PDF
HBCL1203 BC yuyin
Sains (kssr) upsr 2016 format dan instrumen
Introduction of Science lab
Report of science lab
Pengenalan makmal sains
Laporan pembangunan makmal sains
Earth and Space
Fizik Radioisotop
中华文化概论
HBMT 3103 Teaching of Elementary Mathematic
HBMT 1203 Mathematic
HBCL3103 Tatabahasa Bahasa Cina Moden II
HBSC1203 BIOLOGY I
HBSC3303 School Science Curriculum
HBSC 3203
HBSC 2103
HBMT 3203
HBMT2103 Pengajaran Matematik Sekolah Rendah
HBCL3203 中国古代诗歌教学
HBCL2103 Pedagogi Bahasa Cina
HBCL1203 BC yuyin

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
GENETICS IN BIOLOGY IN SECONDARY LEVEL FORM 3
PDF
ANTIBIOTICS.pptx.pdf………………… xxxxxxxxxxxxx
PPTX
Introduction-to-Literarature-and-Literary-Studies-week-Prelim-coverage.pptx
PPTX
master seminar digital applications in india
PPTX
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
PPTX
1st Inaugural Professorial Lecture held on 19th February 2020 (Governance and...
PPTX
Lesson notes of climatology university.
PPTX
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
PDF
grade 11-chemistry_fetena_net_5883.pdf teacher guide for all student
PDF
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
PDF
STATICS OF THE RIGID BODIES Hibbelers.pdf
PPTX
Cell Structure & Organelles in detailed.
PPTX
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
PDF
102 student loan defaulters named and shamed – Is someone you know on the list?
PDF
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
PDF
FourierSeries-QuestionsWithAnswers(Part-A).pdf
PPTX
school management -TNTEU- B.Ed., Semester II Unit 1.pptx
PPTX
human mycosis Human fungal infections are called human mycosis..pptx
PPTX
Microbial diseases, their pathogenesis and prophylaxis
PPTX
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
GENETICS IN BIOLOGY IN SECONDARY LEVEL FORM 3
ANTIBIOTICS.pptx.pdf………………… xxxxxxxxxxxxx
Introduction-to-Literarature-and-Literary-Studies-week-Prelim-coverage.pptx
master seminar digital applications in india
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
1st Inaugural Professorial Lecture held on 19th February 2020 (Governance and...
Lesson notes of climatology university.
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
grade 11-chemistry_fetena_net_5883.pdf teacher guide for all student
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
STATICS OF THE RIGID BODIES Hibbelers.pdf
Cell Structure & Organelles in detailed.
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
102 student loan defaulters named and shamed – Is someone you know on the list?
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
FourierSeries-QuestionsWithAnswers(Part-A).pdf
school management -TNTEU- B.Ed., Semester II Unit 1.pptx
human mycosis Human fungal infections are called human mycosis..pptx
Microbial diseases, their pathogenesis and prophylaxis
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .

Teaching and Learning of Science

  • 1. COURSE GUIDE W ix COURSE GUIDE DESCRIPTION You must read this Course Guide carefully from the beginning to the end. It tells you briefly what the course is about and how you can work your way through the course material. It also suggests the amount of time you are likely to spend in order to complete the course successfully. Please keep on referring to Course Guide as you go through the course material as it will help you to clarify important study components or points that you might miss or overlook. INTRODUCTION HBSC1103 Teaching and Learning of Science is one of the courses offered by the Faculty of Education and Languages at Open University Malaysia (OUM). This course is worth 3 credit hours and should be covered over 8 to 15 weeks. COURSE AUDIENCE This course is offered to all students taking the Bachelor of Teaching majoring in Science (with Honours) programme. This module aims to impart the fundamentals of the teaching and learning of science. This module should be able to form a strong foundation for teachers to plan effective science lessons. As an open and distance learner, you should be acquainted with learning independently and being able to optimise the learning modes and environment available to you. Before you begin this course, please ensure you have the right course materials and understand the course requirements as well as how the course is conducted. STUDY SCHEDULE It is a standard OUM practice that learners accumulate 40 study hours for every credit hour. As such, for a three-credit hour course, you are expected to spend 120 study hours. Table 1 gives an estimation of how the 120 study hours could be accumulated.
  • 2. x X COURSE GUIDE Table 1: Estimation of Time Accumulation of Study Hours Study Activities Study Hours Briefly go through the course content and participate in initial discussions 3 Study the module 60 Attend 3 to 5 tutorial sessions 10 Online Participation 12 Revision 15 Assignment(s), Test(s) and Examination(s) 20 TOTAL STUDY HOURS 120 COURSE OBJECTIVES By the end of this course, you should be able to: 1. Explain how children view science and what the nature of science is; 2. Demonstrate knowledge of basic concepts of childrenÊs ideas in science, where do they come from and how they influence learning in science; 3. Describe how developmental and learning theories have contributed to childrenÊs learning in science; 4. Demonstrate a knowledge of the constructivist approach to learning; and 5. Describe the inquiry approach in teaching science in primary school.
  • 3. COURSE GUIDE W xi COURSE SYNOPSIS This course is divided into 8 topics. The synopsis for each topic can be listed as follows: Topic 1 begins with a discussion on the concept of what science is, the nature of science, the scientific method and scientific literacy. Lastly the discussion is about the relationship between science and technology. Topic 2 introduces the behavioural views of learning. The theories of Pavlov, Thorndike and Skinner and their contributions to teaching and learning will be discussed. Topic 3 introduces the cognitive learning theories. Later the Piaget and Bruner learning theories are discussed in detail. Then the application of these theories will be discussed. Topic 4 also discusses cognitive learning theories. AusubelÊs Deductive Learning Theory, GagneÊs Theory of Mastery Learning and the Multiple Intelligences Theory will be discussed. Topic 5 examines the inquiry approach in the teaching of science. The advantages, the types of inquiry and the conditions necessary for the successful implementation of inquiry learning will be discussed. Questioning skills for inquiry learning will be discussed at the end of the topic. Topic 6 describes constructivism. Alternative conceptions and implications to science learning are also explained. Constructivist learning approaches such as the Learning Cycles Model, Predict-ObserveăExplain (POE) Model and NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model in the teaching of science are discussed. Topic 7 describes three approaches in teaching science ă science, technology and society, contextual, and problem-based learning. For each approach, the concept, its characteristics and how to teach using the approach will be discussed. Topic 8 discusses teaching and learning methods such as experiments, discussions, simulations, projects and visits; and how they are used to enhance science learning.
  • 4. x ii X COURSE GUIDE TEXT ARRANGEMENT GUIDE Before you go through this module, it is important that you note the text arrangement. Understanding the text arrangement will help you to organise your study of this course in a more objective and effective way. Generally, the text arrangement for each topic is as follows: Learning Outcomes: This section refers to what you should achieve after you have completely covered a topic. As you go through each topic, you should frequently refer to these learning outcomes. By doing this, you can continuously gauge your understanding of the topic. Self-Check: This component of the module is inserted at strategic locations throughout the module. It may be inserted after one sub-section or a few sub-sections. It usually comes in the form of a question. When you come across this component, try to reflect on what you have already learnt thus far. By attempting to answer the question, you should be able to gauge how well you have understood the sub-section(s). Most of the time, the answers to the questions can be found directly from the module itself. Activity: Like Self-Check, the Activity component is also placed at various locations or junctures throughout the module. This component may require you to solve questions, explore short case studies, or conduct an observation or research. It may even require you to evaluate a given scenario. When you come across an Activity, you should try to reflect on what you have gathered from the module and apply it to real situations. You should, at the same time, engage yourself in higher order thinking where you might be required to analyse, synthesise and evaluate instead of only having to recall and define. Summary: You will find this component at the end of each topic. This component helps you to recap the whole topic. By going through the summary, you should be able to gauge your knowledge retention level. Should you find points in the summary that you do not fully understand, it would be a good idea for you to revisit the details in the module. Key Terms: This component can be found at the end of each topic. You should go through this component to remind yourself of important terms or jargon used throughout the module. Should you find terms here that you are not able to explain, you should look for the terms in the module. References: The References section is where a list of relevant and useful textbooks, journals, articles, electronic contents or sources can be found. The list can appear in a few locations such as in the Course Guide (at the References
  • 5. COURSE GUIDE W xiii section), at the end of every topic or at the back of the module. You are encouraged to read or refer to the suggested sources to obtain the additional information needed and to enhance your overall understanding of the course. PRIOR KNOWLEDGE No prior knowledge is required. ASSESSMENT METHOD Please refer to myVLE. REFERENCES Abruscato, J. (2004). Teaching children science: A discovery approach (5th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon. Driver, R. (1983). The pupil as scientist. Buckingham: Open University Press. Driver, R., Guesne, E., & Tiberghien, A. (1985). ChildrenÊs ideas in science. Buckingham: Open University Press. Driver, R., Leach, J., Miller, R., & Scott, P. (1996). Young peopleÊs images of science. Buckingham: Open University Press. Esler, W. K., & Esler, M. K. (2001). Teaching elementary science (8th ed.).Washington: Wadsworth Publishing Company. Fleer, M., & Hardy. T. (2001). Science for children: Developing a personal approach to teaching (2nd ed.). Sydney: Prentice Hall. Martin, D. J. (2006). Elementary science methods: A constructivist approach. Belmont: Thomson Wadsworth. Martin, R., Sexton, C., & Gerlovich, J. (2002). Teaching science for all children- Methods for constructing understanding. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. Skamp, K. (2004). Teaching primary science constructively. Southbank, Victoria: Harcourt Brace.
  • 6. x iv X COURSE GUIDE
  • 7. Table of Contents Course Guide ix-xiii Topic 1 Teaching and Learning Science 1 1.1 What is Science? 3 1.1.1 Science as a Process 5 1.1.2 Science as a Product 6 1.1.3 Science as Attitudes 7 1.2 The Nature of Science 8 1.3 The Scientific Method 10 1.4 Science and Technology 16 1.4.1 What is Technology? 16 1.4.2 Relationship between Science and Technology 17 Summary 18 Key Terms 19 References 19 Topic 2 Behaviourist Developmental Theories 21 2.1 Behavioural Views of Learning 22 2.2 PavlovÊs Theory 24 2.2.1 Pavlov and Classical Conditioning 25 2.2.2 Common Processes in Classical Conditioning 27 2.2.3 Applications of PavlovÊs Theory in the Teaching of Science 28 2.3 ThorndikeÊs Theory 30 2.3.1 ThorndikeÊs Laws 31 2.3.2 Applications of ThorndikeÊs Theory in the Teaching of Science 32 2.4 SkinnerÊs Theory 33 2.4.1 Skinner and Operant Conditioning 34 2.4.2 Reinforcement 35 2.4.3 Punishment 37 2.4.4 Reinforcement Schedules 37 2.4.5 Applications of SkinnerÊs Theory in the Teaching of Science 39 Summary 41 Key Terms 43 References 43
  • 8. i v X TABLE OF CONTENTS Topic 3 Cognitive Developmental Theories 1 45 3.1 Cognitive Learning Theory 46 3.2 Cognitive Learning Theory Exponents 47 3.2.1 PiagetÊs Learning Theory 47 3.2.2 Identifying the Stages of Development 49 3.2.3 Applications of PiagetÊs Theory in Teaching Various Children at Stages of Development 51 3.3 BrunerÊs Theories 56 3.3.1 Discovery Learning 57 3.3.2 Inductive Thinking 59 3.3.3 Stages of Cognitive Growth 61 3.3.4 Application of BrunerÊs Theories in the Teaching of Science 63 Summary 66 Key Terms 66 References 67 Topic 4 Cognitive Learning Theories 2 69 4.1 AusubelÊs Deductive Learning 70 4.1.1 Meaningful Learning 71 4.1.2 Advance Organiser 72 4.2 Application of AusubelÊs Deductive Thinking in Science Teaching 74 4.3 GagneÊs Mastery Learning 78 4.3.1 GagneÊs Categories of Learning 79 4.3.2 GagneÊs Hierarchy of Intellectual Skills 81 4.3.3 GagneÊs Nine Instructional Events 83 4.4 Application of GagneÊs Mastery Learning in Science Teaching 85 4.5 Multiple Intelligences Theory 86 4.6 Application of Multiple Intelligences Theory in Science Teaching 89 Summary 91 Key Terms 92 References 93 Appendix 1 94 Topic 5 Inquiry Learning 96 5.1 Inquiry and Discovery 98 5.1.1 Inquiry Cycle 99 5.1.2 Advantages of Inquiry Learning 102 5.2 Types of Inquiry Learning 104 5.3 Conditions for Inquiry Learning 108
  • 9. TABLE OF CONTENTS W v 5.4 Questioning Skills for Inquiry Teaching 110 5.4.1 Types of Questions 110 5.4.2 Ways to Facilitate Questioning from Students 115 Summary 117 Key Terms 118 References 118 Topic 6 Constructivism 120 6.1 What is Constructivism? 121 6.1.1 Characteristics of a Constructivist Classroom 123 6.2 Alternative Conceptions: Science Learning Implications 124 6.3 Constructivist Teaching Approaches 128 6.3.1 5-E Learning Cycle Model 128 6.3.2 Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model 129 6.3.3 Needham's Five Phase Model 131 Summary 133 Key Terms 134 References 134 Topic 7 Teaching Approaches in Science 136 7.1 Science, Technology and Society Approach 137 7.1.1 Concept of STS 138 7.1.2 Background of STS Approach 139 7.1.3 Characteristics of STS Approach 140 7.2 Contextual Approach in Teaching and Learning of Science 142 7.2.1 Definitions and Concepts of CTL Approach 143 7.2.2 CTL Forms of Learning 146 7.3 Problem-Based Learning (PBL) 152 7.3.1 What is PBL? 152 7.3.2 PBL characteristics 153 7.3.3 PBL and Inquiry 155 Summary 160 Key Terms 161 References 162 Topic 8 Teaching and Learning Methods 164 8.1 Experiments 166 8.1.1 Discussion of Experimental Results 168 8.2 Discussion 170 8.2.1 Whole Class Discussions and Small Group Discussions 170 8.3 Simulation 172 8.3.1 Types of Simulation Methods 172
  • 10. v i X TABLE OF CONTENTS 8.4 Projects 175 8.4.1 Factors to Consider while Carrying Out Projects in the Science Classroom 175 8.4.2 The Process of Doing a Project 176 8.5 Visits and use of External Resources 178 8.5.1 Planning a Visit or Field Trip 178 8.5.2 Virtual Field Trips 180 Summary 181 Key Terms 183 References 184 Answers 185
  • 11. Topic 1 Teaching and Learning Science LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain the three major components of science; 2. Describe the nature of science; 3. List the steps in a scientific method; 4. Explain the meaning of scientific literacy; and 5. Differentiate between science and technology. INTRODUCTION Why is it important for us to learn and understand what science is? Look at the advertisement in Figure 1.1. What does scientifically tested mean?
  • 12. 2 TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE Figure 1.1: An example of a bread advertisement If we know science, we would not be fooled by this advertisement. We would know how to evaluate information and make wise decision when it comes to our health. Before we go any further, do you think knowing science and knowing about science are the same? They are different. Knowing science deals with the theories, laws, generalisations, experiments and facts in science (Lee, Y. J. et al., 2004). In the meantime, knowing about science or scientific literacy can be described as thinking critically and reflectively about the cultural practices of science, the philosophy, the motivations, influences and frameworks behind the sciences. As a science teacher, you certainly need to master both components in order to facilitate effective teaching of this subject. Apart from that, you need to know about the nature of science, so that, you can prepare relevant science-related experiences for the development of science concepts and understanding. ACTIVITY 1.1 Recall how science was taught when you were in primary school. Take time to list down the characteristics of the science lesson. Share it with your classmates.
  • 13. TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 3 WHAT IS SCIENCE? What comes to your mind when someone mentions the word 'science'? Do you picture someone in a white lab coat? Someone watching stars using a telescope? A gardener tending to flowering bushes? Someone baking a cake? In spite of these differences, all of them are related to science (Figure 1.2). Figure 1.2: Images of science Sources: http://www.majalahsains.com/ http://suddenvalley.com http://www.astronomy2009.org http://foodthought.org 1.1
  • 14. 4 TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE Many people would associate science with a person in a white lab coat doing an experiment but what about the person looking at the stars by using the telescope? The gardener and the baker? The person looking at the stars by using the telescope is studying what makes up the star, while, the gardener is monitoring the growth of the plants. Meanwhile, the baker is trying to control the situation so that the cake will rise beautifully. They are all doing science. Science has many facets. Different individual would define science differently. The layperson might define science as a body of scientific information, the scientist might view it as procedures by which hypotheses are tested and a philosopher might regard science as a way of questioning the truthfulness of what we know. All of these views are valid, but each of them represents only a partial definition of science. If you explore the meaning of science, you may find the following definitions: Science is everywhere, using it all the time, scary, can be lethal, discovery, exploration, learning more, theories, hypothesis, interesting, exciting, expensive, profitable, intelligent, status (Fleer Hardy, 1996) Knowledge about the structure and behaviour of the natural and physical world, based on facts you can prove (Oxford Dictionary) Systematic knowledge which can be tested and proven for its truth (Kamus Dewan) Science is a set of attitudes and a way of thinking on facts (B. F. Skinner, 2005) Science is the system of knowing about the universe through data collected by observation and controlled experimentation. As data are collected, theories are advanced to explain and account for what has been observed (Carin Sund, 1989) From the various definitions given above, you can conclude that science consists of three major elements: Processes (or methods) Products Human attitudes Figure 1.3 shows the relationship among the three elements.
  • 15. TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 5 Figure 1.3: The relationship among the major elements of science Now, let us read about each element in detail. 1.1.1 Science as a Process Scientific knowledge does not come out from thin air. The body of knowledge is produced through the observations and experimentation being done by the scientist. This process has many different aspects and stages. For example, the astronomer will first observe carefully and maybe take measurements while gazing at the stars. Then, with the knowledge of the laws of physics, he or she will provide the basis of our understanding of our universe. Scientific skills are the tools used in doing the processes of science. Students will conduct the processes just like the scientist. Students observe objects and phenomena around them to understand the natural world. They will use empirical procedures and analyse the data to describe the science concepts. The science processes could also involve the formation of hypothesis, planning, collecting data and data interpretation before making a conclusion.
  • 16. 6 TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 1.1.2 Science as a Product The product of science is the body of knowledge of science facts, concepts, laws and theories. Figure 1.4 shows the relationships and the hierarchical order of the science products. Figure 1.4: The science products Now, let us look at Table 1.1 which explains each component in detail.
  • 17. TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 7 Table 1.1: The Science Products Science Products Descriptions Science Facts A scientific fact is the specific statement about existing objects or actual incidents. We use senses to observe the facts. There are two criteria that are used to identify a scientific fact: (a) It is directly observable; and (b) It can be demonstrated at any time. Science Concepts A concept is an abstraction of events, objects, or phenomena that seem to have certain properties or attributes in common. Birds, for example, possess certain characteristics that set them apart from reptiles and mammals. Science Laws And Principles Principles and Laws also fall into the general category of a concept but in a broad manner. These higher order ideas are used to describe what exists through empirical basis. For example, BernoulliÊs principle and Newton laws of motion. Science Theories Scientists use theories to explain patterns and forces that are hidden from direct observation. The Kinetic theory explains how the molecules in a solid, liquid and gas move. 1.1.3 Science as Attitudes The third element in science is attitudes and values. Scientists are persons trained in some field of science who study phenomena through observation, experimentation and other rational, analytical activities. They use attitudes, such as being honest and accurate in recording and validating data, systematic and being diligent in their work. Thus, when planning teaching and learning activities, teachers need to inculcate scientific attitudes and values to the students. For example, during science practical work, the teacher should remind students and ensure that they carry out their experiments in a careful, cooperative and honest manner. Teachers need to plan well for effective inculcation of scientific attitudes and noble values during science lessons. They should examine all related learning outcomes and suggested teaching-learning activities that provide opportunities for the inculcation of scientific attitudes and noble values. This can be referred to in any School Science Curriculum Specification.
  • 18. 8 TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE SELF-CHECK 1.1 1. Re-read the definitions of science given by various sources. In your own words, explain the meaning of science. 2. Is the statement „the earth rotates on its axis‰ a scientific concept, principle or theory? 3. What are the three major elements of science? ACTIVITY 1.2 With your partner, draw a mind map that summarises your definition of science. THE NATURE OF SCIENCE 1.2 In this subtopic, we will briefly discuss the nature of science. It refers to the main principles and ideas which provide a description of science methods and inquiry as well as the characteristics of scientific knowledge or products. You should read and understand all of these. Otherwise, it will result in your students learning distorted views about how science is conducted. Some points regarding the nature of science are as follows: (a) Scientific knowledge is not absolute but tentative The scientific knowledge we know today, may not be true in the future. Change is inevitable because new observations may disprove the current knowledge. For example, previously we learn that there are nine planets in our solar system but now the scientist communities have agreed that there are only eight planets. (b) Scientific knowledge is durable Although scientific knowledge is tentative, most scientific knowledge is durable. As technology improves, new findings are added to the field and this will lead to the modification of current ideas. Eventually the ideas become more refine, precise and widely accepted by the scientific community. So, we seldom see strong theories being rejected altogether.
  • 19. TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 9 (c) Science cannot provide complete answers to all questions Science cannot answer all questions. Issues relating to moral, ethical, aesthetic, social and metaphysical questions cannot be answered by science method. Why? The reason is ideas and answers relating to science must be supported by concrete evidence. Hence, there is no scientific method to prove that belief on moral issues or metaphysical questions can be false. (d) Scientists are particularly objective Scientists are no different in their level of objectivity as other professions. They have to be very careful and thorough when carrying out experiments, collecting data, analysing the results and making a valid conclusion based on the results. However scientists are human beings too and they can make mistakes. So when they conduct experiments, the results may not always give a valid explanation as mistakes can occur due to human error. For example, when interpreting the data, bias can occur as the scientist may interpret using his or her values and beliefs which may not be the values and beliefs of the scientific communities. (e) The world is understandable In order to explain the phenomena that happen around us, scientists presume that the things and events in the universe occur in consistent patterns. Thus, the phenomena are comprehensible through careful and systematic study. They also believe that through the use of the intellect, and with the aid of instruments that extend the senses, people can discover patterns in all of nature. SELF-CHECK 1.2 Tick [ ] the correct statements. (a) Scientific knowledge is static. (b) Scientific knowledge is durable. (c) Science cannot provide complete answers to all questions. (d) Scientists are particularly objective.
  • 20. 1 0 TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE THE SCIENTIFIC METHOD 1.3 The scientific method as shown in Figure 1.5 is a process for experimentation that is used to explore observations and answer questions. Scientists use the scientific method to search for cause and effect relationships in nature. Figure 1.5: The scientific method Source: http://www.experiment-resources.com/what-is-the-scientific-method.html Now, have a look at the following Table 1.2 that shows the steps of the scientific method in detail.
  • 21. TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 11 Table 1.2: Steps of the Scientific Method Steps of the Scientific Method Descriptions Ask question You should start the experiment by asking questions about the problem you want to investigate. Start the questions with 5W and 1H what, when, who, which, where and how. Finally you should summarise what you want to investigate in the form of a testable question. Then only can you get the answer through the scientific method. Do background research In order to understand the questions that you want to investigate, you probably need to collect information from various sources. This will help you to understand the concepts surrounding your investigation, thus helping you to plan in solving the problem. Construct a hypothesis A hypothesis is an educated guess about how things work: If _____[I do this] _____, then _____[this]_____ will happen. You should construct the hypothesis in a way to help you answer your original question. Test your hypothesis by doing an experiment You then design your investigation to collect enough data. You must remember to plan your experiment to be a fair test. You conduct a fair test by making sure that you change only one factor at a time, while keeping all other conditions unchanged. You should also repeat your experiments several times to minimise error. Analyse your data and draw a conclusion Here, you analyse the data collected and relate your findings with your hypothesis. If the data support your hypothesis then you accept the hypothesis. If not, then probably you need to re-examine your hypothesis and start the entire process again. Communicate your results Finally, you want to share your findings with your friends. You should write your report to include all the various elements in your experiment. You should use various tools to display your data such as data table, graphs and diagram, so that the findings are clearly communicated to others.
  • 22. 1 2 TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE You must remember that the steps in the scientific method described in Table 1.2 are cyclical, meaning that you do not just move from one step to another in a linear way. The reason for this is that information or thinking always changes. Thus, scientists sometime need to back up and repeat the steps at any point during the process. This process is called an iterative process. The scientific method is not only used to solve scientific problems. It can be applied in solving problems that you encounter in your everyday life. The systematic way of solving a problem could help you to make decisions in your daily life. This is what we called scientific literacy as illustrated in Figure 1.6. Figure 1.6: A definition of scientific literacy Source: Skamp (2004) In other words, scientific literacy means that a person can ask, find or determine answers to questions derived from curiosity about everyday experiences. It means that a person has the ability to describe, explain and predict natural phenomena. A scientifically-literate person should be able to evaluate the quality
  • 23. TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 13 of scientific information on the basis of its source and the methods used to generate it. Scientific literacy also implies the capacity to pose and evaluate arguments based on evidence and to apply conclusions from such arguments appropriately (National Science Education Standards, page 22). Why do you think we need to be scientifically literate? One of the main reasons is that the society we live in depends on an ever-increasing application of technology and the scientific knowledge that makes it possible. Decisions that we make every day have the capacity to affect energy consumption, our personal health, natural resources and the environment·ultimately the well-being of ourselves, our community and the world. Individual decisions may not seem to be critical. However, when they are multiplied by 300 million people nationwide, or nearly 7 billion around the world, they have the power to change the face of the planet (Scearce, 2007). SELF-CHECK 1.3 You want to find out whether the amount of sunlight in a garden affect tomato size. Use Figure 1.5 and Table 1.2 to help you to plan the experiment and find the answer. ACTIVITY 1.3 Do want to find out whether you are scientifically literate? Try answering the test below. Answer the questions before looking at the actual answers! Test Your Scientific Literacy! Richard Carrier (2001) Answer each question with 'true' if what the sentence most normally means is typically true and 'false' if it is typically false. 1. Scientists usually expect an experiment to turn out a certain way. 2. Science only produces tentative conclusions that can change.
  • 24. 1 4 TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE ACTIVITY 1.3 3. Science has one uniform way of conducting research called „the scientific method.‰ 4. Scientific theories are explanations and not facts. 5. When being scientific, one must have faith only in what is justified by empirical evidence. 6. Science is just about the facts, not human interpretations of them. 7. To be scientific one must conduct experiments. 8. Scientific theories only change when new information becomes available. 9. Scientists manipulate their experiments to produce particular results. 10. Science proves facts true in a way that is definitive and final. 11. An experiment can prove a theory true. 12. Science is partly based on beliefs, assumptions and the non-observable. 13. Imagination and creativity are used in all stages of scientific investigations. 14. Scientific theories are just ideas about how something works. 15. A scientific law is a theory that has been extensively and thoroughly confirmed. 16. ScientistsÊ education, background, opinions, disciplinary focus, and basic guiding assumptions and philosophies influence their perception and interpretation of the available data. 17. A scientific law will not change because it has been proven true. 18. An accepted scientific theory is a hypothesis that has been confirmed by considerable evidence and has endured all attempts to disprove it.
  • 25. TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 15 19. A scientific law describes relationships among observable phenomena but does not explain them. 20. Science relies on deduction (x entails y) more than induction (x implies y). 21. Scientists invent explanations, models or theoretical entities. 22. Scientists construct theories to guide further research. 23. Scientists accept the existence of theoretical entities that have never been directly observed. 24. Scientific laws are absolute or certain. Source: www.infidels.org/library/modern/richard_carrier/SciLit.html Answers to Activity 1.3 1. T 9. T 17. F 2. F 10. F 18. T 3. F 11. F 19. T 4. T 12. T 20. F 5. T 13. T 21. T 6. F 14. F 22. T 7. F 15. F 23. T 8. F 16. T 24. F How you score: No wrong answer A+ 1 wrong answer A 2 wrong answers A- 3 wrong answers B+ 4 wrong answers B 5 wrong answers B- 6 wrong answers C 7 wrong answers D 8 or more wrong answers F
  • 26. 1 6 TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 1.4 Look at the two ships in Figure 1.7. Can you see the differences? Why did the ship change from the traditional to the modern? (a) Traditional ship (b) Modern ship Figure 1.7: Ships from different ages Source: http://scrapety.com http://www.titanic-titanic.com The answer is as people become more intelligent they use their knowledge to improve the ship. They improved the engine, the type of the fuel and many other aspects so that the modern ship performs much more efficiently than the traditional ship. The use of knowledge to build and improve the modern ship is one example of technology. 1.4.1 What is Technology? Did you know the word technology originated from the Greek term technologia which is made up of techne, meaning „craft‰, and logia, meaning „saying‰? The definition has evolved throughout history and now the word technology means different things to different people. Technology is a term that covers both the products created by human beings and the methods used to create those products. In simple term, technology refers to the way of doing something whether a product, such as machine, or a means of organisation. The products of technology have been around since a long time ago such as the invention of the wheel. In modern times the products could be as simple as a pen or more sophisticated like an iPhone.
  • 27. TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 17 The term technology is said to encompass a number of „classes‰ of technology as shown in Table 1.3. Table 1.3: Classes of Technology Classes Descriptions Technology as Objects Tools, machines, instruments, weapons, appliances the physical devices of technical performance Technology as Knowledge The know-how behind technological innovations Technology as Activities What people do their skills, methods, procedures, routines Technology as a Process Begins with a need and ends with a solution Technology as a Socio-technical System The manufacture and use of objects involving people and other objects in combination Source: http://atschool.eduweb.co.uk/trinity/watistec.html The term science and technology always goes hand-in-hand, just like the horse and the carriage. So, is there a relationship between science and technology? 1.4.2 Relationship between Science and Technology In general, science can be regarded as the enterprise that seeks to understand natural phenomena and to arrange these ideas into ordered knowledge. Meanwhile, technology involves the design of products and systems that affect the quality of life, using the knowledge of science where necessary. Science is intimately related to technology and society. For instance, science produces knowledge that results in useful applications through devices and systems. We have evidence of this all around us, from microwave ovens, to compact disc players, to computers. However, the understanding of technology as the application of science knowledge has been challenged by many people. Mayr (1976) said „. . . practical usable criteria for making sharp neat distinctions between science and technology do not exist.‰ Technology is marked by different purposes, different processes, different relationship to established knowledge and a particular relationship to specific contexts of activity. Change in the material environment is the explicit purpose of technology but that is not the case with science. Science, is concerned with the
  • 28. 1 8 TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE understanding of nature to bring about solutions that are more or less effective from different points of view. SELF-CHECK 1.4 In your own words, define technology. ACTIVITY 1.4 In a group of three to four people, select two current inventions that have been said to improve and benefit mankind. List the positive and negative effects of using these inventions. The three elements of science are products, processes and attitudes. The product of science is the body of knowledge of science which comprises facts, concepts, laws, principles and theories. The product of science is as a result of its processes and while the processes are carried out, the attitudes are practised. The processes of science can be done using scientific skills. Science problem can be solved using scientific method. Nature of science refers to the main principles and ideas which provide a description of science methods and inquiry as well as the characteristics of scientific knowledge or products. The scientific method is made up of a series of steps: ask question, do background research, construct a hypothesis, test your hypothesis by doing an experiment, analyse your data and draw a conclusion and communicate your results.
  • 29. TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE 19 Science is related to technology. Technology involves the design of products and systems that affect the quality of life, using the knowledge of science where necessary. Nature of science Science Science and technology Science attitude Science process Science product Scientific literacy Scientific method Carin, A., Sund, R. B. (1989). Teaching science through discovery (6th ed.). Belmont: Thomson Wadsworth. Esler, W. K., Esler, M. K. (2001). Teaching elementary science (8th ed.). USA: Belmont, Wadsworth/Thomson. Fleer, M., Hardy. T. (1996). Science for children. Australia Harcourt Brace: Prentice Hall. Lee, Y. J. et al. (2004). Knowing science and knowing about science: Teaching primary science. Prentice Hall : Singapore. Martin, D. J. (2006). Elementary science methods: A constructivist approach. Methods for constructing understanding. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. Mayr, O. (1976). The science-technology relationship as a historiographics problem. Technology and Culture 17. Science Buddies. (2011). Steps of the scientific method. Retrieved April 20, 2011, from http://www.sciencebuddies.org/mentoring/project_scientific_ method.shtml Shuttleworth, M. (2009). What is the scientific method? Retrieved April 21, 2011, from http://www.experiment-resources.com/what-is-the-scientific-method. html Skamp, K. (2004). Teaching primary science constructively. Southbank, Victoria: Wadsworth Publishing Company, Washington.
  • 30. 2 0 TOPIC 1 TEACHING AND LEARNING SCIENCE The UK Technology Education Centre. What is technology? Retrieved April 22, 2011, from http://atschool.eduweb.co.uk/trinity/watistec.html University of California Museum of Paleontology. Understanding science: What is science? Retrieved April 20, 2011, from http://undsci.berkeley. edu/article/whatisscience_01 Wolfs, F. L. H. (2004). Introduction to scientific method. Retrieved April 20, 2011, from http://teacher.nsrl.rochester.edu/phy_labs/AppendixE/ AppendixE. html.
  • 31. LEARNING OUTCOMES INTRODUCTION Imagine there are two scenarios. In Scenario A, a teacher praises a student for his excellent science project. While in Scenario B, a teacher praises a student for giving a correct answer. What similarity can you see in both of these situations as illustrated in Figure 2.1? Scenario A Scenario B Figure 2.1: Two classroom scenarios Topic 2 Behaviourist Developmental Theories By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Describe the behavioural views of learning; 2. Apply PavlovÊs theories in the teaching of science; 3. Apply ThorndikeÂs theories in the teaching of science; and 4. Apply SkinnerÊs theories in the teaching of science.
  • 32. 2 2 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES The scenarios in Figure 2.1 show the application of the principles of behavioural approach to learning. Did you notice that there is an observable behaviour in both of these situations? In scenario A, the observable behaviour is a teacher praising a student for doing an excellent science project. Meanwhile, in scenario B, the observable behaviour is a teacher praising a student for giving a correct answer. There is also feedback from the teacher, such as, „I am proud of you. Your science project was excellent!‰ and „Very good!‰. Do you know that these are the essential elements of behavioural approach to learning? The behaviourist theories emphasise the study of observable measurable behaviours in order to influence learning. In this topic, you will first be introduced to learning theories and behavioural views of learning. You will then learn about the contributions of three behaviourists namely Pavlov, Thorndike and Skinner. For each of these behavioural scientists, you will study their early experiments and the underlying principles in each of their theories. Finally, you will explore the applications of each of their theories in the teaching of science. ACTIVITY 2.1 Observe a science lesson conducted by a teacher in your school. How does the teacher reinforce good behaviours of the students? Write down all the different feedback the teacher gives to the students. Do you think the feedback that the teacher gives can bring about change in the behaviour of the students? Discuss among your coursemates. BEHAVIOURAL VIEWS OF LEARNING 2.1 First of all, let us have a look at what a learning theory is. A learning theory is a set of principles which aim to explain the process of learning. Do you know why is it important for teachers to know about learning theories? It is because, learning theories help us to understand how pupils learn and why certain techniques encourage learning more than others. Learning theories can be divided into four main schools of thought as shown in Figure 2.2. In this topic,
  • 33. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 23 you will be learning about behavioural learning theories. Cognitive learning theories will be covered later in other topics. Figure 2.2: Classification of learning theories For your information, behavioural learning theories were the earliest theories of learning that were introduced. There are two main groups of behaviourist theories as can be seen in Figure 2.2: (a) Classical conditioning theories (b) Operant conditioning theories Pavlov, Thorndike and Skinner are behavioural scientists who have made major contributions in the field of behavioural learning. PavlovÊs theory is known as classical conditioning theory, while Thorndike and SkinnerÊs theories are known as operant conditioning theories. This behavioural approach emphasises observable behaviours that can be measured. Learning and behaviour are described in terms of stimulus and response relationships (S-R). You will be learning more about the relationship between stimulus and response as you read further. Behaviourists describe individuals as being conditioned by the environment. What does conditioning mean?
  • 34. 2 4 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES Conditioning is a process of teaching, where the learner associates behaviour or the response with a stimulus (McInerney McInerney, 2006). Conditioning occurs through interactions with the environment while learning is said to have occurred when there is an observable change in behaviour. SELF-CHECK 2.1 In your own words, describe the behavioural views of learning. ACTIVITY 2.2 Behaviourism has its own set of specialised terms to describe the learning process. It is worthwhile to be familiar with these terms. Can you find the meaning of the following key behaviourist terms: (a) Stimulus; (b) Response; and (c) Conditioning? PAVLOV’S THEORY 2.2 Now, let us study PavlovÊs classical conditioning theory and its application in the teaching of science. Have you heard of the famous experiment that is shown in Figure 2.3?
  • 35. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 25 Figure 2.3: PavlovÊs experiment on classical conditioning Source: http://www.simplypsychology.org/pavlov.html This experiment was carried out by the Russian scientist, Ivan Pavlov (1849- 1936), to find out if a dogÊs behaviour could be conditioned. His theory is known as classical conditioning. 2.2.1 Pavlov and Classical Conditioning Classical conditioning is one of the first theories of behaviourism. Pavlov showed the simple relationship between a stimulus and a response in teaching (conditioning) an animal to modify its behaviour (McInerney McInerney, 2006). In his experiment, Pavlov conditioned a dog to salivate to the sound of a bell by linking a neutral stimulus to an unconditioned stimulus. In order to better understand classical conditioning, let us look at the observations studied by Pavlov on his dog as illustrated in Figure 2.4.
  • 36. 2 6 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES Figure 2.4: Schematic representation of classical conditioning Source: http://www.simplypsychology.org/pavlov.html In reference to Figure 2.4, let us have a look at Table 2.1 for more information on each phase in classical conditioning. Table 2.1: Phases in Classical Conditioning Phase Description Before conditioning (Figure 2.4 (1 and 2)) A dog salivates when presented with food. Pavlov called the food an unconditioned stimulus (UC) resulting in an unconditioned response (UR) (salivation). A neutral stimulus such as the ringing of a bell did not bring about any response. During conditioning (Figure 2.4 (3)) To condition the response behaviour, Pavlov rang a small bell at the same time as the meat was presented. He carried out many practice sessions where the bell and meat were presented together. After conditioning (Figure 2.4 (4)) The dog eventually learned to salivate when the bell was rung without the meat. The bell which originally had no meaning for the dog, took on meaning and became the conditioned stimulus (CS) because of repeated pairing or association with the food which then became the conditioned response (CR) that is salivation.
  • 37. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 27 This early research demonstrated that a stimulus that readily leads to a response can be paired with a neutral stimulus in order to bring about learning. This is the essence of classical conditioning. We sometimes learn new responses as a result of two stimuli being presented at the same time. As seen in Figure 2.4, it starts with two things that are already connected with each other, which are, food and salivation. Then, paired with a third thing, which is the bell with the conditioned stimulus, which is the food over several trials. Eventually, this third thing may become so strongly associated, that it has acquired the power to produce a new behaviour. The animal is „conditioned‰ to respond to the third thing or stimulus. ACTIVITY 2.3 Classical conditioning is often used in advertisements. In groups, study advertisements on television or in print. Describe how classical conditioning is used to sell the product. Use the following terms in your description: unconditioned stimulus, unconditioned response, neutral stimulus, conditioned stimulus and conditioned response. 2.2.2 Common Processes in Classical Conditioning PavlovÊs work also identified three other processes in classical conditioning, as shown in Table 2.2. Table 2.2: Other Processes in Classical Conditioning Other Processes Description Generalisation Pavlov used bells of different tones. The dog still salivated even though the tones of the bells were different. The dog responded even though the tones of the bells were different or nearly the same. The dog is capable of stimulus generalisation and is able to generalise across different tones. Discrimination The dogs could also respond to one tone of the bell and not to others that were similar. Pavlov did this by making sure the food was only presented with only that one tone and not others. He called this stimulus discrimination. The dog is able to differentiate among different tones. Extinction Extinction occurs when a conditioned stimulus (bell) is presented repeatedly but is not followed by the unconditioned stimulus (food). The conditioned response (salivating) gradually fades away and disappears. Pavlov continued ringing the bell and not following with the food. The dog gradually did not salivate. Extinction had taken place.
  • 38. 2 8 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES ACTIVITY 2.4 In groups, discuss the situations in your science class where you can use the following processes to facilitate learning: (a) Generalisation; (b) Discrimination; and (c) Extinction. 2.2.3 Applications of Pavlov’s Theory in the Teaching of Science PavlovÊs theory helps to explain why children behave the way they do in certain circumstances. Many childrenÊs attitudes are learnt through classical conditioning. For example, some children learn to dislike science or mathematics, not because the subject is difficult but because the subject has been paired with fear producing stimuli such as strict teachers. Once you understand the process of classical conditioning, you will be able to understand the importance of creating a healthy classroom environment. For example, if you treat your students with warmth and care each time during their science lesson, the students will begin to associate the science class with a warm and caring teacher. Your warm and caring attitude are the unconditioned stimuli. The science class becomes the conditioned stimulus which the students have associated with the warmth of the teacher. The unconditioned response is the initial response to the teacher. The students develop a positive emotional response to science. This is the conditioned response and the whole process is illustrated in Figure 2.5.
  • 39. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 29 Figure 2.5: Process of classical conditioning Now, let us study the applications of PavlovÊs classical conditioning theory in science classrooms. Think of how you can use them in your science lesson. Applying PavlovÊs Classical Conditioning Theory in a Science Classroom 1. Provide a safe and warm environment so that the science classroom will be associated with a positive emotion or attitude. 2. Associate positive and pleasant events with learning tasks. For example, make science experiments fun by having a relaxed and comfortable atmosphere in the science room or laboratory. 3. Help students to risk anxiety-producing situations voluntarily and successfully. For example, pair an anxiety-provoking situation, such as performing in front of a group, with pleasant surroundings and a non-threatening atmosphere. This helps the student learn new associations. Instead of feeling anxious and tense in these situations, the student will stay relaxed and calm. 4. Help students recognise differences and similarities among situations, so they can discriminate and generalise appropriately. For example, assure students who are anxious about taking a major examination that this test is like all other tests that they have sat for. 5. Use motivation to produce positive behaviour. Source: Woolfolk (2001)
  • 40. 3 0 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES SELF-CHECK 2.2 1. What are the main principles in PavlovÊs theory? 2. Discuss with examples how you can use PavlovÊs theory to teach science. THORNDIKE’S THEORY 2.3 Edward L. Thorndike (1874-1949) introduced a theory of learning called connectionism. His theory viewed learning as forming „connections‰ between a stimulus (S) and a response (R). He conducted experiments with various animals. He placed a hungry animal in a puzzle box and food outside the box. He then observed how it learnt to get out. He believed that learning occurred through trial and error. His classic experiment with a hungry cat is shown in Figure 2.6. Figure 2.6: ThorndikeÊs puzzle box Source: http://www.csus.edu/indiv/w/wickelgren/psyc001/ ClassLectureThreeOperant.html The puzzle box as shown in Figure 2.6 had a lever which opened the door. After much trial and error, the cat learned to associate pressing the lever (stimulus) with opening the door (response). This S-R connection when established resulted in a satisfying state of affairs (escape from box). The same cat was placed in the box over and over again. Each time the cat was placed back in the box, it took a shorter time to get out. The cat had made connection between its behaviour and the reward. Thorndike concluded that cats
  • 41. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 31 learn faster if they are rewarded for their behaviour and that learning is incremental, that is, it occurred in small steps. Can you see any differences between ThorndikeÊs theory and PavlovÊs classical conditioning theory? Did you notice that the learner in classical conditioning is seen to be passive and responding to the environment? In the case of PavlovÊs dog, it responded to the stimulus of food. Whereas the learner in ThorndikeÊs theory is seen actively responding to the environment. The cat pressed the lever (response) to get to the food (stimulus). This means that the learner plays an active part in the changes of behaviour. The learner also operates on the environment by responding to the stimulus. This is known as operant conditioning. Thorndike established the basis for operant conditioning but the person thought to be responsible for developing the concept is Skinner. We will learn about SkinnerÊs theory later. 2.3.1 Thorndike’s Laws Based on his experiments, Thorndike proposed three laws as can be seen in Table 2.3. Table 2.3: ThorndikeÊs Laws ThorndikeÊs Laws Description Law of Effect Law of effect is the most famous of his laws. Any act that produces a satisfying effect in a given situation will tend to be repeated in that situation. For example, if a response (e.g. answering a science question) is followed by a rewarding experience (e.g. student gets right answer and is praised by the teacher), the response will be strengthened and become a habit. Law of Exercise The more frequent the S-R connection, the stronger it will be. For example, the connection between a stimulus (e.g. getting the right answer) and response (e.g. doing a science question) is strengthened with practice and weakened when practice is discontinued. Law of Readiness Readiness to do an act is satisfying. Individuals learn best when they are physically, mentally and emotionally ready. If students are ready, they will make more progress in learning.
  • 42. 3 2 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 2.3.2 Applications of Thorndike’s Theory in the Teaching of Science Thorndike stressed the importance of stimulus-response connections. So, the task of the teacher is to arrange the classroom and learning activities to enhance connections between a stimulus and a response. The following shows the various ways you can apply ThorndikeÊs theory in a science classroom Applying ThorndikeÊs Theory in a Science Classroom 1. Give rewards or reinforcement for positive behaviour. This will establish the stimulus-response connection. 2. Use drill practices to associate between a stimulus and a response. This will strengthen the S-R connection. 3. Use routines to help students „practice‰ desired behaviours until they become a habit. For example, give step-by step routines on how to write science reports. 4. Get students ready to learn by creating interest in science with interesting demonstrations and activities. 5. Make sure studentsÊ basic needs are satisfied. If students are hungry, tired or troubled, they will have little interest in learning. SELF-CHECK 2.3 Discuss the implications of ThorndikeÊs theories on the teaching and learning of science.
  • 43. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 33 ACTIVITY 2.5 For each of the ways of applying ThorndikeÊs theory given before, suggest examples you can use in your science lessons. Carry out your suggestions in your science classes. Record your observations and conclusions. SKINNER’S THEORY 2.4 Have you ever tried to train your pet? How did you do it? Look at Figure 2.7 which shows trained animals performing. Figure 2.7: Animals performing tricks Source: http://drsophiayin.com/resources/cattricks, http: http://www.insidethemagic.net/2011/04/highlights-one-ocean-makes-a-big-splash-at-seaworld- orlando-debut-wetting-guests-with-shamu-size-fun/ The complex tricks performed by the cat and the dolphins shown in Figure 2.7 are the result of many hours of training. The training or conditioning that is carried out is based largely on the principles of behavioural learning theories. „Of all the theories of behavioural learning, operant conditioning probably has the greatest impact on science teachers.‰ (Hassard, 1992).
  • 44. 3 4 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES As was mentioned earlier in this topic, Burrhus Frederic Skinner (1904-1990) is responsible for formulating the operant conditioning theory. Like Pavlov and Thorndike, Skinner believed in the stimulus-response pattern of conditioned behaviour. Skinner thought that behaviour (R) is controlled by a stimulus (S) and he called it operant behaviour. Do you still remember what operant behaviours are? Yes. Operant behaviours are behaviours that operate on the environment to receive reinforcement. That is why SkinnerÊs theory is also known as operant conditioning. 2.4.1 Skinner and Operant Conditioning SkinnerÊs early studies were on animals like rats and pigeons. He devised an apparatus called the Skinner box as shown in Figure 2.8. Figure 2.8: SkinnerÊs box Source: http://www.appsychology.com/Book/Behavior/operant_conditioning.htm A hungry rat was placed in this box. The box contained a small brass lever that, if pressed, delivered a pellet of food. Once it was left alone in the box, the rat moved about exploring. At some point in time, it pressed the lever and a small food pellet was released. The rat ate this and soon pressed the lever again. The food pellet reinforced pressing of the lever.
  • 45. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 35 Can you identify the stimulus and response in the example above? Yes, you are right. The stimulus is the food pellet and the response is the pressing of the lever. Which one occurred first the stimulus or the response? Yes, the response occurred first, that is, the rat carried out the response (pressing lever) to get the stimulus (food pellet). The rat operated on its environment. Can you see how the rat in SkinnerÊs box is different from PavlovÊs dog? What happens if the rat is not given any more food pellet? Skinner disconnected the food dispenser. When the rat pressed the lever, no food was released. The rat pressed the lever less and less and finally stopped. That is, the operant response has undergone extinction with non-reinforcement just as in classical conditioning. Skinner progressively reinforced behaviour that came close to the goal behaviour that is, pressing of the lever to get food. He called this shaping. In this way, the animal is gradually taught to perform quite complex behaviour. SkinnerÊs work resulted in the development of a number of principles of behaviour that have direct implications on teaching. Reinforcement which is the key principle in SkinnerÊs theory will be explored in more detail in the next section. 2.4.2 Reinforcement In psychology, reinforcement is any consequence that strengthens the behaviour it follows. Consequences are simply environmental events that follow the behaviour. This can be summarised as shown in Figure 2.9. Figure 2.9: Reinforcement Source: Woolfolk (2001) Consequences to a large extent will determine whether a person will repeat the behaviour that led to the consequences. The type of consequences given and also the timing of the consequences are important in determining if the behaviour is to be strengthened or repeated. We will now look at different types of reinforcement and reinforcement schedules.
  • 46. 3 6 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES There are two types of reinforcement as can be seen in Figure 2.10. Figure 2.10: Types of reinforcement The differences between both of these types of reinforcement are given in Table 2.4. Table 2.4: Differences between Positive and Negative Reinforcement Positive Reinforcement Negative Reinforcement A pleasant consequence increases the probability of that behaviour occurring in the future. Taking away something negative to increase the probability of that behaviour occurring again. The pleasant consequence can be verbal praise, good grades, tokens, motivating words, winning certificates, earning privileges, facial expressions or a feeling of increased accomplishment or satisfaction. Unpleasant consequences are removed such as nagging or extra homework. Example: A student gives the correct answer as in situation B in Figure 2.1. The teacher praises the student. The student tries harder to give the correct response the next time. Example: A teacher announces to the class that they have no homework for that day because they have done an excellent science project. Students work harder for the next science project.
  • 47. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 37 ACTIVITY 2.6 Study Table 2.2 again. Give another two examples of each of the positive and negative reinforcement that you can use in your science classroom. Discuss your answers in groups. 2.4.3 Punishment Now, have a look at Figure 2.8 again. If every time the rat touches the lever, it receives an electric shock it will eventually learn to stop pressing the lever. This is punishment and can be summarised as in Figure 2.11. Figure 2.11: Punishment Source: Woolfolk (2001) For example, a student gives the wrong answer and is punished by the teacher. The teacher makes the student stand in front of the class. The student will then try not to give the wrong answer the next time. The undesirable response is reduced. What do you think of punishing students this way? Generally, reinforcement is preferred over punishment in modifying behaviour because punishment can bring about undesired emotional effects in the students. Can you suggest another way you can try to solve the teacherÊs problem above? 2.4.4 Reinforcement Schedules What do you know about reinforcement schedules? Reinforcement schedules refer to the pattern and frequency in which a particular response is reinforced.
  • 48. 3 8 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES In the beginning stages of conditioning, Skinner reinforced the animal each time it turned the lever. This is called a continuous reinforcement schedule. After a number of trials, the animal slowly learns the desired behaviour. At this point, reinforcement is moved to an intermittent reinforcement schedule. An intermittent schedule allows for behaviour to be repeated but without constant reinforcement. This is shown in Figure 2.12. Figure 2.12: Reinforcement schedules As can be seen in Figure 2.12, there are two types of intermittent schedules: (a) Interval Schedule In the interval schedule, reinforcers are given based on the amount of time that passes between responses.
  • 49. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 39 (b) Ratio Schedule In the ratio schedule, reinforcers are given based on number of responses the learner gives between reinforcements. Interval and ratio schedules may be fixed or variable. Now, let us read the following case study and try to solve Encik HamdanÊs problem. Case Study Lisa is a student in Encik HamdanÊs class. She is always very excited during the science lessons and just shouts out answers without raising her hand. Encik Hamdan wants to reinforce LisaÊs appropriate behaviour that is raising her hand to answer the questions with points that she can use to exchange for play time. Look at the following reinforcement schedules. Identify which type of schedule it is and decide which schedule or combination of schedules will be the most effective to use with Lisa: (a) Schedule A Give Lisa points each time she raises her hands. (b) Schedule B Give Lisa points every third time she raises her hand. (c) Schedule C Give Lisa points after she raises her hand a variable number of times. 2.4.5 Applications of Skinner’s Theory in the Teaching of Science After learning about the principles of SkinnerÊs theory, let us look at how we can apply it effectively in a science classroom. Study the following guidelines on how you can apply SkinnerÊs theory in a science classroom.
  • 50. 4 0 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES Applying SkinnerÊs Theory in the Science Classroom 1. Reinforce positive behaviours. For example praise students when they complete their work well. 2. Determine what behaviours you want. For example, carrying out science process skills correctly Reinforce these behaviours when they occur. 3. Tell students what behaviours you want. Science teachers deal with a complex classroom environment which involves safety issues. Specifying behaviours that you expect in the classroom will ensure responsible and independent learners. 4. Create „chains of desired student behaviours‰ by establishing reinforcement for those desired behaviours. For example, give students gold stars for each time they clean up after an experiment. 5. Reinforce expected behaviour as soon as it happens. For example, stars or tokens are given as soon as students collect work materials and begin experiments. 6. Give praise and other rewards to students who even get desired behaviours partially right (SkinnerÊs shaping). This is rewarding them for effort. Eventually, as students can do the desired behaviour correctly you can remove the rewards. For example, writing science reports neatly. When they exhibit these behaviours, reinforce them and tell them why. 7. Reinforcement is best used at variable intervals (SkinnerÊ schedules). For example, give rewards for following the rules for science group discussions at intervals. You can also take pictures of students doing projects and show these pictures once in a while to motivate students. 8. Develop your science lesson from simpler to more complex tasks. Give reinforcements at every concept learnt and continue to more complex ones.
  • 51. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 41 SELF-CHECK 2.7 What are the main principles in PavlovÊs, ThorndikeÊs and SkinnerÂs theories? Present your answers in the form of a mind map. ACTIVITY 2.7 1. In groups, complete the following table to show what you have learnt about SkinnerÊs operant conditioning theory. Essentials of operant conditioning Explanation with examples Operant Shaping Reinforcement Positive reinforcement Negative reinforcement Punishment Reinforcement schedule 2. Discuss among your classmates what are any other ways can SkinnerÊs theory be applied in the science classroom. Behaviourism refers to the study of observable and measurable behaviour. In behaviourism, learning and behaviour are described in terms of stimulus and response relationships. A stimulus is an event that activates behaviour; a response is an observable reaction to a stimulus. Behaviourists describe individuals as being conditioned by the environment.
  • 52. 4 2 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES There are two main groups of behaviourist theories: classical conditioning and operant conditioning. Classical conditioning, first described by Ivan Pavlov, is a theory that explains how we sometimes learn new responses as a result of two stimuli being presented at the same time. Three other processes in classical conditioning are generalisation, discrimination and extinction. In operant conditioning, as presented by Skinner and Thorndike, the learner actively „operates‰ on their environment to reach certain goals. Thorndike stressed that learning involves stimulus-response connections. He formulated three laws of learning: law of effect, law of exercise and law of readiness. SkinnerÊs theory focussed on operants or behaviours that are affected by what happens after the reinforcement (consequences). Reinforcement is the process of using a reinforcement to strengthen behaviour. There are two types of reinforcement: positive and negative reinforcement. Reinforcement schedules are the pattern and frequency in which a particular response is reinforced. The principles of the theories of Pavlov, Thorndike and Skinner can be used in the teaching of science. The teacherÊs job is to create a science learning environment in which certain behaviours (the acquisition of knowledge, concepts and skills) are increased and reinforced.
  • 53. TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 43 Behaviourism Classical conditioning Conditioned responses Conditioned stimulus Conditioning Connectionism Consequences Continuous reinforcement schedule Discrimination Extinction Generalisation Intermittent reinforcement schedule Negative reinforcement Operant Operant conditioning Positive reinforcement Punishment Reinforcement Reinforcement schedule Response Shaping Stimulus Unconditioned response Unconditioned stimulus Abruscato, J. (2000). Teaching children science A discovery approach. USA: Allyn Bacon. Borich, G. D., Tombari, M. L. (1996). Educational psychology: A contemporary approach. New York: Allyn Bacon. Culatta, R. (2011). Behavioral theories of learning. Retrieved May 8, 2011, from http://www.innovativelearning.com/educational_psychology/ behaviorism/webquest.html EmTech. (2007). Learning theories. Retrieved May 7, 2011, from http://www.emtech.net/learning_theories.htm Hassard, J. (1992). Minds on science Middle and secondary school methods. USA: Harper Collins. Mclnerney, D. M., Mclnerney, V. (2006). Educational psychology-constructing learning. Australia: Pearson Prentice Hall.
  • 54. 4 4 TOPIC 2 BEHAVIOURIST DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES Northern College. (2003). Learning theories Classical conditioning. Retrieved April 27, 2011, from http://www.northern.ac.uk/learning/NC Material/Psychology/lifespan%20folder/Learningtheories.htm Utah State University. (2000). Positive interaction procedures. Retrieved May 8, 2011, from http://www.usu.edu/teachall/text/behavior/LRBIpdfs/ Positive.pdf Woolfolk, A. ( 2001). Educational psychology. USA: Allyn Bacon.
  • 55. Topic 3 Cognitive Developmental Theories 1 LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain the main features of cognitive learning theories; 2. Describe PiagetÊs theory; 3. Apply PiagetÊs theory in the teaching of science; 4. Describe BrunerÊs theories; and 5. Apply BrunerÊs theories in the teaching of science. INTRODUCTION In the last topic, you have learnt about behaviourist learning theories. What do you think are the main limitation to these theories? According to behaviourist theories, the respond that we show as a result of repetitive stimuli given to us is called learning. As can be seen in Figure 3.1, this theory assumes that a learner is essentially passive in responding to environmental stimuli. The behaviour is shaped through positive reinforcement or negative reinforcement. Positive reinforcement and negative reinforcement will increase the possibility that the prior behaviour will recur. Positive reinforcement indicates the application of a stimulus, while negative reinforcement indicates the withholding of a stimulus. Learning is therefore defined as a change in behaviour in the learner. This however reduces complex human behaviour to simple cause and effect. Actually, there are a lot of factors that can influence learning other than just respond to the given stimulus. We will learn about this in this topic.
  • 56. 4 6 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 Figure 3.1: Behaviourist Learning Theory Source: http://tanvirdhaka.blogspot.com/ In this topic, we will learn about cognitive learning theory and how we can apply this theory in the teaching of science. COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORY 3.1 As a result of the limitation of behaviourist theory, a group of psychologists propose a new approach to explain the process of learning. This new approach is called the cognitive learning theory. Figure 3.2: Cognitive learning theory Source: http://psybibs.revdak.com This approach recognises the vital role of the human brain in the process of learning. Cognitive experts believed that a lot of thought processes happen in our brain that help us to interpret, organise, store and receive information before we could respond to the stimulus. These are called cognitive processes (see Figure 3.2). As we learn, our cognitive structures in our brain are changed or modified. These structures enable us to interpret, store and retrieve information. Thus, according to Ormrod (1999), there are two main features underlying this cognitive approach: (a) That the memory system is an active organised processor of information. (b) That prior knowledge plays an important role in learning.
  • 57. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 47 Kohler, Tolman, Lewin, Piaget and Bruner are among the psychologists who contributed to the cognitive learning theory. Atherton (2011) summarised cognitive theory as theories that are interested in how people understand material. In order to fully understand this, we should also include the study on: (a) Aptitude and capacity to learn; (b) Learning styles; and (c) Constructivism as these three aspects influences how people learn. But we are not going to discuss them in this topic as the focus in this topic is introducing you to the cognitive learning theories, specifically Piaget and Bruner learning theories.. SELF-CHECK 3.1 Explain the difference between behavioural and cognitive theory. COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORY EXPONENTS 3.2 Just imagine that you are at your desk with a pen in your hand and staring at an empty book. You are wondering the best approach for a lesson on „Basic needs of living things‰ for Year 4 students. What is your basis for planning the lesson? Learning theories could be one of the things that you could use to plan an effective lesson. As a start, let us learn about PiagetÊs learning theory. 3.2.1 Piaget’s Learning Theory Jean Piaget is a Swiss biologist and psychologist. After working with Alfred Binet, Piaget developed an interest in the intellectual development of children. Based upon his observations of his children and their processes of making sense of the world around them, he eventually developed a four-stage model of how the mind processes the new information it encountered. These four stages are illustrated in Figure 3.3.
  • 58. 4 8 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 Figure 3.3: PiagetÊs theory on stages of human development Cognitive development involves changes in cognitive processes and abilities. In Piaget's view, early cognitive development involves processes based upon actions and later progresses into changes in mental operations. As seen in Figure 3.3, each stage is characterised by new abilities and ways of processing information. Piaget believes that, all children pass through these stages in this order and that no child can skip a stage, although different children pass through the stages at different rates. The same individuals may perform tasks associated with different stages at the same time, particularly at points of transition into a new stage (Slavin, 2006). You would have probably learned this theory in detail in your psychology course. If not, you can gather a lot of information from various resources to read and understand fully about this theory. This is necessary because soon we are going to look at how to apply this theory in a science classroom.
  • 59. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 49 3.2.2 Identifying the Stages of Development There are four stages of human development as mentioned by Piaget. This means that as a teacher, the first thing that you need to do is to identify at what stage your students are. This is important because it allows you to plan suitable and appropriate teaching and learning activities for your students. Do you know how to identify your studentÊs stage of development? One way is to look at the characteristics of your student and compare them to the list given in Figure 3.3. You could also conduct simple experiments as Piaget had done when he was doing his research. Take time to do Activity 3.1 to understand the experiments that could be used to identify your students' stage of development. ACTIVITY 3.1 Study the following situations. Determine the stage of development described by the situation. Situation What stage? 1 Play with a child and then, disappear behind the paper. The child becomes distressed at your disappearance. 2 Show a child four marbles in a row, then, spread them out. The child says that there are now more marbles than before. 3 If you take four one-inch square pieces of felt, and lay them on a six-by-six cloth together in the centre, and then, the same square spread out in the corner, the child says that the squares cover the same area in both cases.
  • 60. 5 0 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 4 A set of cards have letters on one side and numbers on the other. If a card has a vowel on one side, then it has an even number on the other side. Take a look at the cards below and tell me, which cards do I need to turn over to tell if this rule is actually true? 5 You have two five inch sticks laid parallel to each other, and then, move one of them a little. She says the two sticks are still having the same length even though it now extends beyond the other. 6 Fill a tall glass of water and a short glass of water of the same volume and ask which glass has more. The child says the tall glass. Source: http://webspace.ship.edu/cgboer/piaget.html Answers: 1. Sensorimotor period 2. Pre-operational period 3. Concrete operational period 4. Formal operational period 5. Concrete operational period 6. Pre-operational period By looking at the stages, we could see that generally children in Year 1 and Year 2 could probably be still in the pre-operational stage, while Year 3 till Year 5 students would be in the concrete operational stage. By Year 6, they would start to be in their formal operational stage. So, what should you do to teach them?
  • 61. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 51 SELF-CHECK 3.2 What are the four stages of human development according to Piaget? ACTIVITY 3.2 Do you think the classification of ages by Piaget still apply in the present time? Discuss with your coursemates. Now, read the following guidelines which could help you to develop suitable tasks based on PiagetÊs theory. What would your classroom look like if you apply PiagetÊs theories in your teaching and learning? 3.2.3 Applications of Piaget’s Theory in Teaching Children at Various Stages of Development Piaget outlined several principles for building cognitive structures or schemes. Children learn by observing and try to understand their experiences by comparing their experiences to their existing schemes in their mind. When children encounter a new experience in their environment, they will try to explain their experience based on their cognitive structures or schemes. If their new experience is similar to their schemes, they will add the new information into their previously existing schemes. This process is called assimilation. However, if the new experience is different from their existing schemes (according to their perception), they would alter their existing schemes or new schemes may also be developed during this process. When the existing scheme is modified or altered, then learning has also taken place. The process whereby children has to modify the new experiences before incoprorating it into their scheme is called accomodation. This procceses is summarised in Figure 3.4.
  • 62. 5 2 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 Figure 3.4: Reaching equilibrium through assimilation and accommodation processes Source: http://eprints.oum/edu.my/411/1/enriching_nantha.pdf In short, you as the teacher should present the new knowledge as close as possible to the childrenÊs prior knowledge. As a result, the children could assimilate rather than take time to accomodate the new experiences or information in order for learning to take place. Bearing in mind on the principles mentioned earlier, you could use the following guidelines or tips so that your childrenÊs schemes will develop through time. Let us start with the pre-operational stage, concrete operational stage and finally, formal operational stage.
  • 63. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 53 Pre-operational Stage (Age 2 - 7 years) 1. Provide natural objects such as leaves, stones, twigs and real animals for the children to manipulate. This is important at this stage as children learn through their senses. 2. Provide opportunities for the children to begin grouping things into classes, such as, living/non-living and animal/plant. When doing this, they are studying the attributes of the objects and noting the similar and different attributes at the same time. 3. Provide experience that gives children an opportunity to lessen some of their geocentricism. For example, have them listen to other childrenÊs stories about what was observed on a trip to the zoo. 4. Use concrete props and visual aids whenever possible as the aids help the children to 'seeÊ what you try to explain. 5. Make instructions relatively short, using actions as well as words. For example, add one spoonful of salt to the beaker of water. Then stir. 6. Be sensitive to the possibility that children may have different meanings for the same word or different words for the same meaning. Children may also expect everyone to understand words they have invented. 7. Plan a lot of hands-on activities so that they have enough practice with the skills that will serve as building blocks for more complex skills. For example, make sure you give them plenty of practice in observing as observation is the most basic science process skill but this is the foundation for all subsequent skills. 8. Provide a wide range of experiences in order to build a foundation for concept learning and language. This is important as different children have different learning styles.
  • 64. 5 4 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 Concrete Operational Stage 1. Reinforce and continue using concrete and hands-on materials. Prepare a lot of concrete teaching aids to help the children to understand the concept. For example, give children the opportunities to observe real animals when you want to explain about physical characteristics of animals. Bring fish, butterfly or bird to the class so that the students could use their senses to observe the physical characteristics of these animals. You should not be satisfied by just bringing in animal pictures and ask students to study the pictures and learn about the physical characteristics of animals. They can manipulate ideas mentally, but they need props as the ideas presented to them continue to become more abstract. 2. Organise the materials and concepts presented. Give short and precise instructions when you want them to do the activities. The experimental procedures must consist of only a few steps. If the procedures are long, break them up into a few sections. Be concise and brief when you are explaining concepts. The attention span of these students is longer than for pre-operational children, but they often want to focus on something new. 3. Always allow students to relate their prior experiences before presenting a new topic. For example, if you want to introduce the concept of food chain, you should use animals familiar to your students, so that they know the types of food that those animals eat. Then only, can they build a food chain. When they have understood the concept of food chain, you can extend or elaborate with other less familiar animals. 4. Let the children classify or group things. Use graphic organisers like matrices, charts, diagrams and table to make it easier. This would improve and develop their logical ability. You could also use crossword puzzles and word mazes. Give more divergent questions rather than convergent questions because the former give children more opportunity to think and stimulate imagination. Give them opportunities to classify objects and ideas into increasingly complex groupings. Without doing this, they would never become formal operational. 5. Offer children many experiences to use their acquired abilities with respect to the observation, classification and arrangement of objects according to some property. Any science activities that include observation, collection and sorting of objects should be able to be done with some ease. You should use activities involving living things and non-living things that are familiar and concrete to them. You should be able to successfully introduce many physical science activities that include more abstract concepts such as space, time and number.
  • 65. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 55 6. Use familiar objects and ideas to explain more complex concepts. They need practice at logical thinking as well as motivation towards starting really abstract thinking. 7. Present problems that require logical thinking of a relatively non-abstract level. They need practice dealing with abstractions. What they cannot do is abstractions on abstractions. Formal Operational Stage (Age 11 through Adulthood) 1. Even if at this stage the students can visualise abstract concepts, you could still continue to use strategies that are effective with concrete operational thinkers. Why? Reason for this is because at this stage concrete thinking is still easier. Let say, you ask someone to describe to you how to go from your school to the shopping mall. Would you be able to visualise the route or would you get a map so that you could reach the mall easily without getting lost? 2. Build abstractions upon solidly understood concrete concepts. Abstractions are essential for complex ideas, but the concrete ideas would help in the early stage of transition from concrete to formal operational stage. 3. Give them opportunities to explore hypothetical questions. Students at this stage could formulate their own hypothesis on problems that they encounter and plan investigations to test their hypothesis. If you do not give them opportunities and encouragement, the students would not be able to progress beyond concrete operational stage to formal operational stage. In other words, you should give them the opportunities to experiment on their own rather than conducting experiments that you have planned. 4. Give them opportunities to solve problems that seem impossible to solve. Students take pride and build self-confidence when they are able to solve problems that they could not solve when they were less mature. 5. Integrate concrete concepts with broad concepts and encourage them to apply concepts in numerous settings. This could be done by encouraging them to generalise the conclusions from their experiments by linking the concepts in real life setting. In this way, the learning is meaningful and more importantly, they will apply their learning in their lives, as that is the purpose of learning science.
  • 66. 5 6 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 6. Respect and encourage lateral thinking that involves insightful hypothetical reasoning. Even when they are incorrect, their attempt at hypothetical thinking may be a productive step in the right direction. 7. Model effective formal operational thinking to them. You are probably capable of formal operational thinking yourself and children can use you as a productive model while developing their own skills. SELF-CHECK 3.3 Imagine that you want to introduce the concept of transparent, translucent and opaque materials to your students. What are some example of objects that you will use? ACTIVITY 3.3 1. Select a topic from Year 1, Year 3 and Year 6 from a primary science curriculum specification and discuss two learning-teaching activities that suit PiagetianÊs learning theory. 2. Compare the activities for the different steps of human development. How are they different? Give reasons based on PiagetÊs theory. Share your answer with your classmates. BRUNER’S THEORIES 3.3 We teach a subject not to produce little living libraries on that subject, but rather to get a student to think . . . for himself, to consider matters as an historian does, to take part in the process of knowledge-getting. Knowing is a process, not a product. (Bruner, 1966) Jerome Bruner is another influential psychologist who introduced many theories that could be applied in the science classroom. In this subtopic, we are going to discuss some of his theories and how to apply them in the science classroom.
  • 67. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 57 Bruner introduced many ideas in explaining the process of learning. His work includes the significance of categorisation in learning, the ideas of readiness for learning, motivation for learning, intuitive and analytical thinking, inductive thinking, discovery learning and spiral curriculum. We are not going to discuss all of his ideas. Instead, we are only going to discuss his theory on discovery learning, inductive thinking and the three stages of cognitive growth. 3.3.1 Discovery Learning The notion of discovery learning had been discussed by Rousseau, Pestalozzi and Dewey. Nevertheless, modern discovery learning environments were initiated by Jerome Bruner (Mukerji, 2002). He believes that for learning to be meaningful, students must actively be engaged in identifying principles and rules for themselves, rather than relying on the teacher's explanations. Therefore, learning environments must provide situations, in which students are called upon to question, explore or experiment. In typical discovery learning environments, information and examples are presented to students and the students work with the information and examples until they discover the interrelationships. As a result, students may be more likely to remember concepts and knowledge discovered on their own. Models that are based upon discovery learning includes: (a) Guided Discovery The student receives problems to solve, but the teacher provides hints and directions about how to solve the problem to keep the student on track. Guided discovery may require more or less time depending on the task, but tends to result in better long term retention and transfer as the students are involve actively while learning takes place. Unlike true discovery, the instructor directs what problems the learners will learn and sets the pace that they will learn at. The students do, however, have to figure out how to solve the problems that they are given. Generally, the students first discover specific topics and then move to more general ones. (b) Problem-based Learning Problem-based learning (PBL) is an approach that challenges students to learn through engagement in a real problem. It challenges students to seek solutions to real-world (open-ended) problems by themselves or in groups, rather than learn primarily through lectures or textbooks. You are going to learn this approach in detail later.
  • 68. 5 8 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 (c) Simulation-based Learning Simulation is a technique to replace and amplify real experiences that mirror substantial aspects of the real world in a fully interactive fashion. Simulation makes imitated situations available to the learner to practice and refine necessary skills, rather than having them jump right into the real experience. It also provides an immersive learning experience, where skills, process, and knowledge can all be enhanced in a way reality cannot. (d) Case-based Learning Using a case-based approach engages students in discussion of specific situations, typically real-world examples. This method is learner-centered, and involves intense interaction between the participants. Case-based learning focuses on the building of knowledge and the group works together to examine the case. The instructor's role is that of a facilitator and the students collaboratively address problems from a perspective that requires analysis. Much of case-based learning involves learners striving to resolve questions that have no single right answer. (e) Incidental Learning Incidental learning describes the process in which a child's knowledge is gained from interactions with the environment. This learning process lacks a formal structure or objectives, and is guided by real-world experiences. Through incidental learning, children learn fundamental skills that they will use throughout life. Discovery learning is a learning method that encourages students to ask questions and formulate their own tentative answers, and to deduce general principles from practical examples or experiences (Thorsett, 2002). It is a learning situation in which the principal content of what is to be learned is not given but must be independently discovered by the student. In other words, discovery learning can be defined simply as a learning situation in which the principal content of what is to be learned is not given, but must be independently discovered by the learner, making the student an active participant in his learning. Ormrod (2000) defines discovery learning as an approach to instruction through which children interact with their environment by exploring and manipulating objects, wrestling with questions and controversies, or performing experiments. There are certain principles that you need to follow if you want to use discovery learning in your class and make it work. Among others, the instructions: (a) Must be concerned with the experiences and contexts that make the student willing and able to learn (readiness).
  • 69. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 59 (b) Must be structured so that it can be easily grasped by the student (spiral organisation). (c) Should be designed to facilitate extrapolation and/or fill in the gaps (going beyond the information given). If the principles are not adhered to, it would only: (a) Cause confusion to the student if no initial framework is available. (b) Lead to inefficiency and be time consuming. (c) Result in student frustration. (d) Make you fail to detect problems and misconceptions. ACTIVITY 3.4 In a group, discuss the meaning of: (a) Guided discovery; (b) Problem-based learning; (c) Simulation-based learning; (d) Case-based learning; and (e) Incidental learning. 3.3.2 Inductive Thinking Bruner believes classroom learning should take place through inductive reasoning. This reasoning is done by forming generalisations based on the specific examples given. This is an important cognitive strategy in discovery learning environments. It encourages students to actively use their intuition, imagination and creativity. It also relies more on providing students with a range of experiences, which gradually increase their familiarity with new concepts before attempting to draw them together into a coherent understanding of the new concept. If you are going to teach concepts inductively means you do not define or explain the concept in the beginning of the lesson. You should provide various activities so that the students will use their reasoning to gradually understand the concept that you want the students to form. This can be seen in Figure 3.5.
  • 70. 6 0 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 Figure 3.5: Inductive approach to instruction For example, if the students are presented with enough examples of triangles and non-triangles (as shown in Figure 3.6), they will eventually find out what the basic properties of a triangle must be. Figure 3.6: Forming a concept a triangle Source: http://academics.rmu.edu/~tomei/ed711psy/c_bruner.htm
  • 71. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 61 Do you realise that discovery learning encompasses the scientific model? Children identify problems, generate hypotheses, test each hypothesis against collected data and apply conclusions to new situations. Due to this reason, discovery learning should be used in the teaching and learning of science as it fits to the nature of science itself. We have already discussed about scientific method and the nature of science in Topic 1 of this module. ACTIVITY 3.5 Discuss the concept of discovery learning by using a mind map. 3.3.3 Stages of Cognitive Growth In the previous subtopic, we have identified the stages of cognitive development suggested by Piaget. According to him, we progress from sensorimotor to pre-operational, concrete operational and finally formal operational. Like Piaget, Bruner believes in stages of instruction based on development. There are three stages according to BrunerÊs theory as can be seen in Table 3.1 below. Table 3.1: The Three Stages of Cognitive Growth According to Bruner's Theory Stage Description Enactive (birth to age 3) In this stage, children learn by observing and manipulating real or concrete objects. For example, if you want to teach about flowers, you must let children observe real flowers so that they can see, touch and smell the flowers. Knowledge is acquired through senses. This is also true if you want to teach a new skill. Let say you want to teach students on how to use a thermometer. Get a thermometer and let them touch and observe the apparatus. Iconic (age 3 to 8) In this stage, knowledge is represented by using models and pictures. So, if you want to teach them about flowers, you can use pictures of flowers for the children to list the components of a flower and classifying flowers based on their characteristics. If you want to teach about how the lungs work, you could use a model to explain how the size of lung changes when we breathe in and out. In short, you do not need to show them the real object as cognitively they are ready to understand the concepts with the help of pictures or models.
  • 72. 6 2 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 Symbolic (from age 8) Learners can think in abstract form. So, abstract terms and symbol systems can be used to represent knowledge like numbers, mathematical symbols, letters, music and language. The precise timing of when to use it depends on the child, particularly his or her language ability. For the first time, the child can categorise, think logically and solve problems. Each stage as shown in Figure 3.7 is dominant at different phases of development but they are always present and accessible (Johnson, et al.). Figure 3.7: Learning stages according to BrunerÊs theory Source: http://jaylordlosabia.blogspot.com/2010/05/constructivism-jerome-bruners. html According to Waring (2011), Bruner rejects the idea of stages as popularised by Piaget and to a lesser extent Vygotsky. Rather than looking at the ages of developmental changes, Bruner concentrates more on how knowledge is represented and organised as the child develops. For Bruner, the earlier ways of thinking are still used later in life where they can be very useful for some tasks. Teachers, according to Bruner, should be able to speed up the rate of cognitive development, primarily by improving language acquisition thereby assisting the transition from iconic to symbolic modes of representation. In short, if you plan activities in accordance to each stage as Bruner describes it, your children can learn more effectively.
  • 73. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 63 Say for instance you want to teach them about the concept of animals. If you teach younger children, you should use real animals to explain the concept. However if your students are older, you could use pictures or models of animals, and when they are in the symbolic stage, you could simply use text to teach them about animals. SELF-CHECK 3.4 ‰Learning subtraction by showing six items and physically removing four of them‰. To which stage does this classroom activity belong to? ACTIVITY 3.6 Imagine that you want to teach about the different parts of plants. Discuss the teaching activities for each of Bruner's stage theory. 3.3.4 Application of Bruner’s Theories in the Teaching of Science How do you use BrunerÊs theory in a science classroom? Since discovery learning represents or follows the scientific method, you should always try to use this method when you teach science. The question is, which model of discovery learning should you use? Should you apply guided discovery, free discovery, problem-based learning, simulation-based learning or case-based learning? Let us look at Table 3.2 which shows some of the suggestions on how we can use BrunerÊs theories in the science classroom.
  • 74. 6 4 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 Table 3.2: Suggestions on How BrunerÊs Theories Can Be Used in Science Classroom BrunerÊs Theories Explanation 1 Present both examples and non-examples of the concepts that you are teaching. When teaching about mammals, include people, kangaroos, whales, cats, dolphins and camels as examples. Besides that, use chicken, fish, alligators, frogs and penguins as non-examples. Ask children for additional examples and non-examples. When presenting an explanation of the phases of the moon, have the children to observe the phases in a variety of ways. For instance, direct observation of the changing shape of the moon in the evening. A demonstration of the changes can be shown by using a flashlight and sphere, and also diagrams. 2 Help children see connections among concepts. Ask questions such as, „What else could you call this apple?‰ (Fruit). „What do we do with fruit?‰ (Eat). „What do we call things we eat?‰ (Food). Use diagrams, outlines and summaries to point out conclusions. 3 Design inductive activities. Provide them with specific cases or situations. Children will need to observe, classify, making inferences and prediction in order to make conclusion based on the situation given. 4 Design activities that are problem-oriented. Children need to be given enough practice to solve problem so that they will learn the heuristics or rules of discovery. 5 Emphasise the basic structure of the new material. Use demonstrations that reveal basic principles. For example, demonstrate the law of magnetism by using similar and opposite poles of a set of bar magnets. Encourage children to make outlines of basic points made in textbooks or discovered in activities. 6 Help children construct coding system. Coding system helps children make connections between objects and phenomena. For example, ask the students to invent a game that requires children to classify rocks and have children to maintain scrapbooks in which they keep collected leaf specimens that are grouped according to observed characteristics.
  • 75. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 65 7 Pose a problem to the children and let them find the answer. Ask questions that will lead naturally to activities. For example, why do you need to wear a helmet when riding a bicycle? What are some ingredients that most junk foods have? Do a demonstration that raises a question in the childrenÊs minds. For example, lift a washer using magnet or mix two-coloured solutions to produce a third colour. 8 Encourage children to make intuitive guesses. Intuitive guesses allow children to be able to build meaning, significance or structure to a problem without explicit evidence. For example, ask children to guess the amount of water that goes down the drain each time they get a drink of water from a water fountain. Give the children magazine photographs of the evening sky and have them guess the locations of some constellations. Instead of defining a particular object, tell your students, Let us guess what it might mean by looking at the words around it. Do not comment after the first few guesses. Wait for several ideas before giving the right answer. Use guiding questions to help children focus when their discovery has led them astray. There are many resources in the Internet if you want to use the discovery learning approach in the teaching of science. Here is just one of the websites you can use: http://www.discoverysciencelearning.com/ ACTIVITY 3.7 1. In a group, choose a topic. Describe how you would teach the topic using discovery learning. 2. Use a suitable graphic organiser to compare and contrast PiagetÊs and BrunerÊs stages of cognitive growth.
  • 76. 6 6 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 Cognitive theory is a learning theory of psychology that attempts to explain human behaviour by understanding the thought processes. Piaget identified four stages in human cognitive development. They are sensorimotor, pre-operational, concrete operational and formal operational. Piaget also explained how the cognitive structures or schemes change through the process of assimilation, accommodation and mental equilibrium. The application of PiagetÊs stages of cognitive growth is when you plan to teach science based on students' abilities in each stage. Generally primary school students are in the concrete operational stage. Thus, concrete materials need to be used in the teaching of science concepts or skills. In BrunerÊs discovery learning model, studentsÊ involvement plays a vital role in the learning process. The teachersÊ role is as a guide and advisor in students' quest for information rather than as a giver of information. Bruner also identified three stages of cognitive growth: enactive, iconic and symbolic. The application of BrunerÊs stages of cognitive growth is when you plan to teach activities suited for each stage, whether to use concrete, pictures or models, or just use text or description when explaining concepts or skills. Cognitive development growth Cognitive learning theories Cognitive structures or schemes Concrete operational Discovery learning Enactive Formal operational Iconic Inductive reasoning Pre-operational Sensorimotor Symbolic
  • 77. TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 67 Abruscato, J. (2004). Teaching children science: A discovery approach (5th ed.). Boston: Allyn Bacon. Atherton, J. S. (2011). Learning and teaching: Cognitive theories of learning. Retrieved May 15, 2011, from http://www.learningandteaching.info/ learning/cognitive.htm Bruner, J. S. (1966). Toward a theory of instruction. Cambridge, Mass.: Belkapp Press. Johnson, C., Maiden, K., McDonald, R., McGuire, A. (n.a.). Retrieved May 19, 2011, from http://tiger.towson.edu/~cjohns26/Jerome%20Bruner.ppt Learning Theories. (2008). Discovery learning (Bruner). Retrieved May 22, 2011, from http://www.learning-theories.com/discovery-learning-bruner.html Lindgren, H. C., Suter, W. N. (1985). Educational psychology in the classroom. California: Brooks/Cole Publishing Company. Martin, R., Sexton, C., Gerlovich, J. (2002). Teaching science for all children Methods for constructing understanding. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. Ormond, J. (2000). Educational psychology: Developing learners (3rd ed). Belkapp Press. Slavin, R. E. (2006). Educational psychology: Theory and practice (8th ed.). Upper Saddle River: Pearson Education, Inc. Subramaniam, N. K. (2010). Enriching blended pedagogy through Piagetian learning model: A case study. Retrieved 19 May 2011 from http://eprints.oum.edu.my/411/1/enriching_nantha.pdf Thorsett, P. (2002). Discovery learning theory. A primer for discussion. Retrieved May 19, 2011, from http://general.utpb.edu/fac/keast_d/Tunebooks/ pdf/Bruner%20and%20Discovery%20Learning.pdf Tomei, L. (2004). Learning theories: A primer exercise. Retrieved May 19, 2011, from http://academics.rmu.edu/~tomei/ed711psy/c_bruner.htm Waring, P. (2011). Cognition and development. Retrieved May 22, 2011, from http://psychology4a.com/cognitive_development.htm#Jerome_Bruner_N orthern College. (2003). Learning theories Classical conditioning. Retrieved April 27, 2011, from http://www.northern.ac.uk/learning/NC Material/Psychology/lifespan%20folder/Learningtheories.htm
  • 78. 6 8 TOPIC 3 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENTAL THEORIES 1 Utah State University. (2000). Positive interaction procedures. Retrieved May 8, 2011, from http://www.usu.edu/teachall/text/behavior/LRBIpdfs/ Positive.pdf Woolfolk, A. ( 2001). Educational psychology. USA: Allyn Bacon.
  • 79. Topic 4 Cognitive Learning Theories 2 LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain the main principles of AusubelÊs learning theory; 2. Apply AusubelÊs deductive thinking in teaching science; 3. Explain the main principles of GagneÊs Mastery Learning; 4. Apply GagneÊs Mastery Learning in teaching science; 5. Discuss the main principles of the Multiple Intelligences theory; and 6. Apply Multiple Intelligences theory in teaching science. INTRODUCTION We will continue exploring cognitive learning theories in this topic. Can you remember what these theories are? Yes, cognitive learning theories focus on the mental processes of learning. The cognitive theorists focus on the workings of the human brain. They view people as active processors of information and study how learners acquire and reorganise mental structures as they process and store information. The cognitive learning theories that will be discussed in this topic are AusubelÊs Deductive Learning theory, GagneÊs theory of Mastery Learning and the Multiple Intelligences theory. We will look at the main elements of each theory and study how they can be applied in the teaching of science.
  • 80. 7 0 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 AUSUBEL’S DEDUCTIVE LEARNING The first theory that we will be looking at is AusubelÊs Theory, which uses the deductive approach. A deductive approach is different from an inductive approach as used by Bruner in Topic 3. Look at Figure 4.1 to see the steps in deductive science teaching. Figure 4.1: Deductive science teaching Now, study the three sentences given in the box below. Close this module and try to remember the three sentences. Which one do you find the easiest to remember? Adapted from Slavin, R.E. (1994) 4.1 (a) Enso flrs hmen matn snoi teha erso iakt siae otin tnes esna rae . (b) Easier that nonsense information to makes then sense is learn. (c) Information that makes sense is easier to learn than nonsense.
  • 81. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 71 You would have found sentence (c) easiest to remember. Why is this so? It is because sentence (c) is the one that would have made sense to you. You could remember (c) because it was meaningful to you. It is the same with AusubelÊs deductive learning which stresses the importance of meaningful learning. Let us read further to learn more. ACTIVITY 4.1 Study Figure 4.1. What is the difference between the inductive and deductive approaches in teaching science? Explain your answer using a specific science example. 4.1.1 Meaningful Learning David Ausubel stressed on the importance of meaningful learning in his learning theory. Any material that needs to be learned such as concepts, principles and ideas should be presented in an organised way so that the learners can make connections to existing knowledge and understand it better. To remember sentences (a) and (b) you would be required to memorise them because the sentences would have had no meaning to you. Ausubel calls this type of learning rote memorisation. Rote memorisation is not considered meaningful learning because the material is not connected to existing knowledge. Ausubel suggests an Expository Teaching Model to encourage meaningful rather than rote learning. „Expository‰ means „explanation‰ or the presentation of ideas and concepts. Expository teaching methods present information in an organised form rather than having students discovering it for themselves. So, what do you think would be the difference between BrunerÊs theory and AusubelÊs theory? According to Ausubel, students acquire knowledge mainly through reception rather than discovery. He calls his approach reception learning. Here, the teacher needs to organise all the required information logically, systematically and meaningfully so that the students can receive it in the most efficient way. Can you see now that AusubelÊs teaching approach is deductive in nature? The teacher plays the role of an organiser of subject matter and presents information through lectures and tasks. Materials are presented from general to specific or from a rule or principle to specific examples.
  • 82. 7 2 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 ACTIVITY 4.2 1. Explain in your own words what you understand by ‰meaningful learning‰Ê. 2. What is the role of the teacher in meaningful learning? 4.1.2 Advance Organiser According to Ausubel, for meaningful learning to occur, students must relate new knowledge to what they already know. Ausubel suggests the idea of an advance organiser as a way to help students link their ideas with the new material that will be presented. An advance organiser is a general statement or analogy given in the beginning of the lesson to relate new information to prior knowledge of students. What is the purpose of an advance organiser? It provides the structure for a new topic by relating it to what students already know. It helps the learner place the material to be learned in context. Read the introduction for Topic 4 again. Is there an advance organiser for this topic? Yes No If Yes, which one? An advance organiser is a set of ideas or concepts presented before the material is learned. It is meant to provide a stable cognitive structure to which new learning can be anchored. This means that an advance organiser acts like an intellectual scaffolding. Advance organisers provide an overview that shows students what to expect and summarises all aspects of the unit or lesson in advance. Advance organisers can be charts, concept maps, definitions or generalisations and need not be very long. For example, you can list, pronounce and discuss science terms like „producers‰ and „consumers‰ before starting the lesson on „Food Chain‰. Concept maps can be used as advance organisers. Figure 4.2 shows a concept map for the topic on „The Five Senses‰. You can start the lesson by using this organiser which shows students what they will be learning for the lesson.
  • 83. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 73 Figure 4.2: Concept map for a topic on „The Five Senses‰ Source: http://nikilavoie.blogspot.com/2007/10/exploring-concept-mapping-with.html Another example of an advance organiser is shown below: The teacher says: „Do you remember that during the last lesson we measured the temperature of a glass of water? Well, today we are going to add ice to the water and see what happens to the temperature.‰ As you can see, even if this advance organiser is short it is effectively linked to the prior knowledge of the students.
  • 84. 7 4 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 ACTIVITY 4.3 Choose a learning area from the primary science curriculum. 1. Prepare an appropriate advance organiser. 2. Discuss the effectiveness of your advance organiser with your coursemates during the tutorial session. SELF-CHECK 4.1 1. What are the main elements of AusubelÊs theory? 2. Discuss when it is appropriate to apply AusubelÊs theory in your science classroom. APPLICATION OF AUSUBEL’S DEDUCTIVE THINKING IN SCIENCE TEACHING 4.2 You have studied the main elements of AusubelÊs Theory. Let us now look in detail how you can use this theory in the teaching of science. Joyce and Weil (1986) explain that a lesson using AusubelÊs model of teaching, or an expository approach, consists of three principal phases: (a) The presentation of an advance organiser; (b) The presentation of a learning task or material; and (c) The strengthening of cognitive organisation. The three phases are shown in Table 4.1 with explanations on what happens at every phase.
  • 85. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 75 Table 4.1: AusubelÊs Model of Teaching Phase 1 Phase II Phase III Presentation of the Advance Organiser Presentation of Learning Task or Material Strengthening Cognitive Organisation Clarify the aim of the lesson. The learners should be presented with a set of learning objectives. Present the advance organiser which will prepare learners for the new information. The advance organiser must relate the ideas to be presented in the lesson to information already in studentsÊ minds. Present new material by means of lectures, demonstrations, discussions or student tasks. The material is presented clearly, sequentially and logically. Engage and maintain studentsÊ attention in meaningful learning. The teaching should be accompanied with good examples following every explanation. Relate new information to the advance organiser. Promote active reception learning by questioning students or giving them opportunities to ask questions. Review or sum up at the end of the lesson in order to check the students' understanding of the new information. Source: Joyce et. al (1986) As you can see in AusubelÊs theory, the teacher presents the lesson, sequentially, logically and systematically. An advance organiser is presented at the beginning of the lesson. Student interest is maintained with interactive questioning and lots of examples. Finally, the teacher closes the lesson by reviewing the concepts presented and checking for studentsÊ understanding. A summary of how you can use AusubelÊs ideas in your classroom is shown in the following Figure 4.3.
  • 86. 7 6 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 Figure 4.3: AusubelÊs ideas for your science classroom AusubelÊs approach is often thought to be a traditional way of teaching. However, this approach can be effective for the teaching of science especially if you want to present a broad range of subject matter and if information is not easily accessible. You can also use this approach if you want to present difficult concepts your students might have difficulty understanding.
  • 87. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 77 ACTIVITY 4.4 1. A science teacher wants to teach the topic „Magnets‰ deductively using AusubelÊs Theory. The steps the teacher is using are given in the box but they are not in order. Arrange them in order according to the three phases below: Steps used by the teacher to teach „Magnets‰ 1. Teacher asks students for other examples of materials that are attracted to magnets 2. Teacher demonstrates how magnets attract materials made of iron and steel 3. Teacher tells students that the lesson is about materials that are attracted to magnets 4. Teacher writes on the board „Magnets are attracted to metals, mostly those that are made of iron and steel‰ 5. Teacher explains all words and ensures all students understand them 6. Teacher gives students materials and magnets and asks students to predict which materials will be attracted to magnets Phase 1: Presentation of the Advance Organiser Phase II: Presentation of Learning Task or Material Phase III: Strengthening Cognitive Organisation 2. Choose a topic from the primary science curriculum. Plan the steps you will use to teach the topic using AusubelÊs Model of Teaching as shown in Table 4.1. Present your answer in the tutorial session.
  • 88. 7 8 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 SELF-CHECK 4.2 1. Explain briefly how you can use AusubelÊs Learning theory in your classroom. 2. The purpose of an advance organiser is to (a) map out new information. (b) make new information meaningful. (c) provide an overview of new lesson content. (d) present new information in the form of analogies. GAGNE’S MASTERY LEARNING 4.3 Have you heard of the term „„mastery learning‰? What do you understand by this term? You might be thinking of someone who has mastered what he or she is supposed to learn. That is in essence what mastery learning is all about. Mastery learning is based on the assumption that all students, if given appropriate instruction and time, can master any learning outcome (Bloom, 1968). That should be the goal of all teachers. Robert Gagne (1916-2002) was a psychologist who was concerned with learning and instruction. He believed that learning must proceed from the simple to the more complex in well-defined stages. According to him, mastery learning can be designed into the instructional process. Let us now study GagneÊs theory to see how this can be done. GagneÊs learning theory incorporates three distinct components: categories of learning, hierarchy of intellectual skills and the nine events of instruction. This is summarised in Figure 4.4.
  • 89. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 79 Figure 4.4: Components of GagneÊs learning theory 4.3.1 Gagne’s Categories of Learning Gagne identified five major categories or domains of learning, which are: (a) Intellectual skills (b) Cognitive strategies (c) Verbal information (d) Attitudes (e) Motor skills Each category has different abilities and performances and is learned in different ways. The significance of this is that different categories of learning require different types of instruction. For example, if you want to teach your students an intellectual skill like the „properties of light‰, you will instruct them in a different
  • 90. 8 0 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 way as compared to teaching them an attitude like „honesty‰. Figure 4.5 shows GagneÊs categories of learning. Figure 4.5: GagneÊs categories of learning ACTIVITY 4.5 Gagne identified five categories of learning as shown in Figure 4.4. For each of these categories, provide examples using the primary science curriculum. Think about how you will teach these categories in your science classroom. Discuss your answers during the tutorial class.
  • 91. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 81 4.3.2 Gagne’s Hierarchy of Intellectual Skills Gagne focused on one category, that is, „intellectual skills‰. He suggested that these skills be arranged in a hierarchy from the simple to the more complex. For learning to occur, the student would need to learn the more simple tasks before the more complex tasks. This means the simpler tasks become prerequisites or building blocks that should be completed before higher level learning can occur. Study Figure 4.6 which shows how the different learning types are arranged in a hierarchy. Figure 4.6: GagneÊs Hierarchy of Learning Learning hierarchies can help teachers plan their teaching or instruction. So the first question you should ask is, „What are the intellectual skills that are needed in order to master the learning outcomes?‰ Once you know the final objective, you can plan backwards and make sure the simpler skills are mastered first before teaching a new skill. Table 4.2 shows examples of GagneÊs Hierarchy of Learning Skills.
  • 92. 8 2 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 Table 4.2: Example of GagneÊs Hierarchy of Learning Skills GagneÊs hierarchy of learning What is it? Examples Problem Solving Applying rules to the solution of a problem and learning something new. Experimenting on the effect of heat on solubility. Rule Learning Chain of two or more concepts that make up knowledge. Water when heated will boil. Concept Learning Grouping and categorising. Characteristics of animals and plants or metals and non-metals. Discrimination Learning Learning to make different responses to different stimuli. Using our five senses to identify substances. Verbal Association Verbalisation e.g. naming, reciting. Mg magnesium, Fe iron. Chaining Learning of chains or connection. Requires stimulus response learning sequences. How to reduce and increase the bunsen burner flame to suit experiment. Stimulus-Response Learning Ability to perform a particular behaviour when a certain stimulus is present. When the bunsen burner heat is too high, reduce it. Signal Learning Learning how to make a response to a signal. When a bunsen burner is lighted, ask students to give a response. ACTIVITY 4.6 GagneÊs theory states that learning hierarchies can be constructed by working backwards from the final learning objective. Choose a concept, rule or principle from the primary science curriculum. What are the intellectual skills your students need to master first in order to learn the concept that you have chosen?
  • 93. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 83 4.3.3 Gagne’s Nine Instructional Events Gagne introduced nine instructional events that need to be part of the learning situation. The nine instructional events are shown in Table 4.3 and Figure 4.7. Table 4.3: GagneÊs Nine Instructional Events INSTRUCTIONAL EVENT LESSON ACTIVITY Gain attention Use multimedia technology to grab attention. Tell a story. Inform learner of objectives Make learners aware of what to expect so they are aware and prepared to receive instruction. Recall prior learning Ask questions or do activities that help students recall prior knowledge. Present stimulus material The learning content is meaningfully organised and explained and then demonstrated. A variety of strategies should be used. Provide learning guidance Teacher facilitates the learning process by giving hints and cues when needed. Elicit performance Teacher asks students to demonstrate new knowledge using questions, worksheets or activities Provide feedback Teacher gives feedback to students. Assess performance Provide exercises to assess students. Provide test to check if learning outcomes were achieved. Enhance retention and transfer Provide activities where students can transfer their learning and review lesson. Applying learning in real-life situations is a step towards mastery learning.
  • 94. 8 4 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 Figure 4.7: GagneÊs Nine Instructional Events Source: http://eet.sdsu.edu/eetwiki/index.php/Gagne's_Nine_Events_of_Instruction ACTIVITY 4.7 Choose a topic from the primary science curriculum. 1. Plan how you will teach the topic you have chosen using GagneÊs Nine Instructional Events. 2. Specify clearly the activities you will carry out for each event. Prepare your answer in the form of a table.
  • 95. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 85 APPLICATION OF GAGNE’S MASTERY LEARNING IN SCIENCE TEACHING You have just studied the three main components of GagneÊs theory namely categories of learning, hierarchy of intellectual skills and the nine events of instruction. As a teacher, you need to first determine the category of learning as the type of instruction you will use will depend on this. Then, plan your instruction based on the nine events of instruction. If you want to teach intellectual skills, then determine the prerequisite skills needed and make sure students have mastered them before teaching the new skill. As a summary, keep the following principles in mind on how you can apply GagneÊs Mastery Learning in science teaching (see Figure 4.8). Figure 4.8: Application of GagneÊs mastery learning in science teaching 4.4
  • 96. 8 6 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 SELF-CHECK 4.3 Answer the following questions. 1. „Students are able to solve problems using the formula for speed‰. According to Gagne, what type of learning category is shown in the learning outcome above? (A) Verbal information (B) Intellectual skills (C) Cognitive strategies (D) Attitude 2. Which of the following is NOT one of GagneÊs instructional events ? (A) Present material (B) Enhance retention and transfer (C) Promote discrimination learning (D) Stimulate recall of prior knowledge 3. According to GagneÊs theory, what is the first event of instruction teachers should use? (A) Stimulate prior learning (B) Enhance retention (C) Present the stimulus MULTIPLE INTELLIGENCES THEORY 4.5 Howard Gardner suggests a new way of thinking about intelligence. According to him, there are eight different intelligences that he believes everyone has in different degrees (Figure 4.9). These intelligences make people perceive and understand the world differently. One or more of these intelligences may be more dominant for different individuals.
  • 97. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 87 Figure 4.9: Gardner's eight intelligences Study Table 4.4 to understand the main characteristics and skills for each intelligence. Table 4.4: Multiple Intelligences the Characteristics and Associated Skills Intelligence Characteristics Skills Logical / Mathematical Ability to use reason, logic and numbers. These learners think conceptually in logical and numerical patterns making connections between pieces of information. Problem solving, classifying and categorising information, working with abstract concepts, performing complex mathematical calculations, working with geometric shapes. Verbal / Linguistic Ability to use words and languages. These learners have highly developed auditory skills and are generally good speakers. They think in words rather than pictures. Listening, speaking, writing, storytelling, explaining, teaching, using humour, remembering information, convincing someone of their point of view.
  • 98. 8 8 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 Musical Ability to produce and appreciate music. These musically inclined learners think in sounds, rhythms and patterns. Singing, whistling, playing musical instruments, recognising tonal patterns, composing music, remembering melodies. Visual / Spatial This intelligence is the ability to perceive the visual. These learners tend to think in pictures and need to create vivid mental images to retain information. Puzzle building, reading, writing, understanding charts and graphs, a good sense of direction, sketching, painting, manipulating images, constructing, fixing, designing practical objects, interpreting visual images. Bodily / kinesthetic Ability to control body movements and handle objects skilfully. These learners express themselves through movement. They have a good sense of balance and eye-hand co-ordination. Dancing, physical co-ordination, sports, hands-on experimentation, using body language, crafts, acting, miming, using their hands to create or build, expressing emotions through the body. Interpersonal Ability to relate and understand others. These learners try to see things from other people's point of view in order to understand how they think and feel. Listening, using empathy, understanding other people's moods and feelings, counselling, co-operating with groups, noticing people's moods, motivations and intentions. Intrapersonal Ability to reflect and analyse oneself. These learners try to understand their inner feelings, dreams, relationships with others, strengths and weaknesses. Recognising their own strengths and weaknesses, reflecting and analysing themselves, awareness of their inner feelings, desires and dreams, evaluating their thinking patterns. Naturalist Ability to identify and classify patterns in nature. These learners have a sensitivity and appreciation for nature. Good at nurturing and growing things, ability to care for and interact with animals, enjoys gardening and keeping pets, likes to camp and hike, conscious of environmental issues. Source: http://www.ldpride.net/learningstyles.MI.htm#Multiple%20Intelligences%20Explained
  • 99. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 89 Are you interested to find out what intelligences you have? Visit the website below and try doing the test to find out how your mind works: http://www.bgfl.org/bgfl/custom/resources_ftp/client_ftp/ks3/ict/multiple_i nt/questions/choose_lang.cfm. If you have difficulty accessing the Internet, try the test given in Appendix 1 at the end of this topic. Have you discovered how your mind works? The intelligence that you scored the highest will generally be the best way that you study or do things. Look at the intelligences where your score was low and think of how you can increase that particular intelligence. APPLICATION OF MULTIPLE INTELLIGENCES THEORY IN SCIENCE TEACHING According to GardnerÊs theory, each child can be viewed as having these eight intelligences in different degrees. What does this mean to you as a science teacher? It means your teaching should have experiences for as many of the multiple intelligences as possible so every student has an opportunity to learn. First, you need to find out the multiple intelligences your students have. You can do this by observing students when they are studying, observing activities students like to do during their free time, looking at studentsÊ achievement records and reports, or using the above link to test your students. How can you incorporate multiple intelligences in the teaching and learning process? Look at each of the intelligences and think of what activities will help each of these intelligences. A few ways you can incorporate multiple intelligences in your science classroom are given below: Ways to Incorporate Multiple Intelligences in The Science Classroom (a) Multiple Intelligence Stations You can set up different multiple intelligence stations in your classroom. Each station can have certain elements for each intelligence. The stations can be created using themes or intelligences in rotation if the space is not enough. E.g.: Naturalist station can have flora and fauna. The Intrapersonal Station should be away from noise and disturbance. Pupils can be given ear plugs so it is quiet and they can read, write, think and do self-reflection. 4.6
  • 100. 9 0 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 (b) Classroom Decorations You can decorate the classroom with information that can be appreciated by each intelligence. Get the students involved in this activity. E.g.: Verbal-linguistic students can prepare posters about science concepts and definitions. Logical-mathematical students can prepare models of shapes and formulas. (c) Field Trips You can take students out for trips to different places to observe and understand nature. E.g.: For naturalist learners, you can ask them to collect and classify leaves. Musical learners can be asked to compose and sing science-themed songs during the field trip. (d) Classroom Resources You can incorporate many different types of resources in a lesson to increase studentsÊ interest. E.g.: For kinesthetic learners, you can use balls, building kits, stop watches, robotic kits. For interpersonal learners, you can use board games, role play cards and science games. ACTIVITY 4.8 1. Identify a science topic from the primary science curriculum. Discuss activities you can use to teach the concepts using the different multiple intelligences. 2. There is now a ninth multiple intelligence, that is, existentialist intelligence. Research this and discuss the implications for science teaching. SELF-CHECK 4.4 What are the advantages of using multiple intelligences theory in the classroom? What are some of your concerns? Discuss.
  • 101. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 91 Cognitive theories view learning as involving the mental processes through which humans acquire, process and store information. Ausubel suggests that teachers use a deductive approach. That is, they should introduce a topic with general concepts, and then gradually include specific examples. Information that makes sense and has meaning to the student is more meaningful than unrelated information learned by rote memorisation. The expository teaching model stresses on a teacher-planned, systematic presentation of meaningful information. The purpose of expository teaching is to transmit knowledge and skills from those who know (e.g. teacher and workbook) to those who do not know (e.g. students). Reception learning is a teaching method in which the teacher structures the learning situation to select materials that are appropriate for students and then presents them in well-organised lessons that progress from general to specific details. An advance organiser is an initial statement or an outline about a subject to be learned that provides a structure for the new information and relates it to information students already possess. The purpose of an advance organiser is to activate as much of the studentsÊ existing knowledge to help them understand new information. AusubelÊs model of teaching or an expository approach consists of three principal phases: the presentation of an advance organiser, the presentation of a learning task or material and strengthening the cognitive organisation. Mastery learning means that all students if given appropriate instruction and time can master any learning objective. The three main components of GagneÊs theory are categories of learning, hierarchy of intellectual skills and the nine events of instruction. Gagne identified five major categories or domains of learning, which are: verbal information, intellectual skills, cognitive strategies, motor skills and attitudes. Different categories of learning require different types of instruction.
  • 102. 9 2 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 Intellectual skills can be arranged in a hierarchy; with the simpler tasks being prerequisites for the more complex tasks. Nine instructional events that need to be part of the learning situation are gaining attention, informing learner of objective, recalling of prior information, present stimulus material, provide learning guidance, elicit performance, provide feedback and assess performance. Howard GardnerÊs Multiple Intelligences theory consists of eight different intelligences. The eight multiple intelligences are logical-mathematical, verbal-linguistic, visual-spatial, bodily-kinesthetic, interpersonal, intrapersonal, musical and naturalist. Each child can be viewed as having these eight intelligences in different degrees. The teacher should provide experiences for as many of the multiple intelligences as possible so every student has an opportunity to learn. Ways to incorporate multiples intelligences in the classroom include having multiple intelligence stations, classroom decorations, field trips and using a variety of learning resources. Advance organiser Bodily-kinesthetic Categories of learning Deductive learning Expository Learning Hierarchy of intellectual skills Instructional events Interpersonal Intrapersonal Logical-mathematical Mastery Learning Meaningful Learning Multiple intelligences Musical Naturalist Reception Learning Rote memorisation Verbal-linguistic Visual spatial
  • 103. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 93 Abruscato, J. (2000). Teaching children science: A discovery approach. USA. Allyn Bacon. Bloom, B. (1968). Learning for mastery. Evaluation Comment 1(2). Los Angeles: University of California, Center for the Study of Evaluation of Instructional Programs. Hassard, J. (1992). Minds on science Middle and secondary school methods. USA. Harper Collins. Joyce, B., Weil, M., Showers, B. (1992). Models of teaching (4th ed.). USA. Allyn Bacon. Joyce, B., Weil, M., Showers, B. (1986). Models of teaching (3rd ed.). Allyn and Bacon. USA.) Retrieved 1/6/11 http://lrc.binus.ac.id/downloads/TE/Gagne.pdf Retrieved 1/6/11 http://questgarden.com/12/56/4/060120212752/credits.htm Retrieved 12/5/11.http://surfaquarium.com/MI/ Retrieved 20/5/11 http://my-coach.com/project.php?id=12152project_step= 28465 Retrieved 20/5/11. Presents http://tip.psychology.org/gagne.html Retrieved 30/5/11 http://www.bgfl.org/bgfl/custom/resources_ftp/client_ ftp/ks3/ict/multiple_int/what.cfm Retrieved 31/5/11 http://lth3.k12.il.us/rhampton/mi/lessonplanideas.htm# Naturalist Retrieved 31/5/11 http://www.ldpride.net/learningstyles.MI.htm#Multiple%20 Intelligences%20Explained Santrock, J. W. (2001). Educational psychology. USA. McGraw-Hill. Slavin, R. E. (1994). Educational psychology. Theory and Practice. USA. Allyn and Bacon. Woolfolk, A. ( 2001). Educational psychology. USA. Allyn and Bacon.
  • 104. 9 4 TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 APPENDIX 1: EVALUATING MYSELF ON GARDNER’S EIGHT TYPES OF INTELLIGENCE Read the following items and rate yourself on a 4-point scale. Each rating corresponds to how well a statement describes you: 1 = Not like me at all 2 = Somewhat unlike me 3 = Somewhat like me 4 = A lot like me Verbal Thinking 1 2 3 4 1. I do well on verbal tests 2. I am a skilled reader and read a lot 3. I love the challenge of solving verbal problems Logical / Mathematical Thinking 4. I am a very logical thinker 5. I like to think like a scientist 6. Maths is one of my favourite subjects Spatial Skills 7. I am good at visualising objects and layouts from different angles 8. I have the ability to create maps of spaces and locations in my mind 9. If I had wanted to be, I think I could have been an architect Bodily-Kinesthetic Skills 10. I have great hand-eye coordination 11. I excel at sports 12. I am good at using my body to carry out an expression, as in dance Musical Skills 13. I play one or more musical instruments well 14. I have a good „ear‰ for music 15. I am good at making up songs
  • 105. TOPIC 4 COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 95 Interpersonal Skills 16. I am very good at „reading „ people 17. I am good at working with other people 18. I am a good listener Intrapersonal Skills 19. I know myself well and have a positive view of myself 20. I am in tune with my thoughts and feelings 21. I have good coping skills Naturalist Skills 22. I am good at observing patterns in nature 23. I excel at identifying and classifying objects in the natural environment 24. I understand natural and man-made systems Scoring and Interpretation Total your scores for each of the eight intelligences and place the totals in the blank that follows the label for each kind of intelligence. Which areas of intelligence are your strengths? In which area are you the least proficient? It is highly unlikely that you will be strong in all eight areas or weak in all eight areas. By being aware of your strengths and weaknesses in different areas of intelligence, you can also identify which areas of teaching will be easiest or hardest for you.
  • 106. LEARNING OUTCOMES INTRODUCTION Teacher Areena started the lesson by telling a story about two best friends going to the sea using the `Wayang kulitÊ prop. She asked her students to discuss about the story and what they can learn from the story. Topic 5 Inquiry Learning By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. State the main difference between discovery and inquiry; 2. Describe the advantages of inquiry learning; 3. Explain the inquiry process; 4. Discuss the conditions needed for inquiry learning 5. Explain the types of questions needed for inquiry learning; and 6. Construct questions that are relevant to inquiry learning.
  • 107. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 97 Later she asked her students: Teacher : How did the shadow form? Aiman : It is because of the light behind the puppet. Teacher : Yes, Aiman! Do all kinds of objects form shadows if a light is shone on them? Kumari : I donÊt think so. Only opaque objects form shadows. Teacher : Good! Then she asked them to draw a diagram to explain how the shadow is formed. Teacher : What if I want to make the shadow bigger? What should I do? Aina : I know! I will show you. Teacher Areena gave a puppet and a torchlight to Aina to demonstrate it to the class. Teacher : Yes! You can move the torchlight closer to the puppet. She then asks her students to discuss other ways of changing the size of the shadow formed on the screen. How would her class look like? Can you imagine a class where the children actively pose questions, seek answers to questions, demonstrate a strong interest in outcomes, and discuss their theories and ideas with others? If you do, then you do have some understanding of inquiry learning. Her approach involves her students learning science using the inquiry approach. In this topic, we will be discussing the concept of inquiry teaching and learning; the steps involved; its advantages; the environment; and the types of questions asked in the process. ACTIVITY 5.1 Recall your own classroom. Does it resemble AreenaÊs class? How does it differ?
  • 108. 9 8 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING INQUIRY AND DISCOVERY 5.1 The word inquiry has many interpretations. It ranges from a simple question, such as How many different kinds of fish are in the aquarium?, or as complex as understanding the nature of science itself (Pratt and Hackett, 2000). If you look up the Webster dictionary, to „inquire‰ is to ask about something; to search into it, especially by asking questions; and to investigate something. This is the heart of inquiry learning. Children play the role of active learner; when challenged with a problem, they will determine how to find the solution to the problem through investigation. Martin, et. al (1994), quoting Birnie Ryan, said that „those who inquire exert an effort to discover something to the inquirer though not necessarily new to the world‰. Children will be able to inquire when they are given the following: (a) Hands-on activities; (b) Materials to manipulate; (c) Enough structure to help them focus or maintain a productive direction; and (d) Enough freedom to make a personal learning discovery. They further explain that if a child is able to acquire a new fact, concept, principle, or solution through the inquiry process, the student is making a discovery. In simple terms, inquiry is a means to an end the discovery. What the student acquires is not only content knowledge, but skills on how to approach a problem, identify important resources, both design and carry out hands-on investigations, analyse and interpret data, and perhaps most importantly, recognise when they have answered the question or solved the problem. The goal of inquiry is to help them gain a better understanding of the world around them through active engagement with real-life experiences. SELF-CHECK 5.1 1. State in your own words what inquiry learning is. 2. What is the main difference between discovery and inquiry? Discuss with your coursemates.
  • 109. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 99 5.1.1 Inquiry Cycle To conduct inquiry learning, we will explore using the Inquiry Cycle. Different people describe inquiry cycle differently. The simplest is based on DeweyÊs philosophy. The spiral path of inquiry is shown in Figure 5.1. Figure 5.1: DeweyÊs inquiry cycle Source: http://www.cii.illinois.edu/InquiryPage/ Based on DeweyÊs inquiry cycle, you begin the class by asking your students questions based on a problem presented. Besides that, you can also encourage your students to state the question that need to be investigated. When the question is clear, students can then plan different ways to find the answer to the question. After that, the students will do investigations to test their ideas or solution to the problem. When data have been collected, they will analyse and interpret the data, thereby creating new knowledge. Later, they will discuss their finding about new discoveries and experiences, and finally reflect on their new-found knowledge. Another inquiry cycle worth discussing is from Warner and Myers, as shown in Figure 5.2. Comprising six stages, their model is more comprehensive than DeweyÊs: (a) Inquisition stating a what if or I wonder question to be investigated; (b) Acquisition brainstorming possible procedures; (c) Supposition identifying an I think statement to test;
  • 110. 1 00 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING (d) Implementation designing and carrying out a plan; (e) Summation collecting evidence and drawing conclusions; and (f) Exhibition sharing and communicating results. Figure 5.2: Warner and Myers Inquiry Cycle Source: http://edis.ifas.ufl.edu/wc076 Does the Warner and Myers' cycle sound familiar? Yes, their model corresponds to the description of the scientific method described in Topic 1. That is why inquiry learning is very suitable in the science classroom. The process of inquiry not only enhances students' understanding of natural phenomena, but also develops their science processing skills. Composed of the same basic components, both the scientific method and the inquiry process require students to conduct research investigations by formulating a question, developing a hypothesis, conducting an experiment, recording data, analysing data and drawing conclusions.
  • 111. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 101 Teachers play a vital role in adapting the inquiry process to the knowledge and ability level of their students. When using inquiry-based lessons, teachers are responsible for: (a) Starting the inquiry process; (b) Promoting dialogue among students; (c) Ensuring the smooth transition from small groups to classroom discussions; (d) Intervening to clear misconceptions or developing studentsÊ understanding of content material; (e) Modelling scientific procedures and attitudes; and (f) Utilising studentsÊ experiences to create new content knowledge. Based on the objectives of the lesson and the abilities of the students, teachers must decide how much guidance they will provide. Regardless of the amount of assistance that teachers provide, the fundamental goal of inquiry is for the students to be engaged during the learning process. ACTIVITY 5.2 Robert Suchmann also suggested a strategy that can be used to teach using the inquiry approach. 1. Collect information about his strategy. 2. Compare his strategy to Warner and MyersÊ cycle. Discuss your findings with your tutor and coursemates. SELF-CHECK 5.2 1. State whether the following statement about inquiry learning is true or false. (a) Inquiry learning is an example of a student-centred approach. (b) The teacher plays an important role in inquiry learning.
  • 112. 1 02 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING (c) Inquiry is the process of defining and investigating 5.1.2 Advantages of Inquiry Learning In a traditional science classroom, the teacher will first explain science concepts to students. If the student are involved in doing the investigations, the investigation will be planned by the teacher. In inquiry learning however, students are allowed to learn and experience science firsthand, by taking on the roles of scientists. This benefits students in many ways. According to the Institute for Inquiry (2005), students who do inquiry-based science will have the following characteristics: (a) View themselves as scientists in the process of learning; (b) Accept an „invitation to learn‰ and readily engage in the exploration process; problems, formulating hypotheses, designing experiments, gathering data and drawing conclusions about problems. (d) The teacher’s roles are to ask open-ended and high level questions, solicit and accept divergent responses and probe and redirect questions. (e) Do not allow your children to make their own correction as far as possible. (f) Let the children make their own conclusions. 2. The following table lists the characteristics of inquiry and traditional learning. Fill in the blanks. Inquiry Aspect Traditional Constructivism Principle learning theory Behaviourism Student participation Passive Increased responsibility Student involvement in outcomes Problem solver Student role Teacher role Director/transmitter
  • 113. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 103 (c) Plan and carry out investigations; (d) Communicate using a variety of methods; (e) Propose explanations and solutions and build a store of concepts; (f) Raise questions; (g) Use observations; and (h) Critique their science practices. Thus, opportunities to think and behave as scientists provide relevancy and credibility to students understanding of science. They learn that it is appropriate to ask questions and seek answers. In addition, students learn the challenges and pitfalls of investigations. Inquiry-based learning has other advantages as well: (a) The approach is flexible so you can use it in different ways. It could be a simple and short project that can be done in a lesson, or a more comprehensive type that lasts a week or a month. The complex project could be an interdisciplinary project that reinforces multiple skills or knowledge areas (you will learn this type of project in Topic 7). The inquiry could involve students just researching the answers from various resources, or students to research and then test their ideas in the laboratory. In doing the projects, they will develop competencies in problem solving as well as in critical and creative thinking. (b) It could benefit those students that have different learning styles. Some students do not like just sitting down and listening to you. They like to do things, and find out the answers for themselves rather than being told. This is especially true for gifted students. They learn rapidly compared to their peers and would not be patient to wait for the others to catch up with them. So you could be giving this student a project to be carried out on their own while you concentrate on the other students who need more of your attention. (c) It is an approach that is very suitable if you are thinking of using cooperative and collaborative learning. You could assign different problems to different groups; different groups working on the same question; or on different aspects of the same question. They are not just finding solutions to the problem but they are developing their social and emotional skills as well. Of course you cannot expect the skills to happen automatically when they are working in a team. You need to plan purposely the skills that you want to incorporate into the lesson.
  • 114. 1 04 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING (d) An inquiry-based approach can work with any age group. Even though older children will be able to pursue much more sophisticated questioning and research projects, build a spirit of inquiry into activities wherever you can, even with the youngest, in an age-appropriate manner. (e) It also teaches students to develop self-directed learning skills when they are assigned individual tasks. For some students, they may need more guidance initially; but as they gain skills and confidence, they can do the inquiry on their own. These skills are important as they can apply them in their daily lives. (f) It develops studentsÊ ownership of their inquiry and enhances their interest in science. When they find the answer to a problem on their own, they would feel very proud. This then strengthens their confidence and will act as an intrinsic motivation for them to learn. SELF-CHECK 5.3 Based on the points given earlier, create a mind map to summarise the advantages of inquiry learning. ACTIVITY 5.3 What do you think are the challenges faced by teachers in conducting inquiry learning? Discuss with your tutor and coursemates. TYPES OF INQUIRY LEARNING 5.2 Alan Colburn, in An Inquiry Primer, defines inquiry as the creation of a classroom where pupils are engaged in essentially open-ended, pupil-centred, hands-on activities. However, there are other types of inquiry learning, that are structured and guided besides being open-ended as mentioned by Colburn. They are classified based upon the role of the teacher and students in the inquiry process. The types of inquiry learning can be represented in a continuum as shown in Figure 5.3. It ranges from teacher-led to student-led processes. The teacher plays a dominant role in the structured type but only facilitates learning in the other continuum, known as the open type. Students play an active role in open-type inquiry as
  • 115. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 105 they will determine the problem and the way to solve it; whereas, they usually wait for the teacher to determine what they will learn in a structured type of inquiry. Meanwhile, in guided inquiry, the situation is a compromise between open and structured inquiry. Figure 5.3: Types of inquiry continuum There is debate as to which type of inquiry is best. The general consensus is that any form of inquiry (structured, guided or open) can be useful to children when taught appropriately and well. Now let us discuss each type of inquiry on the continuum. (a) Structured inquiry In this strategy, the teacher has prepared questions as well as procedures and materials necessary to complete the inquiry. The teacher leads students step-by-step through the scientific process. Students discover relationships between variables or generalise from the data collected, which in essence leads to the discovery of expected outcomes. Certain topics can only be explored through structured inquiry, particularly those that involve answering standard-based questions using a method which is not intuitive, or which involve the use of specialised instruments. For example: (a) Do plants lose water through their leaves? (b) What does fire need to burn? (c) What is the relationship between inertia and momentum? These lessons will familiarise students with the inquiry method and allow them to develop scientific processing skills. In other words, structured inquiries provide students with common learning experiences that can be used in guided or open inquiry.
  • 116. 1 06 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING (b) Guided inquiry In this strategy, the teacher poses a question and provides the students only with the materials to be used in their investigation. Guided inquiry requires students to be familiar with the main steps of scientific inquiry as they then need to design the experiment themselves. Examples of questions a teacher might ask include: (a) What happens to a balloon if it moves from a hot to a cold place? (b) What structures must these objects have for them to be stable? (c) How will a change in temperature affect the solubility of a solution? Another example of guided inquiry could also be getting students to create a model. You provide them with the criteria that you want and the students have to think critically and creatively in order to best fit your criteria. (c) Open inquiry This type of inquiry is the opposite of structured inquiry. It requires the least amount of teacher intervention and is student-led. Students formulate not only their own problem, but also the procedures. Open inquiry is analogous to doing science. For example, the teacher might provide students with the following objects and ask them to formulate questions about the objects: (a) Primary coloured paints and materials they can use to mix together; (b) A variety of objects that may sink or float at a water table; and (c) A bag of marbles with a few marbles of different sizes. Since students follow their own paths of questioning, it is more difficult to sometime connect it to the topics in the curriculum. In order to ensure learning takes place and you can complete the syllabus at the same time, you would probably need to consider the following guidelines: (a) Provide carefully planned inquiry-based assessments; (b) Create well-established classroom rules for interaction and the handling of materials; (c) Offer guidance to students who show frustration; and (d) Prepare guided questions following the activity that tie into standards. You should start introducing the inquiry approach to your class by first using the structured inquiry before the guided, and finally when your students are ready you could use the open or free inquiry (Figure 5.4). Just like going up the stairs
  • 117. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 107 step by step, you only proceed to the next step when your students are ready. Teachers and students may need more practice to get comfortable with the learning experience that require less guidance and teacher intervention. Figure 5.4: Stages of inquiry learning SELF-CHECK 5.4 Construct a graphic organiser to differentiate among structured, guided and open inquiry. Compare yours with your coursemates. ACTIVITY 5.4 This website below can provide you with many examples of a science lesson using the structured, guided or open inquiry learning: http://www.justsciencenow.com/inquiry/index.htm Choose one and present it in the next tutorial.
  • 118. 1 08 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING CONDITIONS FOR INQUIRY LEARNING 5.3 Can you now picture the differences between traditional learning and inquiry learning? In inquiry learning , the students will be actively involved doing hands-on activities, asking questions and busily interacting with each other. In order for the lesson to run smoothly, there are conditions that need to be met. Moll (2005) suggests that the keys to a good inquiry-based activity are as follows: (a) Hands-on with simple materials; (b) Pairs or small groups; (c) Questioning checkpoints for longer activities; (d) Well-structured handouts with lots of place for students to write their answers; (e) Lots of questions asking students to describe their observations in their own words; (f) Answer questions with questions (point out things that do not make sense, try to identify misconceptions, ask whether each observation fits their theory), try not to tell them anything; (g) Flexible, allowing students to investigate things they are interested in, even if it strays from the worksheets or topic; (h) Lots of time; and (i) Aim to convey scientific concepts (the big picture) and not details. Meanwhile, Schuman proposes six rules that teachers need to consider in successful inquiry teaching and learning. The six procedures are as shown in Table 5.1.
  • 119. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 109 Table 5.1: Conditions for Inquiry Teaching Rule Procedure Questions Students must ask questions that are phrased in such a way that they can only be answered by Yes or No. This is to ensure that the teacher is not giving out the answer. Freedom to ask questions A student may ask as many questions as desired once the teacher begins the class. This encourages the student to use his or her previous questions to formulate new ones to pursue a reasonable theory. Teacher response to statements of theory When students suggest a theory, the teacher should refrain from evaluating it. The teacher might simply record the theory or ask a question about the studentÊs theory. Testing theories Students should be allowed to test their teories at any time. Cooperation Students should be encouraged to work in groups in order to confer and discuss their theories. Experimenting The teacher should provide materials, texts and reference books so that the students can explore their ideas. Source: Rashid Johar, Lilia Halim, Kamisah Othman (2004) ACTIVITY 5.5 Go to this website. Analyse the conditions upon which the lessons are conducted: http://hea-www.harvard.edu/ECT/threads.html Then, discuss with your tutor and coursemates.
  • 120. 1 10 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING QUESTIONING SKILLS FOR INQUIRY TEACHING 5.4 As mentioned above, inquiry means asking questions. Thus, if your students do not know how to ask questions, then the inquiry process will not be effective. If you as the teacher do not know how to help your children to develop their questioning skills, then you will have problems in carrying out this approach. Teachers need to have a clear understanding of the kinds of questions that support inquiry learning, and also how to facilitate children's questioning skills. In inquiry teaching, skillful questioning allows the teacher to foster high-level discussions; either with the whole class, in small groups, or with individual children. 5.4.1 Types of Questions Different types of questions accomplish different tasks and help us to build up our answers in different ways. One way to classify the type of question is based on how open the question is. This can be classified as follows: (a) Convergent questions This type of question requires „Yes‰ or „No‰ answers. For example, what is the shape of this box? Children do not have to think too long. Convergent questions focus on specific, teacher acceptable answers, and reinforce the „correct‰ answers you may be looking for. Use convergent questions to guide the student and to evaluate what he or she sees, knows, or feels about the event. Convergent questions help direct the studentÊs attention to specific objects or events. They also sharpen the studentÊs recall or memory faculties. These questions evaluate the studentÊs observational and recall skills, allow you to adjust your teaching to present ideas again, or go back to less complicated ideas. (b) Divergent questions This is an open-ended type of question (Figure 5.5). These questions encourage a broad range of diverse responses. It allows different answers from your students, invites opinions, thoughts and feelings, and stimulates discussion. All these will encourage student participation in the learning activities. For example, how do you prove your idea? Children need to justify or explain their answers. Pursuing studentsÊ divergent questions and comments is one of the central elements of inquiry teaching. It not only
  • 121. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 111 engages students in classroom discussions, but also allows them to think independently, creatively and more critically. It also teaches them to take ownership of their own learning, while also feeling a shared responsibility for the learning of the entire class. Figure 5.5: Divergent questions TodayÊs technologically advancing society has complex problems which need more than one solution. Therefore, divergent thinking is a particularly important skill. Using divergent questioning will broaden and deepen your studentsÊ responses and involve them in thinking creatively and critically. Divergent questions stimulate students to become better observers and organisers of the objects and events you present. Many of these questions guide them in discovering things for themselves; help them to see interrelationships; and make hypothesis or draw conclusions from the data. (c) BloomÊs Taxonomy As a teacher, you should be very familiar with BloomÊs taxonomy of asking questions (Figure 5.6). The system consists of six levels, which are arranged in hierarchical form, moving from the lowest level of cognition to the highest level of cognition (or from the least complex to the most complex).
  • 122. 1 12 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING Figure 5.6: BloomÊs Taxonomy Source: http://blogs.pupillife.utoronto.ca/deliberatepractice/ Each of the levels has its purpose and should be used at different stages of the inquiry process. At the beginning of the inquiry process, you should probably use higher level questioning so that the inquiry can be accomplished. When the students are interpreting the data, you should be using knowledge or comprehension questions so that they are more focused. At the end of the inquiry process, you should ask evaluative questions so that they can reflect on their discoveries. Questions should also promote the mental processes involved in inquiry learning. These questions would help students develop their scientific processing skills. Some examples are shown in Table 5.2.
  • 123. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 113 Table 5.2: Examples of Questions to Promote Mental Processes in Inquiry Learning Science processing skills Examples of questions Observing What are the features of these animals that you can observe? Classifying What features do these animals have in common? Inferring Why do you think the temperature dropped? Formulating hypothesis What do you think will happen to the solubility of the salt when you heat the solution? Experimenting How would you determine the factors affecting the period of the pendulum? (d) Productive and Unproductive Questions In their study, Harlen and Qualter (2004) discussed productive and unproductive questions. The latter are questions that are asked when you want to know the studentsÊ understanding of facts or reasons where there is clearly a right answer. Productive questions are useful in helping them to investigate and think. Table 5.3 shows you the productive questions introduced by Elstgeest (1985). Table 5.3: ElstgeestÊs Types of Productive Questions Type Purpose Attention-focusing Drawing childrenÊs attention to features that might otherwise be missed; for example, Have you noticed?, What do you think of that? - are the kinds that children often supply for themselves and the teacher may have to raise them only if observation is superficial and attention fleeting. Comparison In what ways are these leaves different?, What is the same about these two pieces of rocks? These questions draw attention to patterns and lay the foundation for using keys and categorising objects and events. Measuring and counting How much?, How long? Are particular kinds of comparison questions that take observations into the quantitative sphere. Action What happens if you shine the light from a torch on to a worm?, What happens when you put an ice cube into warm water?, What happens if ? Are the kinds of questions that lead to investigation.
  • 124. 1 14 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING Problem-posing Give children a challenge and leave them to work out how to meet it. Questions such as Can you find a way to make your string telephone sound clearer? and How can you make a coloured shadow? require children to have experience or knowledge that they can apply in tackling the problem. Without such knowledge, the question may not even make sense to the children. Source: Harlen and Qualter (2004) It does not matter what classification of questions you use in conducting the inquiry lesson, each type of question has its own purpose. It should be used at different points of the inquiry lesson , depending on your purpose or depending on the phase of the inquiry cycle. SELF-CHECK 5.5 1. Look at the table below. Identify whether the following questions are convergent or divergent. Then, change the convergent questions into divergent questions. Questions Convergent/Divergent 1. What do you think I am going to do with this material? 2. What conclusions can you make from the data? 3. Can anything else be done to improve the design? 4. Is baking powder a producer of gas? 5. Do you think heat caused the plant to wilt? 6. What can you tell me about pollution in this area from the photograph? 7. Which of these animals would you like to be and why? 8. Would you say you have sufficient information to come to that conclusion? 9. How can you make the bulb light up with the wire, switch and battery? 10. How would you describe the world during the time of the dinosaurs?
  • 125. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 115 2. Which of these are good questions for an inquiry lesson? Give your reasons. (a) How does a siphon work? (b) Are all big trees of the same size, shape and age? (c) Look at the culture plates. What do you see? 5.4.2 Ways to Facilitate Questioning from Students If you want your students to continue asking questions, you should give them feedback. They would want to know if their inquiries are acceptable or logical. To respond to their questions effectively, you may find the following guidelines useful: (a) Wait for children to think and formulate responses Researchers have found that you have to wait at least 5 seconds before you rephrase the question. This period, called wait-time, is for the students to think about the answer. (b) Do not interrupt childrenÊs answers Sometimes you interrupt because you think you know what the children are going to say, or they are not giving you the expected answer. You should be patient and listen to their full response before you decide they have understood or not. (c) Show that you are interested in their answers, whether right or wrong You could acknowledge their answers by saying „yes‰, nod your head, use facial expressions that show you are listening and interested in their answers. (d) Develop responses that keep children thinking Do not immediately accept an answer from a student. Ask other students to give their responses, or ask the same student to elaborate further.
  • 126. 1 16 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING (e) If a student gives an incorrect or weak answer, point out its weakness, but ask the student a follow-up question that will lead to the correct or stronger answer For example, note that the studentÊs answer overlooks the most important conclusion of the study you are discussing. Then, ask the same student to recall what that conclusion is. If he or she does not recall the conclusion, open this question up to the class. (f) Give feedback in terms of explicit criteria Be clear, specific and personal when giving the feedback. This will help the student to continue with that kind of question or answer if it is good, or if it isn't improve on it. (g) Only give feedback on one aspect of their work at a time This will help them to focus on one aspect, improve on it, and move on to the next. This is easier than trying to improve on so many aspects at the same time. Using different kinds of questions to facilitate your studentÊs questioning, needs practice and planning. You cannot just enter a classroom without knowing what to ask at the beginning, middle and end of the lesson. Remember, practice makes perfect! ACTIVITY 5.6 Choose a topic from the curiculum. 1. Plan a lesson using the inquiry learning method. 2. Ask a senior colleague to critique your lesson plan. 3. Replan it.
  • 127. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 117 Inquiry is the process of defining and investigating problems, formulating hypotheses, designing experiments, gathering data and drawing conclusions about problems. Discovery is the product of the inquiry process. Inquiry is a student-centred approach. DeweyÊs inquiry cycle consists of ask, investigate, create, discuss, and reflect. Marner and Myers' inquiry cycle consists of inquisition, acquisition, supposition, implementation, summation and exhibition. The advantages of inquiry learning are: students can develop critical and creative thinking; scientific skills; and social and intra-personal skills. Students can also become independent learners as inquiry learning could give them the opportunity to develop their self-directed learning skills. This is a useful skill if we want students to adopt life-long learning. The three types of inquiry learning are structured, guided and open inquiry. Structured inquiry is the first stage where most of what is needed for the inquiry process is prepared by the teacher. Guided inquiry is the intermediate phase where, the teacher poses a question and provides the students only with materials to be used in their investigation. In open inquiry, students formulate their own problem to solve and determine the procedures to inquiry. The questioning skills of the teacher as well as the students are central to inquiry learning. Different types of questions should be used at different stages of the inquiry process.
  • 128. 1 18 TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING Questions can be categorised as convergent and divergent; as six levels of cognition in BloomÊs taxonomy; or as productive and non-productive questions. Productive questions will enhance inquiry learning. BloomÊs taxonomy Convergent Discovery Divergent Guided inquiry Inquiry cycle Inquiry learning Open inquiry Productive questions Structured inquiry Asking Questions. (n.d.). Retrieved June 1, 2011, from http://www.youthlearn.org/learning/teaching/techniques/asking-questions/ asking-questions Colburn, A. (2000). An inquiry primer. Science scope. March 2000. Retrieved June 15, 2011, from http://www.experientiallearning.ucdavis.edu/module2/ el2-60-primer.pdf. Hackett, J., Pratt, H. Teaching science: The inquiry approach. Principal (Reston, Va.). 78 no2, p20-2 N '98. Retrieved June 2, 2011, from http://www.library.unesco-iicba.org/English/PRIMARY_SCIENCE_ SERIES/SCIENCE_PAGES/science_articles/teaching_science_the_inquiry_ approach.htm Harlen, W., Qualter, A. (2004). The teaching of science in primary schools (4th ed.). London: David Fulton Publishers. Institute for Inquiry. (1995, MarchApril). Inquiry based science: What does it look like? Connect Magazine, 13. Retrieved June 12, 2011, from http://www.exploratorium.edu/ifi/resources/classroom/inquiry_based.h tml Martin, D. J. (2006). Elementary science methods: A constructivist approach. Methods for constructing understanding. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
  • 129. TOPIC 5 INQUIRY LEARNING 119 Martin, E. M., Sexton, C., Wagner, K., Gerlovich, J. (1994). Teaching science for all children. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. Moll, R. (2005). Teaching elementary science using inquiry-based or activities. Retrieved June 12, 2011, from http://www.ubclts.com/docs/Inquiry- Based_Learning.doc. Rashid Johar, Lilia Halim, Kamisah Othman. (2004). SBSC3403 Methodology in Teaching Science Module. Kuala Lumpur: UNITEM Sdn. Bhd. Retrieved June 2, 2011, from http://hea-www.harvard.edu/ECT/Inquiry/ inquiry1text.html. Retrieved June 15, 2011, from http://www.justsciencenow.com/inquiry/ index.htm Retrieved June 2, 2011, from http://teachingcenter.wustl.edu/asking-questions-improve- learning Skamp, K. (2004). Teaching primary science constructively. Sydney: Pearson.
  • 130. Topic 6 Constructivism LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Explain the concept of constructivism; 2. Describe the characteristics of a constructivist classroom; 3. Discuss the implications of alternative conceptions in the learning of science; and 4. Apply constructivist teaching approaches such as 5-E Learning Cycle Model, Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model and NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model in the teaching of science. INTRODUCTION As a start, let us look at the definition of a student according to this proverb: What do you think is the teacherÊs role based on the proverb? Are students seen as active or passive learners? Based on the proverb, the teacher is not viewed as a transmitter of information who just pours knowledge into studentÊs heads, but rather as someone who guides students to build their own knowledge. Students are not empty vessels; they are learners with prior knowledge who participate and take part actively in their own learning. These are the main principles of constructivism.
  • 131. TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 121 Constructivism is an approach to learning in which learners are provided an opportunity to construct their own ideas of what is being learnt by building internal connections or relationships among the ideas and facts being taught (Borich Tombari, 1997). In this topic, you will learn about the meaning of constructivism and the characteristics of a constructivist classroom. You will then explore alternative conceptions and implications to science learning. You will also learn how you can apply constructivist learning approaches such as Learning Cycles Model, Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model and NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model in the teaching of science. ACTIVITY 6.1 „In the constructivist view, children actively construct knowledge by continuously assimilating and accommodating new information.‰ What do you understand by this statement? This statement can be linked to whose theory? Discuss with your tutor and coursemates. WHAT IS CONSTRUCTIVISM? 6.1 (Anderson, 1989). Constructivism is derived from cognitive psychology. It is based largely on PiagetÊs and VygotskyÊs work, both of whom emphasise that cognitive change only takes place when previous conceptions go through a process of disequilibration when new information is received. Do you remember reading about disequilibration and adaptation in Topic 3? You will remember that new information has to be either assimilated or accommodated into the existing schemata during learning. The basic idea of constructivism is that learners are not „„blank slates‰ or „„empty cups‰ to be filled with knowledge but that they already have a huge body of knowledge and experience. This means there is already existing schema in their minds. Since knowledge is a structured network rather than a disconnected bundle of facts, new knowledge has to be built on the foundation of existing knowledge and integrated with it either through assimilation or accommodation. In constructivism, learners construct knowledge for themselves as shown in Figure 6.1. This means that teachers cannot simply „pour‰ knowledge into studentsÊ heads. Students need to construct knowledge in their own minds. The
  • 132. 1 22 TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM constructivist learners are active creators of their own knowledge. What does this mean to you as a science teacher? Figure 6.1: Constructivist view of learning Source: http://syifadanmpt1393.wordpress.com/page/3/) ACTIVITY 6.2 1. Define constructivism in your own words. 2. Discuss with your tutor and coursemates why there is a change of emphasis to constructivism in the teaching of science.
  • 133. TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 123 6.1.1 Characteristics of a Constructivist Classroom How can you practice constructivism in your science classroom? What characteristics should your science classroom have? Figure 6.2 shows the main characteristics of a constructivist classroom. Figure 6.2: Main characteristics of a constructivist classroom Study each of the characteristics carefully. Does your science classroom have these characteristics? Do the following activities and then continue reading the next sections to learn more on how you can practise constructivism in your science classroom.
  • 134. 1 24 TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM ACTIVITY 6.3 Compare and contrast a traditional science classroom with a constructivist science classroom. Present your answer in the form of a table. Then, discuss it with your tutor and coursemates. SELF-CHECK 6.1 1. Which of the following statements is correct about constructivism? (A) Meaning is created by students, not acquired. (B) Strategies used include reinforcement and practice. (C) Teacher delivers information systematically. (D) Students learn basic skills before they move on to more complex processes. 2. In a science classroom, how can the lesson be conducted with a constructivist approach? (A) By following the curriculum strictly. (B) View students as thinkers with ideas about the world. (C) Present the curriculum in parts with emphasis on basic skills. (D) Rely less on experimental data and manipulative materials. ALTERNATIVE CONCEPTIONS: SCIENCE LEARNING IMPLICATIONS 6.2 How do you present a science concept to your students? What do you do if they have the wrong concept of science? Figure 6.3 shows some students might have misconceptions in primary school might have about science.
  • 135. TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 125 Figure 6.3: Student misconceptions about science Source: http://www.peter-ould.net/2011/02/23/what-is-marriage-children/ As you can see from the picture above, the children have the wrong idea about certain science concepts. These ideas are known as alternative conceptions. What do alternative conceptions mean? Let us read the definition of alternative conceptions given below: Alternative conceptions are „experience-based explanations constructed by a learner to make a range of natural phenomena and objects intelligible‰. (Wandersee, 1994) As you can see, alternative conceptions are ideas learners have constructed for themselves based on their experiences to make sense of phenomena around them. Sometimes these ideas might be different from scientific concepts and principles taught in science instruction as shown in Figure 6.3. Other terms used to describe these ideas are alternative frameworks, preconceptions, misconceptions or naive conceptions. Educational research shows that students enter the classroom with their own ideas about concepts the teacher wants them to learn. This is especially so with science. In fact, students have had prior experiences about many topics in
  • 136. 1 26 TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM science. For example, they might have seen the sun „changing‰ its position. Based on these experiences they would make conclusions as shown in Figure 6.3. Scientists will readily dismiss these misconceptions but that may not be easy for young students to do so. Children might prefer these false conceptions over scientific knowledge and this can hinder their understanding of accepted scientific explanations. It is important that you, as a teacher, are aware of these alternative conceptions and take appropriate steps to correct them. Misconceptions should not be viewed as wrong as it is natural for children to form ideas from their daily experience. This is how they make sense of the world. It is your responsibility to work with this existing knowledge and understanding and to develop it (Farmery, 2002). How can you go about doing this? You need to first identify alternative concepts that your students have with regards to the science concepts that you want to teach. You can do this through observation or assessment. For example, you can give a pre-test, or interview them, or give them a concept mapping exercise or give them questionnaires to answer. Once you know your studentsÊ misconceptions, you can prepare hands-on activities for students to learn the correct concepts. Finally, you can provide exercises in the forms of worksheets or quizzes where students can consolidate and apply their new learning. These steps are summarised in Figure 6.4.
  • 137. TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 127 Figure 6.4: Steps to correct studentsÊ alternative conceptions Adapted from Edwards and Knight, 1994 ACTIVITY 6.4 Choose a concept from the primary science curriculum: 1. Use an appropriate technique to identify your studentsÊ alternative conceptions. 2. Plan an activity you can carry out to correct your studentsÊ alternative conceptions.
  • 138. 1 28 TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM CONSTRUCTIVIST TEACHING APPROACHES Looking back at your own style of teaching, do you think you adopt the constructivist teaching approaches? Do you know any of the approaches? To teach using a constructivist approach, you need to provide opportunities for students to explore and involve themselves directly in activities that require them to think or reflect. There are many models that have been developed using the constructivist approach. Three of the them are: (a) 5-E Learning Cycle Model; (b) Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model; and (c) NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model. 6.3.1 5-E Learning Cycle Model In the 5-E Learning Cycle model, teaching is divided into a sequence of steps or phases. This sequence is known as a learning cycle. They are 5 steps/phases in 5-E Learning Cycle. Further elaboration on the model is shown in Table 6.1. Table 6.1: The 5-E Learning Cycle Model Phase / Step Aim TeacherÊs Actions Step 1: ENGAGE Elicit prior knowledge. Motivate. Get attention. Assesses students' prior knowledge. Reads a story, asks questions. Does a demonstration. Shows a video clip. Step 2: EXPLORE Get students involved in the topic. Provide students a chance to build their own understanding. Gives students time to work with one another to explore ideas through activities. Act as a facilitator by encouraging, listening, observing and questioning students. Step 3: EXPLAIN Provide students with an opportunity to communicate what they have learnt and explain their ideas. Teaches students to construct explanations of the concepts they are exploring. Clarifies students' understanding of concepts and helps them to develop skills. 6.3
  • 139. TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 129 Step 4: ELABORATE Allow students to use their new knowledge and continue to explore. Help students to apply what they have learned to a new situation. Help students to extend what they have learned. Step 5: EVALUATE Determine how much learning and understanding has taken place. Assesses the students' understanding of the concept by observing and asking them open-ended questions. Also uses journals, drawings, models, projects, portfolios and other performance tasks to evaluate students. Adapted from Trowbridge, L. W., Bybee, R. W., Powell, J. C. (2000) ACTIVITY 6.5 1. Choose a topic from the primary science curriculum. Plan appropriate activities for each phase of the 5-E Learning Cycle Model. 2. Then, carry out the lesson in your class. Discuss the effectiveness of your lesson with your coursemates during the tutorial session. 6.3.2 Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model The Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model is another constructivist approach which can be used in the teaching of science. It is good if this approach can be accompanied by demonstration as it is suitable in teaching about the physical and material world in the science curriculum.
  • 140. 1 30 TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM Figure 6.5: Demonstration to show heating causes expansion of gases Source: http://www.online.bcelearner.ca/login/index.php For example, you could show the apparatus in Figure 6.5 to your students first and ask them to predict what will happen if hot water is poured into the pan. After students have made their predictions, you carry out the demonstration by firstly pouring hot water into the pan. Students are asked to observe and write down the results of the demonstration. Finally, the students are asked to compare their initial predictions with what they see in their observations. These steps are summarised in Table 6.2. Table 6.2: The Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Learning Model Step Details Step 1: PREDICT Ask the students to predict the outcome of an experiment. Step 2: OBSERVE Carry out the demonstration. Ask students to write down what they see. Step 3: EXPLAIN Ask students to rectify their explanation if their prediction is different from their observation. After students have written their explanations on paper, ask them to discuss their ideas with the class.
  • 141. TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 131 1. Prepare an appropriate activity to teach any science concept from the primary science curriculum using the Predict-Observe- Explain (POE) Model. 2. Carry out the activity in your classroom. Discuss the effectiveness of your activity with your coursemates. 6.3.3 Needham's Five Phase Model NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model is another important constructivist approach. It is shown in Table 6.3. Table 6.3: Needham's Five Phase Model Phase Aim Activities Orientation Teacher tries to stimulate studentsÊ interest. Laboratory practical work, solving problem, demonstration, film clips, video, newspaper articles. Elicitation of ideas Teacher finds out studentsÊ prior knowledge and determine whether there are any misconceptions there . Practical, group discussion, concept map, report. Restructuring of ideas Teacher carries out activities to help students correct their misconceptions and learn new concepts. Discussion, reading, teacherÊs input, practical work, project, experiment, demonstration. Application of ideas Teacher gives student the opportunity to use their developed ideas in a variety of situations, both familiar and different. Application in similar situations such as in daily life, solving problems, writing project reports. Reflection Teacher asks students to reflect on their ideas which might have changed from the beginning of the lesson with that at the end of it. Writing of reflective journals, self-reflection, group discussion of outcomes of lesson. ACTIVITY 6.6
  • 142. 1 32 TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM Constructivism is a theory in which individuals construct knowledge through experience, and prior knowledge. It requires hands-on learning. Teachers and students need to play active roles in the teaching learning process. The constructivist approach to learning takes into consideration ideas that children have so that suitable activities can be prepared to correct their alternative conceptions. SELF-CHECK 6.2 1. What do you understand about constructivism? 2. List the characteristics of constructivist learning. 3. Discuss two benefits of constructivism. 4. Discuss the roles of the teacher and student in constructivist learning. 5. Explain why the 5-E Learning Cycle Model, Predict, Observe and Explain (POE) Model and NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model are known as constructivist models. ACTIVITY 6.7 Study NeedhamÊs Five Phase Constructivist Model carefully. Then choose a topic from the primary science curriculum and plan a lesson using NeedhamÊs Model. Carry out your lesson. Write a brief report of your lesson.
  • 143. TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 133 Constructivism is a theory in which individuals construct knowledge through participation experience, and prior knowledge. Students are not empty vessels. They have prior knowledge and can participate and take part actively in their own learning. The teacherÊs role is that of a facilitator. The main characteristics of a constructivist classroom are as follows: it is student centred and the teacher acts as a facilitator. There is cognitive exploration through suitable activities. Students have autonomy that is they are in charge of their own learning. There are discussion of ideas that allow students to interact with one another. Alternative conceptions are ideas learners have constructed by themselves based on their experiences, that is, in their effort to make sense of the phenomena around them. Sometimes these ideas might be different those of from scientific concepts and principles taught in science class. Students do not easily get rid of their beliefs and might choose alternative conceptions over scientific knowledge. This can affect their understanding of the latter. It is important for teachers to be are aware of alternative conceptions and take appropriate steps to correct them. Models which make use of constructivist approach are the 5-E Learning Cycle Model, the Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model and NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model. There are 5 steps/phases in 5-E Learning Cycle. They are engage, explore, explain, elaborate and evaluate. Each phase has a specific function. The Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) requires students to first predict, then observe demonstrations and then explain the differences in the prediction and actual occurences. There are also 5 phases in NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model. They are orientation, the elicitation/generation of ideas, restructuring of ideas, application of ideas and reflection.
  • 144. 1 34 TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 5-E Learning Cycle Model Alternative Conceptions Cognitive Exploration Constructivism Hands-on Activities Minds-on Activities Misconceptions Naive Conceptions NeedhamÊs Five Phase Model Preconceptions Predict-Observe-Explain (POE) Model Student Autonomy Student-centred Anderson, L. M. (1989). Learners and learning. Slavin, R. E. (1994). Educational Psychology. Pg 48. (1994). Massachusetts. Allyn and Bacon. Borich, G. D., Tombari, M. L. (1997). Educational psychology: A contemporary approach. New York: Allyn Bacon. Esler, W. K., Esler, M. K. (2001). Teaching elementary science (8th ed.). Washington: Wadsworth Publishing Company. Farmery, C. (2002). Teaching science 3-11. The essential guide. Great Britain: Biddles Ltd, Guildford, and KingÊs Lynn. Martin, R., Sexton, C., Gerlovich, J. (2002). Teaching science for all children- Methods for constructing understanding. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. Retrieved 27 June 2011 http://enhancinged.wgbh.org/research/eeeee.html Retrieved 27 June 2011 http://www.palmbeachschools.org/qa/documents/ Handout3-5EModelofInstruction.pdf Retrieved 28 June 2011 http://arb.nzcer.org.nz/strategies/poe.php Retrieved 29 June 2011 http://digitalcommons.unl.edu/cgi/viewcontent.cgi? article=1019context=teachlearnfacpub Retrieved 29 June 2011-06-29 http://www.apa.org/education/k12/alternative-conceptions. aspx Skamp, K. (2004). Teaching primary science constructively. Southbank, Victoria: Harcourt Brace.
  • 145. TOPIC 6 CONSTRUCTIVISM 135 Trowbridge, L. W., Bybee, R. W., Powell, J. C. (2000). Teaching secondary school science strategies for developing scientific literacy. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
  • 146. Topic 7 Teaching Approaches in Science LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Desribe the science, technology and society approach in teaching science; 2. Describe the contextual approach in teaching science; and 3. Describe the problem-based teaching approach in science. INTRODUCTION Do you still remember teacher Areena in Topic 5? She was very happy when she found out that most of her students understood the concepts that she has taught them. So she decided to use the same approach on another class. However this time when she assessed the students' understanding, she found only a few could understand the concepts taught. She wondered why. She asked her students for feedback and later talked to her colleagues about it. What do you think she should do next? Probably she should explore other teaching approaches that are suitable for this particular group of students. Some of them need to see the relationship between new information and experiences that they already have, or with other knowledge they have already mastered in order to understand the new
  • 147. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 137 knowledge. Students' interest and motivation could also be increased as they could see how those concepts can be used outside the classroom, in their workplace and within the larger society in which they live and work. This is the essence of contextual approach of teaching and learning science. In this topic, we will be discussing three approaches for teaching science: (a) Contextual approach; (b) Science, technology and society approach; and (c) Problem-based learning approach. All these approaches have their own unique characteristics that would suit certain group of students or for teaching certain science topics. Science, technology and society approach looks at the application of scientific knowledge in everyday life and the impact of technology upon mankind and environment. The main focus of contextual approach is looking at how to relate scientific knowledge and skills to daily life events so that the students can see the reason why they need to learn them. On the other hand, in problem-based learning, students are made to engage in solving problems in the society. All three teaching approaches have common characteristics i.e. they use interdisciplinary approaches and discuss real-world or authentic problems. ACTIVITY 7.1 Use KWL (Know, Want, Learn) chart, list what you know and want to learn about the three approaches of teaching science. SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY AND SOCIETY APPROACH 7.1 According to Yager (1996), most people think of science as the subject studied in science classes, that is, the science that they report as not too useful, or not particularly valuable, or not useful to their daily life. Yet, the same people also feel that the subject of science taught in schools is valuable for their children. Why do these people have conflicting ideas about the learning of science? The reason could be because, those days, they could not determine the usefulness of science. They only view science as the mastery of certain concepts about the natural world.
  • 148. 1 38 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE A new approach is needed to teach science if we want to change the views of these people. One approach suggested by educational reformers is the science, technology and society (STS) approach. 7.1.1 Concept of STS There is no clear definition of STS (Aldridge, 1992). To him, STS is „.. a new approach to teaching science...where technology provides a tie to current problems...‰. STS involves „real-life situations...making decisions in society...‰ and „such personal concerns as nutrition, health, safety, and maintanance of the environment.‰ „ STS aims to integrate science with technology.‰ Science, technology and society is the study of how social, political and cultural values affect scientific research and technological innovation; and how these in turn affect society, politics, and culture (Figure 7.1). STS means focusing on personal needs of students - that is, teaching students science concepts and process skills that are useful in their daily lives. It also focuses on societal issues, that is, issues and problems at home, school, and the community as well as universal problems that concern all man kind. STS also means focusing on the occupations and careers that are known today; it means using human resources in identifying and resolving local issues (Yager, 1996). Figure 7.1: The essence of STS education Source: http://www.usask.ca/education/people/aikenhead/sts05.htm
  • 149. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 139 This approach aims to teach science and technology to society in an integrated manner as science and technology will shape society, and society will shape science and technology. In order to do this, the teaching should use multidisciplinary approaches meaning that, to explore and understand the impact of science and technology upon a society, we need to use knowledge and skills from other disciplines other than just science. STS explores a variety of problems including the relationships between scientific and technological innovations, and the directions and risks of science and technology and their effects on society. ACTIVITY 7.2 Read the definition of STS by Aldridge again and think about it. Then, write your definition of STS. 7.1.2 Background of STS Approach The STS movement began in several European countries. There were also domestic attempts to institute an STS-like curriculum, in the University of Iowa Laboratory School during the early 1960s (Yager, 1990). According to Yager, the effort in the United States was finally given an added emphasis in the early 1980s in order to address the concern for science education and strive for academic excellence. The issue was to create a science programme that would involve all students not just the one or two percent who would eventually study science at tertiary level. The idea behind the STS programme was to provide a real-world connection between the classroom and society for the students. The process should give the students practice in identifying potential problems, collecting data with regard to the problems, considering alternative solutions, and considering the consequences based on particular decisions (Yager, 1990). The STS approach views science subjects in schools in a much broader sense than does the typical discipline-centred, textbook-driven science course. Zoller (1992), describes the need for all students to be informed of the content and processes in science, but with the understanding that science and society have an impact on each other.
  • 150. 1 40 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 7.1.3 Characteristics of STS Approach Having read about the concept and background of the STS approach, we shall now proceed to look at its characteristics. Brunkhorst and Yager (1990), examined a number of exemplary STS programmes, and found that most have the following characteristics: (a) They emphasise scientific knowledge for all students; (b) They emphasise higher order thinking skills across content areas; (c) They are interdisciplinary in nature; (d) They are hands-on and student-centred programmes that require students to use their mental faculties; (e) They include student action plans, projects, field experiences and field research; (f) They utilise many outside resources; (g) They tie STS issues to the traditional content of the course; (h) Evaluation is structured very differently; (i) Evaluation includes awareness and reasoning components; (j) In many cases, there is no attempt to use typical tests; instead, tests are designed to assess a variety of domains; and (k) When standardised tests and/or textbooks are used, students do well (if not better) than students in typical science courses. Do you realise that these characteristics point towards achieving the current notion of what constitutes scientific literacy using science in making responsible decision about societal issues? Aikenhead (1994) in his paper entitled ÂConsequences to Learning Science Through STS: A Research PerspectiveÊ concluded that: (a) Students in STS classes (compared to those in traditional science classes) significantly improved their understanding of (i) the social issues involving science, and (ii) how science, technology and society interact with one another; depending on what content is emphasised and evaluated by the teacher; (b) Students in STS classes significantly improved their attitudes towards science, science classes and learning, resulting from STS content and STS teaching methods;
  • 151. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 141 (c) Students in STS classes not only make modest but significant gains in the way they think, such as applying scientific knowledge to everyday situations. They also developed critical and creative thinking and decision making, as long as these skills are explicitly practised and evaluated; (d) StudentsÊ achievement on traditional subject matter at the next level of science education (at a higher grade level or at university) will not be significantly compromised by teaching science through STS. This result is particularly true only for more academically talented students; (e) Students can benefit from studying science through an STS approach, provided that: (i) The instruction is at least category 3-type or higher (refer to Table 5.1 in Topic 5); (ii) Appropriate classroom materials are available; and (iii) A teacher's orientation toward science instruction is in reasonable synchrony with the STS approach expected to be used. The following are examples of issues that can be discused using the science, technology and society approach: (a) Globally, energy use is on the rise, and energy in any form is being sought after like never before. Yet, some types of energy are far more difficult to find than others. This could easily include science concepts like the different forms of energy, renewable and non-renewable energy, and how energy is used in our modern world. (b) In the year 2000, 50% of the global population lived in cities. By 2025, the world's city dwellers are expected to reach 5 billion, i.e. over 70% increase of the present global population. The basic concepts discussed would be population growth and how it affect environment. (c) Human-induced climate change, which we are already experiencing, is confronting civilisation with challenging problems for the science, engineering, and political institutions to collaboratively solve. (d) Safe food and clean water are becoming ever more difficult to obtain, particularly in many poorer parts of the world. (e) Doctors and medical specialists are developing new techniques in biological processes, yet many of these promising solutions pose social and ethical problems that have never been faced before.
  • 152. 1 42 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE In conclusion, STS approach is the involvement of learners in experiences and issues which are directly related to their lives. As such this approach provides students with the skills which allow them to become active and responsible citizens. Eventually, they will become scientifically literate citizens. ACTIVITY 7.3 1. List a few examples of issues that can be used in science lesson using the STS approach. 2. Discuss some challenges that a teacher may encounter using the STS approach. CONTEXTUAL APPROACH IN TEACHING AND LEARNING OF SCIENCE 7.2 Why do I need to learn about force, human anatomy or the characteristics of hydrogen gas? These are questions that some students usually ask. In contextual approach of teaching, the teacher may ask, „How can I communicate effectively with students who wonder about the reasons for, the meaning of, and the relevance of what they study?‰ and „How can we open the minds of a diverse student population so they can learn concepts and techniques that will open doors of opportunity for them throughout their lives?‰. These are among the daily concerns of a science teacher. The answer to this problem lies in a curriculum and an instructional approach based on contextual learning. To break it down simply, contextual teaching and learning (CTL) approach relates to what is being taught in the context of the real world, with the hope to engage the students in interactions to eliminate the question Why do I need to learn this stuff?.
  • 153. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 143 7.2.1 Definitions and Concepts of CTL Approach The contextual approach recognises that learning is a complex and multifaceted process that goes far beyond drill-oriented, stimulus-and-response methodologies. According to contextual learning theory, learning occurs only when students process new information or knowledge in such a way that it makes sense to them in their own frames of reference (their own inner worlds of memory, experiences and responses). This approach to learning and teaching assumes that the mind naturally seeks meaning in context, that is, in relation to a person's current environment, and that it does so by searching for relationships that make sense and appear useful to that person. Building upon this understanding, contextual learning theory focuses on the multiple aspects of any learning environment, whether a classroom, a laboratory, a computer lab, a worksite or even a vegetable garden. It encourages educators to choose and design learning environments that incorporate as many different forms of experience as possible social, cultural, physical and psychological in working towards the desired learning outcomes. In such an environment, students discover meaningful relationships between abstract ideas and practical applications in the context of the real world; concepts are internalised through the process of discovering, reinforcing, and relating. For example, a physics class studying thermal conductivity might measure how the quality and amount of building insulation material affect the amount of energy required to keep the building heated or cooled. Meanwhile, in a biology or chemistry class students might learn basic scientific concepts by studying the spread of AIDS or the ways in which farmers suffer from and contribute to environmental degradation (CORD, 1996, p.1). During the late Â70s and the early Â80s, reports and discussion documents of the UK government advocated the need for broad and balanced science for all. This stimulated change and development of science curriculum education in the UK (Yam, n.d). Among the issues that were proposed to be addressed include the following: (a) Scientific literacy; (b) Public understanding of science; and (c) Decreasing number of students who want to take up science at A-levels. During the Â80s in the US, the concern of lowering high school achievements, lack of standards in students' performance and the mismatch between high school
  • 154. 1 44 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE education and work sparked efforts to encourage educational reforms to facilitate students' transition from the school to the working world and real life. Seen in this context, CTL motivates more students to study science as it provides an authentic picture of science, and plays a role in peopleÊs lives. When students see the connection of what they learnt in the science classroom and the world, they will find learning meaningful as they see that what they learnt makes them understand more of the things and phenomena around them. Lubben et al.(2005) observes that contextualised lessons allow students to: (a) Work on personally useful applications of science; (b) Participate in the lesson activities by contributing their expertise and knowledge; and (c) Discuss contentious issues. There are many definitions of the so called contextual learning. A narrow perspective of context would be to focus on an application of a principle or theory for the purpose of teaching a concept. For example, if you are teaching the different types of electrical circuits, then you would discuss examples of series and parallel circuits found in a house, in a toy or in a car. If this is contextual learning, then this has been done by almost all science teachers. However, sometimes introducing an application of a scientific principle or concept after teaching the theory may not be an effective strategy for all students. They may feel lost due to the abstract information they have to digest resulting in disinterest in the subject before they get to the point where the real-life application is introduced and explained. The broader perspective of a contextual approach adopts a constructivist model where the context is the central tenet of the discussion. Context is central to student learning, not an analytically separate entity or a backdrop to student learning. According to Berns and Erickson (2001), „contextual teaching and learning helps students connect the content they are learning to life context in which that content could be used. Students then find meaning in the learning process. As they strive to attain learning goals, they draw upon their previous experiences and build upon existing knowledge. By learning subjects in an integrated, multidisciplinary manner and in appropriate contexts, they are able to use the acquired knowledge and skills in applicable contexts‰. In 1998, the Technical Education Department of Malaysia in its strategic plan of action introduced a contextual approach of teaching science in technical schools throughout the country (Nafisah Kamariah Md Kamaruddin Zulkarnain Md
  • 155. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 145 Amin). This plan was in view of the prospective marketability of the school leavers upon completion of secondary school education. Previously, skilled craftsman and apprentices performed tasks manually with their bare hands and basic traditional tools, but now all that have changed drastically with the introduction of technology influencing the workplace. Malaysia, like other developing countries in the world, has been under pressure from individuals, community and various levels of educational institutions to turn out not only students who are academically knowledgeable, but also those who can apply this knowledge contextually. We may have advanced in science and technology, but the school of thought that educators still uphold is to disseminate knowledge and skills, which in current times, does not serve the demands and needs of the ever-changing society. The definition of CTL that the Technical Education Department Malaysia uses is the one that was given by the Centre for Occupational Research and Development (First Malaysian Tech Prep National Convention, 1997) which is learning that incorporates examples drawn from everyday experiences in the personal, societal and occupational life and which also provides concrete hands-on applications of material to be learned. Contextual Approach was introduced for the studentsÊ technical and career preparation or Tech Prep by the Centre for Occupational Research and Development, Texas, USA. SELF-CHECK 7.1 Which statements are true about contextual learning? Mark True (T) or False (F) in the column below. Statement T/F Contextual learning theory focuses on the multiple aspects of any learning environment. Contextual learning relates what is being taught with the context of the real world. Most teachers claim that the contextual approach is adopted to make the learning process interesting. Students discover meaningful relationships between abstract ideas and practical applications in the context of the real world. Contextual learning can only be used in teaching applied science content.
  • 156. 1 46 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 7.2.2 CTL Forms of Learning There are five essential forms of learning in contextual learning which are shown in Figure 7.2. Figure 7.2: Five essentials of learning Source: http://www.cord.org/the-react-learning-strategy/ Let us read the elaboration on each form further: (a) Relating Here, the teacher encourages students to relate what they learn in the classroom to real-life experiences. In traditional teaching of science, what they learn in the science classroom or laboratory stays in those rooms. The content of science is treated in isolation of what is happening in the real world. As such, students are not quite sure how science fits into their social roles or responsibilities. Under ideal conditions, teachers might simply lead students from one community-based activity to another, encouraging them to relate what they are learning to real-life experience. Thus, you must use everyday sights, events and conditions as a starting point before introducing new information or solving problems. As such, you are relating learning in the context of life experiences. What is learned will stay with the students much longer, and the impact of the subject material will be stronger. The learning will be much more focused and helpful to the students. They will really care and really want to be good at what is learned. Students will be much more active and self-motivated in the learning process.
  • 157. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 147 (b) Experiencing Experiencing-learning in the context of exploration, discovery and invention·is the heart of contextual learning. Students enjoy doing hands-on activities as they like to manipulate materials and being able to see for themselves rather than being told about the knowledge. In contextual academic texts, laboratories are often based on actual workplace tasks. The aim is not to train students for specific jobs, but to allow them to experience activities that are directly related to real-life work. Many of the activities and skills selected for labs are cross-occupational; that is, they are used in a broad spectrum of occupations. (c) Applying In contextual learning courses, applications are often based on occupational activities. If they are to get a realistic sense of connection between schoolwork and real-life jobs, then the occupational context must be brought to them. If we want them to be an engineer, for instance, then we must let them see how the knowledge and skills that they learn in the classroom are used by engineers. This could be done by letting them have firsthand experiences such as having tours to specific sites, mentoring arrangement or internship in the workplace. (d) Cooperating Learning by cooperating is sharing, responding and communicating with other learners as a primary instructional strategy in contextual teaching. The students need to learn how to work in a team. They need to be able to cooperate and be able to communicate effectively so that they will be able to function as one of the team members in the workplace later on. In the laboratory, they could work in pairs or a group of threes or fours to complete the task given to them. They would be able to practise communication and social skills and as they work in groups when solving a problem or completing the projects. They would carry these skills into their daily life and hopefully in their workplace later on. In doing so, they would be sought after by many employers.
  • 158. 1 48 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE (e) Transferring Transferring is when students use knowledge learnt in the science classroom in another context. For example, students who have learned about ICT skills can use these skills to gather information when they are researching a topic or when they are preparing reports or slides for their presentation. Later, they could also use these skills in their own chores; for example, they could be helping their parent to do online banking transactions. Transferring also uses and builds upon what the student already know. Such an approach is similar to Relating, in that it calls upon the familiar. We can help them retain their sense of dignity and develop confidence if we make a point of building new learning experiences on what they already know. Figure 7.3 illustrates the examples of contextual lesson: (a) The teacher is discussing the application of microorganism in the production of food; (b) The teacher is discussing the responsibilities of a microbiology technician, an example of a career in the field of microbiology; and (c) The teacher is discussing weight gain, a major concern for teenagers.
  • 159. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 149 Figure 7.3: Snapshot of lessons
  • 160. 1 50 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE Now, how do you determine if you are using this approach? One way is by ensuring whether you are using the following strategies: (a) Emphasise problem-solving; (b) Recognise the need for teaching and learning to occur in a variety of contexts such as home, community and work sites; (c) Teach students to monitor and direct their own learning so they become self-regulated learners; (d) Anchor teaching in students' diverse life-contexts; (e) Use teams or interdependent group structures to encourage students to learn from each other and together; and (f) Employ authentic assessment. Trying to draw a conclusion on what contextual teaching and learning approach is difficult, if not impossible. However the consensus seems to be that contextual teaching and learning approach is an attempt to make the delivery of education to be more natural. Natural here means how the brain naturally works when the students learn and work in real life by letting them actively participate, communicate and work together and learn what others are good at; and to be of higher order, including training on problem solving, decision making, creative and critical thinking (Yam, n.d). In order to make sure the implementation of this approach is sucessful, the school must agree on a definition of what learners should learn and what strategies support learning. Then, the learning also needs considerable support from the school organisation from the headmaster to non-academic staff and the parents as well. Finally, external support provides encouragement and resources to help students and educators create high quality teaching and learning. ACTIVITY 7.4 1. Take this self-test and see if you are teaching contextually. These standards appear to some degree in almost all texts. However, contextual instruction is rich in all ten standards. 1. Are new concepts presented in real-life (outside the classroom) situations and experiences that are familiar to the student?
  • 161. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 151 2. Are the concepts in examples and the student exercises presented in the context of their use? 3. Are new concepts presented in the context of what the student already knows? 4. Do examples and student exercises include many real, believable problem-solving situations that they can identify with. 5. Do examples and student exercises evoke their interest. 6. Do students gather and analyse data in their discovery of the important concepts. 7. Are opportunities presented for students to gather and analyse their own data for their enrichment? 8. Do lessons and activities encourage the student to apply concepts and information to useful contexts, projecting the student into imagined future undertakings (e.g., possible career) and unfamiliar locations (e.g., workplaces). 9. Do students participate regularly in interactive groups where sharing, communicating and responding to important concepts and decision making occurs. 10. Do lessons, exercises and lab sessions improve studentsÊ reading and other communication skills in addition to scientific reasoning and achievement. Source: http://www.scribd.com/doc/51699892/1/The-Contextual-Approach-to- Learning 2. Visit this website: http://www.phy.cuhk.edu.hk/contextual/ approach/tem/brief_e.html Read and summarise the main issues concerning contextual learning.
  • 162. 1 52 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE PROBLEM-BASED LEARNING (PBL) 7.3 Another teaching approach that places importance on the connection between scientific content and skills in the classroom and the real-world is problem-based learning. In doing so, the students can see why they are learning the content of science and more importantly they would be applying these content and the skills in their daily lives. Thus, the learning would be meaningful and this will motivate and increase the interest of students to learn science. 7.3.1 What is PBL? Problem-based learning (PBL) is an approach that challenges students to learn by engaging themselves in a real problem. It challenges students to seek solutions to authentic (open-ended) problems by themselves or in groups, rather than learn primarily through lectures or textbooks. More importantly, PBL engages students in developing skills as self-directed learners (Smith, 1995). Problems are selected to exploit their natural curiosity by connecting learning to students' daily life experiences and emphasising the use of critical and analytical thinking skills. It is a format that simultaneously develops both problem solving strategies and disciplinary based knowledge and skills. Students are placed in the active role of problem-solvers, confronted with an ill-structured situation that simulates the kind of problems they are likely to face as future managers in complex organisations. PBL believes that when students develop their own problem-solving procedures, they are integrating their conceptual knowledge with those of their procedural skills (Gallagher,1997). The effectiveness of PBL depends on the nature of student engagement and the culture of the classroom, as well as the appropriateness of the problem task assigned. Since students are actively involved in the learning processes, this approach is an example of student-centred learning. „Student-centred‰ refers to learning opportunities that are relevant to the students, the goals of which are at least partly determined by the students themselves. This does not mean that the teacher does nothing and lets them plan and do the learning by themselves. The teacher needs to make decisions to determine what might be important for students to learn, especially if he or she is teaching in a primary school. The context for learning in PBL is highly context-specific. It presents the content with a real-world challenge, similar to the one faced by the practitioner of the discipline. The classes usually start with the teacher presenting the problem to be solved. The „problems‰ in PBL are typically in the form of „cases‰, narratives of complex, real-world challenges common to the discipline being studied. There is
  • 163. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 153 no right or wrong answer. Instead, there are reasonable solutions based on the application of knowledge and skills deemed necessary to address the issue. The „solution‰ therefore is not only dependent on the acquisition and comprehension of facts, but also based on the ability to think critically and creatively. 7.3.2 PBL Characteristics The characteristics of PBL are as follows: (a) Student-centred and experiential Select authentic assignments from the discipline, preferably those that would be relevant and meaningful to the studentsÊ interests. They are also responsible for locating and evaluating various resources in the field. (b) Inductive Introduce content through the process of problem solving, rather than problem solving after introduction to content. The learning of the content can be built upon the challenges presented by the problem solving activity at the beginning of the lesson. If a case has some relevance to students, then they are required to call on what they already know or think they know. By focusing on their prior learning, students can test assumptions, prior learning strategies and facts. (c) Context-specific Choose real or contrived cases and determine the kinds of challenges faced by practitioners in the field. (d) Problems are complex and ambiguous, and require meta-cognition Select real-life examples from the discipline that have no simple answers. These require students to analyse their own problem solving strategies. (e) Creates cognitive conflict Select cases with information that makes simple solutions difficult. While the solution may address one part of a problem, it may create another problem. Challenge students' prior knowledge. (f) Collaborative and interdependent Have students work in small groups in order to address the presented case. Source: http://www.pbl.uci.edu/whatispbl.html
  • 164. 1 54 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE Figure 7.4 illustrates the steps that you can use to plan a problem-based learning lesson. You start by presenting the ill-defined problem to the students. Greenwald (2000) characterised an ill-defined problem as being unclear and raises questions about what is known, what needs to be known, and how the answer can be found. Because the problem is unclear, there are many ways to solve it, and the solutions are influenced by one's vantage point and experience. When the problem is presented, students will then explore and try to understand it. They will list facts about the problem that they know. If the students know very little about the problem, they will gather information and learn new concepts, principles or skills that they need as they engage in the problem-solving process. Figure 7.4: Steps in problem-based learning Source: http://www.ncsu.edu/pbl/design.html
  • 165. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 155 The second step is when students need to list what they know to solve the problem. This includes both what they actually know and the strengths and capabilities that each team member has. Then they will try to rewrite the problem in their own words. You should check the original problem presented or they can ask you to give feedback as to whether they have understood the problem. This is important because if students do not understand the problem, they would not be able to solve it. The next step would be to think of all the possible solutions. They could then arrange them in the order from the strongest to weakest solution and then choose the best one, or one that is most likely to succeed. Then they choose one possible solution, try it out and then analyse the data collected. If it seems logical, then the students have solved the problem. Otherwise they would have to repeat the process all over again. Of course, there is no right or wrong answer. What is important to stress to your students is to reach the best possible solution supported by data. Once the best possible solution has been discovered, the students can share the whole process by writing a report or presenting it to the class. Sharing the findings with teachers and other students is an opportunity in demonstrating what they have learned. 7.3.3 PBL and Inquiry Problem-based learning is the best way for students to learn how to conduct real-life science investigations. They apply many strategies they learned in science classes, such as asking questions, designing experiments and developing a hypothesis based on prior research. Also, students follow the scientific method, or a variation, as they conduct their investigation. Solving science problems and mysteries provide students with real-world applications of the inquiry-based learning. They learn to investigate the same way as scientists. When using the scientific method in combination with problem-based learning, students develop a better understanding of experimental investigations. The best type of investigation for this strategy is called science mysteries. In the investigation, students use critical thinking skills as they design and conduct an investigation to solve a mystery. They will be provided with a scenario surrounding a problem and then will follow the scientific method to solve the problem.
  • 166. 1 56 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE The students could follow the following steps to solve a problem (Figure 7.5): Figure 7.5: Steps to solve a problem using scientific method However, similar to scientific method that is not linear, inquiry-based learning allows students to skip any step. In other words, they need not start at step 1, then go to step 2, and so on. Figure 7.6 illustrates an example of a problem-based lesson in science. In this lesson, the students are solving a problem about the owl population which has been affected by a change in the environment.
  • 167. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 157
  • 168. 1 58 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE Figure 7.6: An example of a problem-based lesson Source: http://www.sciencesupport.net/pblowl.htm
  • 169. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 159 SELF-CHECK 7.2 Fill the blank spaces with the appropriate words from the list below. Authentic learning self-directed collaborative learner responsibility ACTIVITY 7.5 The problem statement is very crucial in problem-based learning. Study the example given in Figure 7.6. Choose a topic, write an authentic or real-world problem that can be used in a problem-based lesson.
  • 170. 1 60 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE All the three approaches discusssed use various types of strategies. Most of the strategies involve students doing tasks and projects individually or in groups. They do not just sit in class and listen to a teacher's presentation. The tasks that the students are asked to perform are authentic and require knowledge and skills. Thus, the assessment should also be an authentic assessment. This type of assessment will be able to evaluate the knowledge, skills and attitudes involved in doing the tasks. Students will also be able to assess themselves. Besides, it is a way to teach students to monitor and direct their own learning, so those who are left behind know that they are behind and lacking in which areas. It is also to help them self-regulate their learning as they can benefit from it tremendously in different areas and levels of abilities. ACTIVITY 7.6 Based on KWL chart that you used at the beginning of this topic, write what you have learnt about the three approaches being discussed. All three teaching approaches science, technology and society approach, contextual approach and problem-based approach are student-centred learning. Science, technology and society (STS) has been defined as teaching and learning in the context of human experiences. This approach is where students would engage with different viewpoints on issues concerning the impact of science and technology in everyday life. The students will also understand the relevance of scientific discoveries, rather than just concentrate on learning scientific facts and theories that seemed distant from their realities. STS approach will develop critical and creative thinking skills and problem solving skills. The contextual approach recognises that learning is a complex and multifaceted process that goes far beyond drill-oriented, stimulus-and-response methodologies
  • 171. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 161 When science is set in context, this is a way to motivate more students to study science as it provides an authentic picture of science, and its role in peopleÊs lives as science is the study of the natural world. When they see the connection of what they learn in the science classroom and the world, the learning will be meaningful. There are five essential forms of learning in contextual learning: relating, experiencing, applying, cooperating and transferring. Problem-based learning (PBL) is an approach that challenges students to learn through engagement with a real problem. It challenges students to seek solutions to the real-world (open-ended) problems by themselves or in groups. PBL characteristics are student-centred and experiential, inductive, builds on prior learning, context-specific, problems are complex and ambiguous, and require meta-cognition, creates cognitive conflict, and they are collaborative and interdependent. Solving science problems and mysteries provide students with real-world applications of inquiry-based learning. Applying Authentic problem Contextual approach Cooperating Experiencing Experiential Ill-defined problem Inductive Multi-discipline Problem-based learning Real-world problem Relating Science, technology and society Self-directed Student-centered Transferring
  • 172. 1 62 TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE Aikenhead, G. (1994). What is STS Science Teaching. Retrieved July 10, 2011, from http://www.usask.ca/education/people/aikenhead/sts05.htm Aikenhead, G. (1994). Consequences to Learning Science Through STS: A Research Perspective. Retrieved July 2, 2011, from http://www.usask.ca/education/people/aikenhead/sts16.htm Aldridge, B. G. (1992). Basic science or STS: Which is better for science learning? Improve science education using basic science with application. In Handbook of science, technology and society.Arizona State University Berns, R. G., Erikson, P. (2001). Contextual teaching and learning. The Higlight Zone: Research @ Work No. 5. The National Centers for Career and Technical Education, USA. Brunkhorst, H. K., Yager, R. E. (1990). Beneficiaries or victims. School Science and Mathematics, 90 (1), 61-69 CORD. What is Contextual Learning? Retrieved July 7, 2011, from http://www.cord.org/contextual-learning-definition/ Gallagher, S. A. (1997). Problem-based learning: Where did it come from, what does it do, and where is it going? Journal for the Education of the Gifted, 20(4), 332-362 Gallow, D. (n.d). What is Problem-Based Learning? Retrieved July 1, 2011, from http://www.pbl.uci.edu/whatispbl.html Greenwald, N. L. (2000). Learning from problems. The Science Teacher, 67 (4), 28- 32. Lubben, F., Bennett, J., Hogarth, S., Robinson, A. (2005). A systematic review of the effects of context based and Science-Technology-Society (STS) approaches in the teaching of secondary science on boys and girls, and on lower ability pupils. In Research Evidence in Education Library. London: EPPI-Centre, Social Science Research Unit, Institute of Education, University of London. Nafisah Kamariah Md Kamaruddin Zulkarnain Md Amin, (n.d). Implementation of Contextual System in Mathematics Course. Retrieved July 4, 2011, from http://eprints.uthm.edu.my/108/1/nafisah_kamariah.pdf- Smith, C. A. (1995). Features section: problem based learning. Biochemistry and Molecular Biology Education, 23 (3), 149-152. Study Guides and Strategies (n.d). Problem-based Learning. Retrieved June 25, 2011, from http://www.studygs.net/pbl.htm-
  • 173. TOPIC 7 TEACHING APPROACHES IN SCIENCE 163 Teaching Science Contextually: The Cornerstone of Tech Prep3. Retrieved July 2, 2011, from http://www.scribd.com/doc/51699892/1/The-Contextual- Approach-to-Learning. TeachNET. What is contextual teaching and learning. Retrieved July 1, 2011, from http://www.cew.wisc.edu/teachnet/ctl/ Yager, R. E. (1990). The science/technology/society movement in the United states: Its origin, evolution, and rationale. Social education, 54 (4), 198-200. Yager, R. E.(1996). Science/technology/society. As reform in science education. Albany: State University of New York Press. Yam, H. ( n.d). What is contextual learning and teaching in physics? Retrieved July 10, 2011, from http://www.phy.cuhk.edu.hk/contextual/approach/ tem/brief_e.html Zoller, U. (1992). The technology/education interface: STES education for all. Canadian Journal of Education, 17 (1), 86-91.
  • 174. Topic 8 Teaching and Learning Methods LEARNING OUTCOMES By the end of this topic, you should be able to: 1. Plan experiments effectively for the teaching and learning of scientific concepts; 2. Describe how you can carry out discussions in your lesson effectively; 3. Discuss how you can use simulations in your teaching; 4. Describe how you can use projects to teach science; and 5. Plan and organise visits to external resources effectively in order to enrich science learning. INTRODUCTION We have now come to the last topic of this module. To begin with, let us look at Figure 8.1.
  • 175. TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 165 Figure 8.1: A classroom scene Source: http://edserver1.uow.edu.au/DiveInEduc/contents/student/inschools/ malaysia.html Figure 8.1 shows a classroom scene where the students are doing their own thing and the level of involvement in learning is low. What can you do to make students more actively engaged in learning? One of your answers might be to use a variety of teaching and learning methods which can stimulate their interest. Using different methods of teaching and learning can enhance studentsÊ interest in science. Science lessons that are not interesting will not motivate students to learn and this will affect their performance. This topic will enable you to explore teaching and learning methods such as experiments, discussions, simulations, projects and visits and see how they can be used to enhance learning of science. Each of these methods will be discussed in terms of its general concepts and how they can effectively be used in the teaching and learning of science.
  • 176. 1 66 TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS ACTIVITY 8.1 1. What do you understand by the term „teaching methods‰? 2. Can you think of some teaching methods that you can use for your science lessons? Discuss with your coursemates. EXPERIMENTS 8.1 Children in primary school learn best through firsthand experiences. Thus, experiments play a central role in learning of science. What is an experiment? For an example, have you ever wondered whether brown sugar or white sugar dissolves more quickly in water? You might say white sugar but this is only a prediction which you have made based on your previous experience this is how a hypothesis is formed. An experiment are (Merriam-Webster dictionary, 2003.): (a) A tentative procedure or policy. (b) An operation or procedure carried out under controlled conditions in order to discover an unknown effect or law, to test or establish a hypothesis, or to illustrate a known law. A hypothesis can be defined as tentative answers or untried solutions to the question or problem that is being investigated. For example, „White sugar will dissolve more quickly than brown sugar‰. A fair test of this is an experiment. A fair test is one in which only one variable is changed and all other variables are kept constant. Now, what are variables? Variables are factors in an experiment which can change its outcome. In an experiment, you have to determine the variables involved. This simply means taking all the factors of the experiment into account. There are three kinds of variables as shown in Table 8.1.
  • 177. TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 167 Table 8.1: Variables of an Experiment Variable Meaning Example Manipulated Variable Something that is changed „What shall we change?‰ in the experiment. Type of sugar Responding Variable „What are we trying to find out?‰ Something that responds to the manipulated variable. Time taken to dissolve Constant variable „What shall we keep the same?Ê Something that is kept the same throughout the experiment. Volume/Temperature of water So, what do you think are the variables involved in the sugar experiment? First, look at what you are testing. Yes, it is a type of sugar (brown or white) which can dissolve quickly in water. This is known as manipulated variable. How are you checking to see (evaluating) what happens? You will observe the time taken for each type of sugar to dissolve. This is known as responding variable. At the same time, you will keep all other variables constant. In this case, the constant variables are the volume of water you use and the temperature of the water. As you can see, an experimental procedure requires a high degree of logical thinking, or according to Piaget „„formal thinking‰. Thus, it is not advisable to introduce the term „hypothesis‰ and „variables‰ to lower primary school students (Lind, 2005). However, the concept of a fair experiment can be easily understood by young children by getting them to think about variables with questions like „What are we trying to find out?‰, „What shall we change?‰ and „What shall we keep the same? Remember to provide your students with an opportunity to design their own experiments (see Figure 8.2). This is to prevent experiments from becoming „recipes‰ that are mindlessly carried out by student. Have a discussion with them to determine the hypothesis and variables involved. Let your students plan the experiments. Allow them to measure and analyse data, and eventually present the results of their own experiment themselves. You should take up the role of a facilitator and not as an information provider.
  • 178. 1 68 TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS Figure 8.2: Students should have an opportunity to design their own experiments Source: http://games.pppst.com/science.html 8.1.1 Discussion of Experimental Results After the students have carried out the experiment, they need to discuss the results and form a conclusion. Discussion of results should be carried out by the students under your guidance. This involves two procedures: data processing and information reporting techniques. Conducting both these procedures properly brings about meaningful learning. Let us look at the details of data processing and information reporting techniques: (a) Data processing (i) Representing the data in various formats such as tables, charts and graphs. An example of how data can be presented in a table form is as shown in Table 8.2. (ii) Interpreting graphs and charts. (iii) Identifying the pattern of data and its relationship. (iv) Classifying the data.
  • 179. TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 169 Table 8.2: An Example of a Table to Represent Data My results table. Brown Sugar White sugar Time taken to dissolve I found out that: _____________________________________________________ (b) Information reporting techniques (i) Interpreting the relationship among the results, hypothesis and prediction. (ii) Explaining the results. (iii) Making the report orally or in writing. (iv) Suggesting ways to improve or improvise the experiment or to conduct further experiments. During the discussion, you need to act as a facilitator and ensure that your students are actively involved. You will need to reinforce important concepts and facts and correct studentsÊ mistakes. It is important for you to show attention and appreciation for each of the ideas expressed by your students. At the end of the discussion, remember to summarise all ideas generated during the discussion. In this way, you will ensure that the experiment is meaningful to your students. SELF-CHECK 8.1 Your students want to know if different types of surfaces like glass and sand paper will affect the distance a trolley moves. 1. State an appropriate hypothesis for this experiment. 2. Identify the manipulated, responding and constant variables. 3. How would you present the data collected?
  • 180. 1 70 TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS ACTIVITY 8.2 Julia loves roses and has decided to grow them in her garden. She wants to know whether she is wasting money buying an expensive fertiliser when many cheaper brands are available in the market. She wonders if the expensive fertiliser will make her rose plants grow more healthy than before. How would you advise her to find out if the expensive fertiliser is better? DISCUSSION 8.2 A discussion is an activity in which students exchange questions and opinions on a given topic and is an excellent way to engage students in thinking and analysing. It provides students with a clearer and in-depth understanding of scientific concepts. They will also be able to form opinions and attitudes about issues that are discussed. Discussions can be conducted before, during or after an activity. Here again, teachers should play the role of a facilitator and lead the discussion by asking questions that stimulate thinking. Teachers should also encourage all of the students not to be afraid in expressing themselves. We will further discuss the types of discussion that can be conducted in class in the next sub-topic. 8.2.1 Whole Class Discussions and Small Group Discussions There are two forms of discussions that you can use in the teaching of science: whole class discussions and small group discussions. Study Table 8.3 which outlines the main principles of both types of discussions. Always remember that before beginning a discussion, it is important to make sure that students have adequate knowledge about what is to be discussed. A discussion becomes boring when participants do not know much about the subject of discussion.
  • 181. TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 171 Table 8.3: Whole Class Discussion vs Small Group Discussion Whole Class Discussions Small Group Discussions All the students in a class participate in discussion. Teacher acts as the facilitator and a source of information. Teacher controls the discussion. Teacher should encourage inquiry training as it helps students to develop skills in asking questions and drawing conclusions. Example: Teacher shows a rusty bicycle wheel to the students. Students are asked to give opinions on why the wheel has became rusty. StudentsÊ ideas can be written on the board, discussed and a conclusion can be made together. Whole class discussions provide greater interaction between teacher and students. Students may stay focused on the lesson because they might be called on to answer questions. Students form small groups (usually four or five students in each group) to discuss a topic. Teacher moves from group to group and aids their discussion. Information through teacher-directed lessons, demonstrations, books, videos or pictures should be given to students. Students can work together and may pull their desks closer to one another in order to talk and hear one another better. Each group should have a leader who has to make sure the group stays on the topic and to ensure all students participate. A group secretary can be appointed to write down the groupÊs ideas. At the end of the discussion, group members can prepare a report or make a presentation to the rest of the class. Groups may all discuss the same topic or different sub topics. Example: Students are shown a video on different types of pollution. Each group discusses the ways to overcome one type of pollution. ACTIVITY 8.3 1. Study the primary science curriculum and list three topics that you can use for small group discussions in your class. 2. What are your concerns while carrying out this method? Discuss with your tutor and coursemates.
  • 182. 1 72 TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS SIMULATION 8.3 We will now move on to discuss the topic of simulation. What is simulation? A simulation is an activity which resembles an actual situation. Students take on roles and engage in activities appropriate to those roles (Slavin, 1994). Simulations can make science lessons fun and help students understand concepts more meaningfully. You can use simulations you have designed yourself or use computer programmes that show simulations for science concepts available for the teaching of science. Simulations increase studentsÊ interest and motivation and allow them to learn about science in a situation which resembles the actual situation. Let us look at Figure 8.3 which shows animal masks which you can use to do simulations when teaching about animals. Figure 8.3: Animal masks Source: http://whattheteacherwants.blogspot.com/2010/12/mitten.html 8.3.1 Types of Simulation Methods There are three main types of simulation methods: role play, games and models. (a) Role Play In role play, students play out a particular role based on certain pre-determined conditions. Students are given a situation in which they have to act as characters (human or non-human). Students try to act, feel and react according to the characters they represent. For example, if you want to reinforce your studentsÊ understanding of „food chains‰, you can carry out an activity using masks like those shown in Figure 8.3. When students take on the roles of the animals, they can learn the terms ÂpredatorÊ and ÂpreyÊ,
  • 183. TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 173 and can decide from their own experience what characteristics predators and preys have. (b) Games Games used in science teaching require the application of science knowledge and skills to win. You need to prepare rules that need to be followed when students are playing games. Examples of games are cut-and- paste games, board games, puzzle games, crossword puzzles and memory games. You can also use online games to help you teach. The game as shown in Figure 8.4 cames from http://primarygames.com/science.htm Figure 8.4: An example of a cut-and-paste game Source: http://primarygames.com/science.htm
  • 184. 1 74 TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS (c) Models Models are used to represent objects or actual situations so that students can see these objects or situations and understand the science concepts and principles to be learned. Figure 8.5 shows the three main types of models: solid models, sectional models and moving models. Figure 8.5: Types of models ACTIVITY 8.4 Prepare one activity for your science classroom using one of the following types of simulations: 1. Role play; 2. Games ; and 3. Models.
  • 185. TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 175 PROJECTS 8.4 A project is a learning activity that is generally undertaken by an individual or a group of pupils to achieve a particular objective or to solve a problem. A project generally requires several lessons to complete and can be carried out either inside or outside the school. The outcome of the project can either be in the form of a report or an artefact and needs to be presented to the teacher and other students. A project can be carried out according to the need of the topic taught. It can also be done according to studentsÊ interests, or for a science exhibition. Projects allow students to develop their knowledge and skills in science, their thinking skills as well as communication skills. They also encourage collaboration and give an opportunity for students to show their creativity. 8.4.1 Factors to Consider while Carrying Out Projects in the Science Classroom What are the factors you would need to consider when proposing a project to students? Study Figure 8.6 which shows the factors you needs to be considered in doing a project work in the science classroom.
  • 186. 1 76 TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS Figure 8.6: Factors to consider in doing project work in the science classroom 8.4.2 The Process of Doing a Project In a project work, you should follow a series of steps in order to achieve the objectives that have been identified. The key steps are as shown in Figure 8.7 and should be carried out with your guidance as the teacher.
  • 187. TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 177 Figure 8.7: The process of doing a project ACTIVITY 8.5 Describe how you would carry out a project on one of the topics given below. Discuss your steps during the tutorial session. 1. Growth of seedlings 2. Recycling waste materials
  • 188. 1 78 TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS VISITS AND USE OF EXTERNAL RESOURCES 8.5 The learning of science is not limited to activities carried out in the school compound. It can be enhanced through the use of external resources such as zoos, museums, science centres, research institutes, mangrove swamps and factories. The primary purpose of these visits should be to develop and support learning. Visits to these places make the learning of science more interesting, meaningful and effective. Taking children out of school and into interesting places provides links between classroom activities and those of everyday life, in particular learning of new things that cannot be carried out in class and to see science in action (Harlan Qualter, 2004). A visit should be fun and must make the most of the learning opportunities available. Examples of places you can take your students include (Harlan Qualter, 2004): (a) Natural locations (parks, seashores, mangrove swamps, ponds, forests, etc) where there may or may not be a formal structure for visitors. (b) Places of work (factories, farms, supermarkets, airports, meteorological stations) where there will be someone to accompany the children as well as act as tour guide of the premise. (c) Science museums, aquariums, planetariums, parks, zoos, wildlife centres, science and technology centres, conservation areas, where groups can be supervised by teachers with or without help from staff, but where there are usually finance and other requirements available to enable the visit to be carried out. (d) Other locations (local landmarks, educational institutions, historic buildings, vacant land, etc.) which initially do not seem to have any connection with science but has science potential. 8.5.1 Planning a Visit or Field Trip The key to a successful visit is preparation. There are many aspects you would need to consider when you plan a visit or field trip. First, you need to choose the place you want to visit and identify the aim of the visit. You would then need to check the schoolÊs policy regarding procedures like parental approval, transportation and arrangement with authorities at the place of visit. Study what you would need to do before, during and after a visit or field trip as shown in Table 8.4.
  • 189. TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 179 Table 8.4: Things that Need to be Done when Planning a Visit Before During After Check your schoolÊs policy regarding procedures to carry out visit. Obtain necessary permission from the people from the site of the field trip. Visit the site to find connections to the science curriculum and to assess potential problems. You can also plan appropriate activities that can be carried out during the visit. List specific activities available and plan how the students will use their time. Plan what you want students to notice or investigate. Decide on the date, funding, method of transport and number of teachers needed. Tell students the objectives of the trip and what they will be doing during the trip. Conduct a briefing session regarding safety precautions and appropriate behaviour. Prepare all materials (e.g. worksheets etc.) and equipment (e.g. hand lens, camera, etc.) that you would need for the visit. Write letters to parents asking for permission and describing the field trip (include the educational purpose of the trip, trip itinerary, bus arrangements, date of the trip, student cost, eating arrangements) On the day of the trip, remind students of the objectives of the trip. Take attendance and distribute name tags to students. Divide the class into small groups and assign a leader for each group. Discuss safety regulations. Interact with students as in a classroom science inquiry lesson. Ensure every student is actively involved and answer any question that arises. Provide students the opportunities for them to view the site alone or in groups. Point out interesting features seen during the trip. Take attendance every time there is a movement from one location to another. Carry out a post-mortem session with your students to reflect on and evaluate the trip. Ask students to identify the most important or significant things they have learned from the trip. Ask students to write a report about the trip. Have the class compose and send a thank-you letter to the host of the site of field trip. Conduct appropriate follow-up activities and projects based on the visit.
  • 190. 1 80 TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 8.5.2 Virtual Field Trips As teachers, we know that field trips can motivate and educate students. We also know they are time-consuming, difficult to organise and often affected by unpredictable weather and events. In many cases, the places we would like to visit are not those in short distance to our location. Here, the next best thing to do is to organise a virtual field trip. Virtual field trips are often better because they take you to places you could not easily go to like inside a volcano, under the ocean or into the Solar System. What is a virtual field trip? It is a guided and narrated tour of websites that have been selected by educators and arranged in a thread that students can follow from site to site with just the click of a button. Virtual field trips challenge and expose students to new types of technology. They are a great way to spark studentsÊ interest and motivate their learning in science. In addition, virtual field trips can improve studentsÊ reading skills and expose them to various cultures and environments. SELF-CHECK 8.2 1. Discuss how you would conduct an experiment in your science classroom. 2. Explain briefly the main features of whole class and small group discussions. 3. Describe the three types of simulation methods. What are the reasons for implementing simulation activities in the teaching and learning of science? 4. Give an example of a project you can carry out in your science classroom. Write down the procedures for the implementation of the project. 5. Suggest an external resource to which you would like to take your students. List out the procedures you need to follow when carrying out the visit.
  • 191. TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 181 ACTIVITY 8.6 1. Make a list of places you can visit with your students which are near your school. For each of the places you have mentioned, discuss which science content from the primary science curriculum can be incorporated into the visit. 2. What would be some of your concerns when you organise visits or field trips for your students? Discuss with your coursemates. Teaching and learning methods such as experiments, discussions, simulations, projects and visits can be used to teach science more effectively. An experiment is a method that enable students to test hypotheses through investigations to discover specific science concepts and principles. An experiment must contain both a hypothesis and variables. A hypothesis can be described as tentative answers or untried solutions to the question or problem that is being investigated. Variables are factors in an experiment which can change the outcome of the experiment. A manipulated variable is something that is changed in the experiment. A responding variable is something that responds to the manipulated variable. A constant variable is something that is kept the same throughout the experiment. A fair test is an experiment in which only one variable is changed while all other variables are kept constant. Experimental results needs to be discussed at the end of the experiment. Discussion of experimental results involves two procedures: data processing and information reporting techniques.
  • 192. 1 82 TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS Data processing refers to how the data is presented, classified and interpreted. Information reporting techniques refers to how the results are explained and reported. A discussion is an activity in which students exchange questions and opinions on a given topic. There are two forms of discussions you can use in science teaching: whole-class discussions and small group discussions. In whole class discussions, all the students in a class discuss an issue. In small group discussions, students form small groups to discuss a topic. A simulation is an activity which resembles an actual situation. There are three main types of simulation methods: role play, games and models. In role play, students play out a particular role based on a given task. Games that use science concepts and skills can be used in the teaching of science. Examples are cut and paste games, board games, puzzle, crossword puzzles, and memory games. Models are used to represent objects or actual situations so that students can visualise these objects or situations and understand the science concepts and principles to be learned. There are three main types of models: solid models, sectional models and moving models. A project is a learning activity that is generally undertaken by an individual or a group of pupils to achieve a particular objective or to solve a problem. The factors you would need to consider in doing a project work in the science classroom are age and ability levels of students, availibility of time and resources, mode (individual/pair/group work) and guidelines on how the report need to be presented. The steps to carry out the project are: select a topic, gather information, plan and carry out experiment/activities, analyse and interpret data and write and present report.
  • 193. TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS 183 Learning of science can be enhanced through visits to external resources such as zoos, museums, science centres, research institutes, mangrove swamps and factories. To optimise learning opportunities, visits need to be carefully planned. Planning must be done before, during and after a visit or field trip. This means there must be clear purpose for the visit that the children understand and, most importantly, appropriate follow-up work. A virtual field trip is a guided and narrated tour of websites that have been selected by educators. Constant variable Discussion Experiment Fair test Games Hypothesis Manipulated variable Models Moving Models Project Responding variable Role playing Sectional Models Simulation Simulation Small group discussions Solid Models Variables Virtual field trip Visits to external resources Whole class discussions
  • 194. 1 84 TOPIC 8 TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS Chin, L. F. (2004). Primary science project work in teaching primary science. Singapore: Pearson Education. Esler, W. K., Esler, M. K. (2001). Teaching elementary science (8th ed.).Washington: Wadsworth Publishing Company. Harlan, W., Qualter, Q. (2004). The Teaching of Science in Primary Schools (4th ed.). London. David Fulton Publishers. Hassard, J. (1992). Minds on science Middle and secondary school methods. USA: Harper Collins. Lind, K. K. (2005). Exploring science in early childhood (4th ed.). United States:Thomson Delmar Learning. Martin, D. J. (2006). Elementary science methods: a constructivist approach (4th ed.). United States of America: Thomson Wadsworth. Retrieved 13 July 2011. Virtual Field Trips http://campus.fortunecity.com/ newton/40/field.html Retrieved 13 July 2011. Virtual Science Museums and Exhibits for Children. http://dir.yahoo.com/Society_and_Culture/Cultures_and_Groups/Childr en/Museums_and_Exhibits/Science/ Retrieved 13 July 2011. Virtual Zoo Field Trip http://engagetolearn.com/ ETL/virtualzoo/zoomap.htm Retrieved 17 July 2011. How to do a science project http://www.miniscience.com/How-to-do-a-scienceproject.asp?count=7 Retrieved 17 July 2011. Science Fair Projects http://users.rcn.com/ tedrowan/primer.html Retrieved 21 July 2011. Free Science games and activities http://www.wartgames.com/themes/science.html Retrieved 22 July 2011. Classroom Science Activities http://www.powerhousemuseum.com/pdf/education/toys_science_activ ities.pdf. Slavin, R. E. (1994). Educational psychology. Massachusetts: Allyn and Bacon.
  • 195. ANSWERS W 185 TOPIC 4: COGNITIVE LEARNING THEORIES 2 Activity 4.1 In an inductive approach, the lesson begins with the presentation of specific examples/applications. Then the students are led to form a generalisation. In the deductive approach, the lesson begins with a generalisation, a rule or a concept. Students are then introduced to specific examples or applications of the generalisation. Activity 4.4 Phase 1 Phase II Phase III Presentation of the Advance Organiser Presentation of Learning Task or Material Strengthening Cognitive Organisation • Teacher tells students that the lesson is about objects that are attracted to magnets. • Teacher writes on the board „Magnets are attracted to metals, mostly those that are made of iron and steel‰. • Teacher explains all words that he has written on the board and ensures all students understand them. • Teacher demonstrates how magnets attract objects that are made of iron and steel. • Teacher asks students for other examples of modules that are attracted to magnets. • Teacher gives students objects and magnets and asks students to predict which materials will be attracted to magnets. Answers
  • 196. 1 86 X ANSWERS TOPIC 6: CONSTRUCTIVISM Activity 6.3 Comparison of roles of traditional science teacher and a constructivist science teacher. Traditional Science Teacher Constructivist Science Teacher Teacher provides all science knowledge to students Teacher prepares activities that help students to discover knowledge in science Identifies important information Invites students to identify additional content that interests them Helps students remember information by giving clear explanations and examples Helps students discover knowledge Students are passive learners Students play an active role in their learning Teacher keeps students quiet and focused on task Teachers encourages students to create their own learning; allows a reasonable amount of noise. Teacher has authority and gives directions Teacher is interactive and negotiates with students Students work alone Students work in groups Self-Check 6.1 1. A 2. B TOPIC 8: TEACHING AND LEARNING METHODS Activity 8.1 1. A teaching method is a method of instruction based on a learning theory, model or principle. It includes a series of actions or steps taken by the teacher to achieve certain teaching and learning outcomes.
  • 197. ANSWERS W 187 2. Other teaching methods that can be used to teach science are demonstrations, learning through playing, story telling, problem solving, cooperative learning, etc. Self-Check 8.1 1. Hypothesis: Different surfaces affect the distance a trolley moves. 2. Manipulated variable: type of surface (glass, sand paper) Responding variable: time taken for trolley to move Constant variable: distance trolley moves, trolley, etc. 3. The data can be presented in the form of a table. Activity 8.2 Julia can carry out an experiment using the design below: Hypothesis: The expensive fertiliser will make the rose plants grow more healthily. Manipulated variable Type of fertiliser (expensive and cheap one) Responding variables Number of leaves / Height Constant variables Place planted / Volume of water / etc Activity 8.6 2. Ć Sometimes a field trip might not achieve the anticipated objectives Ć Weather can be a hindrance Ć It can be costly Ć Extra effort is needed for planning Ć Safety measures must be taken Ć Transportation has to be planned